W-holy Festivities

! ! ! = WARNING = ! ! !

worldserviceworld is for seekers after methods to world service by "everyday people" for everyday "livingry" application. This knowledge developed into wisdom is only to be read, absorbed and applied for the betterment of the world.

If you are seeking self-aggrandisement, CEASE NOW ! ! !

The Call
"Go to Prepare for the Time After the End." The call is for sane and normal men, women and children who can comprehend the situation, face what must be done, and then give their daily lives to expressing for the world the qualities of the citizens of the kingdom of Souls / Thinkers: love, knowledge to wisdom for the one human race, non-critical of another, non-separativeness and freedom from hatreds and partisan, creedal beliefs.

When such men can be gathered together in large numbers on the mental [/conscious thought] & astral [/desire/emotional] planes (and they are gathering/activating rapidly) we shall have the fulfilment of "On earth peace, good will toward men.

&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

N. B.

brother(s)/hood, son(s), he/him/himself/his, man, men etc. is a transmittive mental symbol in toto’ is an inclusive spiritual term for FEMALE & MALE aspirants-on-up-to-the-highest-Chohan.

Race- the one human race, not the separative human sub-races based upon the false premise of COLOUR , geography, religious system, etc.. 

2.22.2002, 5 AM,EST

DO PARTICIPATE in WORLD

CELEBRATIONS of LIFE / AT-ONE-ING FESTIVALS

For the

HUMAN, third Logoic

planetary Centre

In the first part of our message under this title, we had much to say about the form into which the great world religions in the East and in the West have crystallised and its consequent deterioration. It will be essential, therefore, to look at and appreciate the fundamental truths which that form has preserved, even whilst hiding them. It will be valuable for us to realise that within the churches men of God and noos of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar have ever worked, laboured and suffered. They have seen and agonised over the distortions and the misrepresentations. They have been hindered by the organisation, oft despised by the theologians, and have remained simple in the midst of learning. They have been loving and universal in their individual consciousness, among the separative and fanatical. They are the glory of the church_ oft hated when alive and oft canonised after death. Their glory lies in the fact that they testify to the progress of the spiritual man and express in fullness what is in every evolving man-women-children; they are the flower of evolution and the tried representatives of God. In the indictment of the churches, given earlier, let us not forget the Christians found within those churches.

We would remind you that we write as one who believes in the great spiritual realities and who regards the unfolding spirit of man as the unshatterable evidence of the existence of "the One in Whom we live and move and have our being." We speak as those who believe in and loves the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar and who know Him to be the Master of all the Masters and the Teacher alike of deva / angels and of men. We are those who look to the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar / Brotherhood as the supreme expression of divinity upon Earth. And who knows the extent of His sacrificial work for humanity, the wonder of the revelation which He brought, the imminence of His return and of His coming Assumption of spiritual rule in the hearts of m-w-c everywhere. We know that He has no pleasure in the great stone temples which man has built whilst His people are left without practical guidance or reasonable light upon their affairs. And we know too that He feels, with an aching heart, that the simplicity which He taught, and the simple Way to God which He emphasised have disappeared in the fogs of theology and the discussions of churchmen throughout the centuries. We know that He realises that the words He spoke have been lost in the labyrinths of the ecclesiastical minds which have sought to interpret them. And that the simple teaching of the Approach to God which He taught has been superseded by the pomp and ceremony of elaborate rituals.

To sum up: Because of the divergences of the many exoteric faiths, the multiplicity of the sects and cults in both the Orient and Occident, and the quarrels of theologians over words, phrases and interpretations, the sons/daughters of God_ in process of development_ are left without the needed help to contact the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar / the Spirit of Peace and His great group of noos, the spiritual leaders of humanity. The way to Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar, the living, loving Expression of God, is not made clear to the seeker. Together, the two great Sons of God present to mankind_ the One in the East and the Other in the West_ a complete and perfect representation of Deity; by Their lives and words They guarantee to man-woman-child the possibilities always latent in the human spirit.

Today the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar and the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar wait until the hour strikes. Then Their united effort, plus the invocative appeal of all who truly know and truly love, will bring humanity the new revelation for which they wait.

The new world religion must be based upon those truths which have stood the test of the ages. This we said elsewhere and enumerated four of those truths:

1. The Fact of God

2. Man's Relationship to God

3. The Fact of Immortality and Eternal Persistence

4. The Continuity of Revelation and the Divine Approaches.

These four facts are basic realities and truths. which have conditioned the masses of m-w-c for aeons. Human unhappiness is founded primarily upon man's inability to live fully in the consciousness of these four fundamental realisations. But they are steadily taking shape in human thinking and for them the United Nations fights.

Two more great and foundational facts are also part of the human state of awareness.

5. The fact of our relationship with each other: This is as much a foundational spiritual fact as is God Himself, because it is linked with our knowledge of Him as Father.

This relationship we call "brotherhood" and it expresses itself (or should we say, it will eventually express itself?) through human fellowship and right human relations. For this we work, and humanity is moving towards that relationship_ and that in spite of the fact of war.

6. The fact of the Path to God: Awareness of this has been preserved for us down the ages by those, who knew God and whom the world called mystics, psyientists and saints. Opening out before aspiring men stretches the Way. The history of the human soul is the history of the search for that Way and its discovery by the persistent.

In every race and nation, in every climate and part of the world, and throughout the endless reaches of time itself, back into the limitless past, men have found the Path to God. They have trodden it and accepted its conditions, endured its disciplines, rested back in confidence upon its realities, received its rewards and found their goal. Arrived there, they have "entered into the joy of the Lord," participated in the mysteries of the kingdom of heaven, dwelt in the glory of the divine Presence, and then returned to the ways of men, to serve. The testimony to the existence of this Path is the priceless treasure of all the great religions and its witnesses are those who have transcended all forms and all theologies, and have penetrated into the world of meaning which all symbols veil.

These truths are part of all that the past gives to man-woman-child. They are our eternal heritage, and connected with them there is no new revelation but only participation and understanding. These are the facts, which the World Teachers have brought to us, suited to our need and capacity at any given time. They are the inner structure of the One Truth upon which all the world theologies have been built, including the Christian doctrines and dogmas built around the Person of Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar and His teaching.

Dimly sensed by the evolving human consciousness hovers another emerging truth of a larger nature_ larger because related to the Whole and not just to individual man and his/her personal salvation. It is an extension of the individual approach to truth. Let us call it the truth of the Great Cyclic Approaches of the divine to the human of which all World Teachers and Saviours were the symbol and the guarantee. At certain great moments, down the ages, God drew nearer to His people and humanity (blindly and unconscious of their objective) at the same time made great efforts to draw near to God. On the part of God, this was intentional, conscious and deliberate; on the part of man, it was largely unconscious, forced upon him/her by the tragedy of circumstance, by desperate need and by the driving urge of the collective soul. These Great Approaches can be traced down the centuries, and each time one took place it meant a clearer understanding of divine purpose, a new and fresh revelation, the institution of some form of a new religion and the sounding of a note which produced a new civilisation and culture, or a fresh recognition of relationship between God and man or man and his/her brother-sister.

A new definition of God was given us when the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar taught that God was Light and showed us the way of illumination, and when Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar revealed to us that God was Love through His life and service on earth. Today the knowledge aspect of illumination is being comprehended, but the inner meaning of love is only now dimly sensed. Yet light and love have been revealed to the world by two great Sons of God in two Approaches. A new Approach is on the Way, bringing us the next needed truth. We ask ourselves: What will it be? For it, the knowers and lovers of God and of their fellowmen are prepared; for it, the masses of m-w-c wait.

Some of these Approaches have been of a major nature, affecting humanity as a whole, and some of them are of less importance affecting only a relatively small part of mankind_ a nation or a group.

Behind this spiritual centre of Love and Light another centre is to be found, for which the West has no name but which is called in the East by the name Shamballa. The Western name is Shangri-Lha_ which stands for a centre of happiness and purpose.

There are, therefore, three great spiritual centres on the planet: Shamballa, the spiritual Hierarchy, and Humanity.

There is definite Biblical testimony to this highest of all centres, Shamballa. At moments of crisis in the earthly life of Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar we read that a Voice spoke to Him, the Voice of the Father was heard by Him, affirming His Sonship / Daughtership = [Transmittorship / Receptorship. This is polarity of Creation and was/is never gender/sexua. wswl] and setting the seal of approval upon His acts and work. At that moment a great fusion of the two spiritual centres_ the Hierarchy and Shamballa, the Kingdom of God and the world of Spirit_ was brought about, and thus spiritual energy was released on Earth. We need to remember that the work of all World Saviours and Teachers is to act primarily as distributors of divine energy and as channels for spiritual force. This outpouring manifests either as the impulse behind a world religion, the incentive behind some new political ideology, or the principle of some scientific discovery of importance to the growth of the human spirit. Thus do religions, governments and civilisations find their motivation. History has demonstrated that again and again these developments are the results of the appearance and the activity of some great man-woman-child at an advanced stage of development. Those who come forth as Teachers, Saviours or Founders of a new religion come forth from the Hierarchy and are of the highest order of spiritual perfection. Those who convey to man the purposes of God through new ideological concepts are not as yet of so high an order, because man is not yet ready for the highest presentation. Much has yet to be learnt and mastered by man, and spiritual unfoldment always outpaces the outer expression of human relationships and the social order; hence the world religions come first and produce the conditions which make the work of the rulers possible. Those who come forth from the spiritual centre, Shamballa, are of great power, however, and the thread of Their influence can be traced throughout history in great declarations and pronouncements such as the Magna Charta, the Declaration of Independence and the Atlantic Charter. Those who come forth from Shamballa or the Hierarchy for the release and the guidance of humanity are evoked by human desire and demand, for there is a spiritual interplay existing between Humanity and the Hierarchy, and between both and Shamballa.

Such Messengers embody divine intention. The response of mankind to Their messages is dependent upon the point in evolution which has been attained by man-woman-child. Back in the early history of the race these Approaches were rare indeed. Countless ages passed between them. Today, owing to the greatly increased power of the human mind and the growing sensitivity of the human soul to the spiritual values as they express themselves through major world ideologies, these Approaches of the divine to the human can become more frequent and are taking on a new form. Man's inner realisation of his/her own innate spiritual potency and the unfoldment of his/her sense of relationship are bringing about an effort on his/her part_ consciously undertaken_ to make true progress towards the good, the true and the beautiful, and this in spite of the fact of conflict and the misery and suffering present upon our Earth. It has therefore become possible to synchronise the Approach of the divine to the human and to instruct the masses of men in the technique of thus invoking the Approach. This attitude of humanity will lead to a new revelation, to the new world religion and to new attitudes in the relation of man-woman-child to God (religion) and of man to man (government or social relationships).

Two major Approaches are to be found in the past history of the race, and both are of such significance that it would be well to note them here. They lie so far back in human history that we have only myth and monument to indicate their happening.

The first great Approach of the divine to man caused the appearance of the human soul and the adding of another kingdom in nature to the three (mineral, vegetable and animal) already existing. The kingdom of man appeared on Earth.

Aeons passed away whilst primitive man continued to evolve, and when the second great Approach took place and the Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet drew nearer to humanity. The spiritual Way to God was opened for those who consciously can move forward, who can definitely demonstrate the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar spirit, and who earnestly seek enlightenment and liberation. The true appeal of Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar's words: "Ye shall know the truth and the truth shall make you free" urges them to move forward into the light, through the gate of initiation and on to that path which "shineth ever more and more until the perfect day." At the time of the second great Approach, the fact of the existence of the Spiritual Hierarchy, of the open door to initiation and of the Way of Sacrifice first dawned on the human consciousness. From that moment men have found the Way and have moved out of the human kingdom into the spiritual; they have transformed their human consciousness into divine awareness. The kingdom of man and the kingdom of God were brought into relationship. Religion became a factor in the development of the human spirit and God drew nearer to His Own. God Transcendent first conditioned man's concept of Deity. Then God as the national controller took possession of man's mind, and the Jehovah concept (as depicted in the Jewish dispensation) appeared; next God was seen as the perfected human being, and the divine God-man walked the Earth in the person of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar. Today, we have a rapidly growing emphasis on God Immanent in every human being. Such have been the results of the second great Approach and such have been the results of the work of the world Saviours and Teachers down the ages, culminating in the work of Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar, Who summed up in Himself the unfoldments of the past and the hope of the future.

A third great Approach is now possible and will take place once the world war is over and man_ purified by fire and suffering_ has set his/her house in order and is ready, therefore, for a new revelation. For this coming revelation the work of the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar and of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar has been preparatory. They embodied in Themselves two lesser Approaches, and through Their united effort, humanity throughout the world has been prepared to play its part in this third Approach.

The Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar came embodying in Himself a great divine principle or quality. He was the Conveyor of Enlightenment to the world; He was the Lord of Light. As is always the case, He re-enacted in Himself, for the instruction of His noos, the processes of illumination and became the "Illumined One." We are told in the scriptures of India that He achieved illumination under the tree, just as Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar achieved the liberation of the human spirit upon the tree set up on Golgotha. Light, wisdom, reason, as divine yet human attributes were focussed in the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar. He proved the possibility of all men achieving this illumination and of walking in the light. He challenged the people to tread the Path of Illumination, of which wisdom, mental perception and intuition are the aspects.

Then came the next great Teacher, the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar. He embodied in Himself a still greater divine principle or aspect, that of Love, whilst at the same time embracing within Himself all that the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar had of Light. Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar was the expression of both Light and Love.

Through Their work, therefore, there is now possible a deeper reaction to, and a broader comprehension of the work and influence of those great Lives Who are waiting today to help humanity. The work of these two Sons of God produced among many results the following:

1. They embodied in Themselves certain cosmic principles, and by Their work and sacrifice certain divine potencies poured through and upon the race, stimulating intelligence into wisdom and emotion into love. The Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar, when He achieved illumination, "let in" a flood of light upon life and world problems. He formulated this revelation into the Four Truths. His group of noos erected a structure of truth which (by the power of collective thought) has flooded mankind with light.

2. Through the message of the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar, man has for the first time grasped the cause of his/her constant distaste and dissatisfaction and has learnt that the Way of Release is to be found in detachment, dispassion and discrimination. Where these are present, there is rapid release from the wheel of rebirth.

3. Through the message of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar, three concepts emerge into the raycial consciousness:

a. The value of the individual and the necessity for intensity of effort on his/her part.

b. The opportunity which was to be presented to humanity to take a tremendous step forward and undergo the new birth or the first initiation.

c. The method whereby this next step could be taken in the new age, voiced for us in the words "love your neighbour as yourself." Individual effort, group opportunity and our identification with each other_ such is the message of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar.

In the message of the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar we have the three methods whereby the personality can be changed and prepared to be a conscious expression of divinity. Through detachment, the brain consciousness or state of awareness (embodying physical recognition of inner causes) is withdrawn or abstracted from the things of the senses and from the calls of the lower nature. Detachment is in reality the imposition of a new rhythm or habit reaction upon the cells of the brain, which renders the brain unaware of the lure of the world of sensory perception. Through dispassion, the emotional nature is rendered immune from the appeal of the senses and desire fails to deter the soul from its rightful task. Through discrimination, the mind learns to select the good, the beautiful and the true, and to substitute these for the sense of "identification with the personality," which is so characteristic of the majority of men. Personality holds so many in thrall. This has to go. These three attitudes, when correctly and sanely held, will organise the personality, bring in the rule of wisdom, and prepare the noo for initiation.

Then follows the work of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar, resulting in an understanding of the value of the individual and his/her self-initiated effort at release and illumination, with the objective of group goodwill. We learn to perfect ourselves in order to have somewhat to sacrifice to the group, and thus enrich the group with our individual contribution.

  1. This is the first result of the activity of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar Principle in the life of the individual.
  1. This is the second result, and is a group activity. The word goes forth to the initiates of the future:

The final result of the work of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar is to be found in our identification with the whole: individuality, initiation, and identification_ these are the terms in which the message of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar can be summarised. He said, when on Earth: "I and my Father are One," throug ed with Deity. Therefore we have:

1. The Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar . . . the method . . . Detachment, Dispassion, Discrimination.

2. The Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar . . . the result . . . Individualism, Initiation, Identification.

It is interesting to note that the work of the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar is expressed in words all beginning with the fourth letter of the alphabet, the letter D. The sense of personality is achieved. The quaternary is transcended, and the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar gave us the reason for this transmutation and the rules. The work of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar is expressed for us in words beginning with the ninth letter of the alphabet, the letter I. And this number is the number of initiation. These things happen not idly but all have their underlying purpose.

We have here very briefly and inadequately outlined the nature of two great Approaches and two minor. These have prepared humanity for the third great Approach, which will bring the new revelation, with its realised consequences, of a new heaven and a new earth. We would ask the orthodox theologian how he/she interprets the words "a new heaven"? May it not signify an entirely new conception as to the world of spiritual realities and perhaps of the very nature of God Himself? May it not be possible that our present ideas of God as the Universal Mind, as Love and as Will, may be enriched by a new idea and quality for which we have as yet no name or word and of which we have as yet no faintest understanding? Each of the three present concepts as to the divine nature_ the Trinity_ have been entirely new when first sequentially presented to humanity.

What this third major Approach will bring to humanity we do not and cannot know. It will bring about as definite results as did the two earlier Approaches. For some years now the spiritual Hierarchy has been drawing nearer to mankind, and this is responsible for the great concepts of freedom which are so close to the hearts of men everywhere today and for which humanity is now fighting. As the Members of the Hierarchy approach closer to us, the dream of Brotherhood, of fellowship, of world co-operation and of a peace (based upon right human relations) becomes clearer in our minds. As They draw nearer we vision a new and vital world religion, a universal faith, at-one in its basic idealism with the past but different in its mode of expression.

We have cited earlier the foundational truths upon which the new world religion will rest. We would suggest that the theme of the coming religion will be that of the great Approaches themselves. It will emphasise anew God's love for man as evidenced in these divine Approaches and also man's response to God as the word goes forth: "Draw near to God and He will draw near to you"; that it will_ in its rites and ceremonies_ be concerned with the invocative and evocative side of spiritual appeal.

Man-Woman-Child invokes the divine Approach in two ways: by means of the inchoate, voiceless appeal or invocative cry of the masses, and also by the planned, defined invocation of the spiritually oriented aspirants, the intelligently convinced worker, noo and initiate_ by all, in fact, who form the New Group of World Servers.

The science of invocation and evocation will take the place of what we now call prayer and worship. Be not disturbed by the use of the word "science." It is not the cold and heartless intellectual thing so oft depicted. It is in reality the intelligent organisation of spiritual energy and of the forces of love, and when effective, will evoke the response of spiritual Beings Who can again walk openly among men and thus establish a close relation and a constant communication between humanity and the spiritual Hierarchy.

It will be obvious to you that as humanity, through its most advanced units, prepares for this next great Approach it must accept with faith and conviction (faith for the masses, and conviction for the knowers and the New Group of World Servers) the premises stated above:

1. The fact of God (God Transcendent)*

2. Man's relationship to the divine (God Immanent)

3. The fact of immortality

4. The Brotherhood of man (God in expression)

5. The existence of the Way to God

6. The historicity of the two great Approaches and a third and imminent Approach.

It is here that the churches, if regenerated, can concentrate their efforts, cease perpetuating the outer and visible form, and begin to deal with the reality underlying all dogmas and doctrines. Upon these inner assurances man must take his/her stand. A study of them will reveal that the majority of the unthinking masses (an immense majority) do accept them hopefully and with desire, though without any definite understanding. A steadily, increasing minority also accept them with a full convinced awareness_ an awareness that is the result of the transformation of hope into self-proven fact. In between these two extremes is a large group of questioning people; they are not part of the unintelligent mass, nor are they yet either psyientists, mystics or even aspirants. They question and seek conviction. They repudiate faith as unintelligent, but long for a substitute. They are constantly emerging out of the mass of men and constantly moving forward in consciousness through the following of spiritual techniques, eventually taking their stand among those who can say with St. Paul: "I know Whom I have believed." It is with these techniques that the true religious teaching should primarily concern itself.

As we look ahead into the world of tomorrow and begin to question what structure the faith of humanity should assume and what building the skill of the knowers will erect to house the religious spirit of man, three more fundamental truths appear to be emerging as necessary adjuncts to the revealed body of truth:

1. The demonstrated existence of a Spiritual Hierarchy, the life-purpose of which is the good of humanity. The Members of the Hierarchy are seen to be the Custodians of the divine Plan and expressions of the Love of God.

2. The development of the Science of Invocation and Evocation as a means and method of approach to divinity: This will grow out of the ancient habits of prayer as used by the masses, and the practice of meditation/IDtation as developed by the mystics and psyientists. Prayer and meditation/IDtation are the preliminary steps to this emerging science. What is vaguely called "worship" is the group effort to establish some form of united approach to the spiritual Hierarchy, functioning under the guidance and control of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar and related to the highest spiritual centre, Shamballa, through its most advanced individuals, just as humanity is related to the Hierarchy by its spiritually minded people.

3. The realisation that the starry heavens, the solar system and the planetary spheres are all of them the manifestations of great spiritual Lives and that the interrelation between these embodied Lives is as real and effectual as is the relation between members of the human family.

The spiritual Hierarchy of the planet, the ability of mankind to contact its Members and to work in cooperation with Them, and the existence of the greater Hierarchy of spiritual energies of which our tiny planetary sphere is a part are the three truths upon which the coming world religion may be based.

Relationship to God, through Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice has ever been the teaching of the spiritual leaders of the world, no matter by what name they called Him. In the future we shall draw closer and more intelligently to the living substance of Reality and be more definite in our apprehension of this hitherto vaguely sensed relationship. We shall know and see and understand. We shall not just believe, have hope and try to comprehend. We shall speak openly of the Hierarchy and of its Members and Their work. The hierarchical nature of all spiritual Lives, and the fact of the great "chain of hierarchies" stretching all the way up from the mineral kingdom through the human and the kingdom of God to apparently remote spiritual groups, will be emphasised. Then there will open for the spiritual Lives what has been called "the Way of the Higher Evolution." Much along these lines has been given out during the past two centuries. The fact of the existence of the Hierarchy is consciously recognised by hundreds of thousands today, though still denied by the orthodox. The general public are familiar with the idea of the existence of the Masters, and either gullibly accept the mass of futile and idiotic information handed out by many today or fight furiously against the spread of this teaching. Others are open-minded enough to investigate whether the teaching is true and to follow the techniques suggested, in the hope that hypothesis may turn to fact. This last group is steadily increasing in number and upon their accumulating evidence belief can be translated into knowledge. So many know the truth today; so many people of integrity and worth are co-operating consciously with Members of this Hierarchy that the very foundations of the ecclesiastical antagonisms and the belittling comments of the concrete minded are of no avail. What the orthodox theologian and the narrow doctrinaire have to offer no longer satisfies the intelligent seeker or suffices to answer his/her questions; he/she is shifting his/her allegiances into wider and more spiritual areas. He is moving out from under doctrinal authority into direct personal, spiritual experience and coming under the direct authority which contact with Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar and His noos, the Masters, gives.

In considering our second point, the Science of Invocation and Evocation, we are also moving forward into the area of mental understanding. The grasping nature of many of the prayers of men, based as they are upon desire for something, has long disturbed the intelligent. The vagueness of the meditation/IDtation taught and practised in the East and in the West and its emphatically selfish note (personal liberation and personal knowledge) are likewise causing a revolt. The demand today is for group work, group good, group knowledge, group contact with the divine, group salvation, group understanding and group relationship to God and the Spiritual Hierarchy. All this indicates progress.

At this point it should be useful to repeat part of what we said elsewhere concerning future developments along this line.

This new invocative work will be the keynote of the coming world religion and will fall into two parts. There will be the invocative work of the masses of the people, trained by the spiritually minded people of the world (and working in the churches, whenever possible, under an enlightened clergy) to accept the fact of the approaching spiritual energies, focussed through the spiritual Hierarchy. There will be the invoctive work of the masses to voice their spiritual demand for light, liberation and understanding. There will also be the trained, scientific work of appeal and invocation as practised by those who have trained their minds through right meditation/IDtation, who know the uses of sound, of formulas and of invocation, and who can work consciously, focussing the invocative cry of the masses and at the same time using certain great formulas of words which will later be given to the race, as The Lord's Prayer was given by the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar and The Great Invocation has been given in this day and age.

This new religious science (for which prayer, meditation/IDtation and ritual have laid the foundation) will train its students to present, at certain stated periods throughout the year, the voiced demand of the people of the world for relationship with God and with each other. This work, when rightly carried forward, will evoke response from the waiting Hierarchy; through this response, the belief of the masses will gradually be changed into the conviction of the knowers. In this way humanity will be transformed and spiritualised. Then will begin, as the ages pass away, the regeneration of material nature, with the two spiritual centres_ the Hierarchy and Humanity_ working together in full consciousness and understanding. The Kingdom of God will be functioning on Earth.

It will be apparent to you that we can indicate only the broad general outlines of the new world religion. The expansion of the human consciousness, which will take place as a result of the coming great Approach will enable man to grasp: his/her relation to the spiritual Life of our planet, the "One in Whom we live and move and have our being." It also gives him/her a glimpse of the relation of our planet to the circle of planetary lives moving within the orbit of the Sun and the still greater circle of spiritual Influences, which contact our solar system as it pursues its orbit in the Heavens (the twelve constellations of the zodiac). Astronomical and astrological investigation has demonstrated this relationship and the influences exerted, but there is still speculation and much foolish claiming and interpretation. Yet the churches have ever recognised this relationship, and the Bible has testified to it: "The stars in their courses fought against Sisera"; "Who can withstand the sweet influences of the Pleiades?" and many other passages bear out this contention of the Knowers. Many church festivals are fixed by reference to the moon or a zodiacal constellation. Investigation will prove this to be increasingly the case, and when the ritual of the new world religion is universally established this will be one of the important factors considered.

The establishing of certain major Festivals in relation to the moon, and in a lesser degree to the zodiac, will bring a strengthening of the spirit of invocation and the resultant inflow of responsive influences. The truth lying behind all invocation is based upon the power of thought, particularly in its telepathic nature, rapport and aspect. The unified invocative thought of the masses and the focussed, directed thought of the New Group of World Servers constitute an outgoing stream of energy. This will reach telepathically those spiritual Beings Who are sensitive and responsive to such impacts. Their evoked response, sent out as spiritual energy, will in turn reach humanity, after having been stepped down into thought energy, and in that form will make its due impact upon the minds of men, convincing them and carrying inspiration and revelation. Thus has it ever been in the history of the spiritual unfoldment of the world and in the procedure followed in writing the world Scriptures.

Secondly, the establishing of a certain uniformity in the world religious rituals will aid men everywhere to strengthen each other's work and enhance powerfully the thought currents directed to the waiting Spiritual Lives. At present, the Christian religion has its great festivals, the Buddhist keeps his/her different set of spiritual events, and the Hindu has still another list of holy days. In the future world, when organised, all men-spiritual inclination and intention everywhere will keep the same holy days. This will bring about a pooling of spiritual resources and a united spiritual effort, plus a simultaneous spiritual invocation. The potency of this will be apparent.

Let us indicate the possibilities of such spiritual events, and prophesy the nature of the coming world-wide Festivals. There will be three such each year, concentrated in three consecutive months, and leading therefore to a prolonged spiritual effort, which will affect the remainder of the year. These will be:

1. The Festival of Easter. This is the festival of the risen, living Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar, the Teacher of all men and the Head of the Spiritual Hierarchy. He is the Expression of the Love of God. On this day the Spiritual Hierarchy which He guides and directs will be recognised, and the nature of God's love will be emphasised. This festival is determined always by the date of the first Full Moon of spring, and is the great Western and Christian festival.

2. The Festival of Wesak. This is the festival of the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar, the spiritual Intermediary between the highest spiritual centre, Shamballa, and the Hierarchy. The Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar is the Expression of the Wisdom of God, the Embodiment of Light, and the Indicator of the divine Purpose. This will be fixed annually in relation to the Full Moon of May, as is at present the case. It is the great Eastern festival.

3. The Festival of Goodwill. This will be the festival of the spirit of humanity_ aspiring towards God, seeking conformity with the Will of God and dedicated to the expression of right human relation. This will be fixed annually in relation to the Full Moon of June. It will be a day whereon the spiritual and divine nature of mankind will be recognised. On this festival, for two thousand years, the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar \ The Prince of Peace has represented humanity and has stood before the Hierarchy and in the sight of Shamballa as the God-Man, the Leader of His people and "the Eldest in a great family of brothers " (Romans VIII: 29). Each year at that time He has preached the last sermon of the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar before the assembled Hierarchy. This will therefore be a festival of deep invocation and appeal, of a basic aspiration towards fellowship, of human and spiritual unity, and will represent the effect in the human consciousness of the work of the Intuition, Reason & Wisdom Avatar and of the Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice Avatar.

These three festivals are already being kept throughout the world, though they are not as yet related to each other, and as part of the unified spiritual Approach of humanity. The time is coming when all three festivals will be kept simultaneously throughout the world. By their means a great spiritual unity will be achieved and the effects of the great Approach so close to us at this time will be stabilised by the united invocation of humanity throughout the planet.

The remaining full moons will constitute lesser festivals, but will be recognised to be also of vital importance. They will establish the divine attributes in the consciousness of man-woman-child, just as the major Festivals establish the three divine aspects. These aspects and qualities will be arrived at and determined by a close study of the nature of a particular constellation or constellations influencing those months. For instance, Capricorn (December) will call attention to the first initiation, the birth of Peace, Brotherhood & Sacrifice in the cave of the heart, and indicate the training needed to bring about that great spiritual event in the life of the individual man. We give this one instance to you in order to indicate the possibilities for spiritual unfoldment that could be given through an understanding of these influences, and in order to revivify the ancient faiths by expanding them into their larger undying relationships.

We have, therefore, the following:

Shamballa the Will aspect of God Wesak May Full moon (Taurus)

Hierarchy the Love aspect of God Easter April Full moon (Aries)

Humanity divine Intelligence Goodwill June Full Moon (Gemini)

The remaining nine Full Moons will be concerned with the divine characteristics and their development in mankind.

Thus the twelve festivals will constitute a revelation of divinity. They will present a means of bringing about relationship, first of all during three months with the three great spiritual centres, the three expressions of the divine Trinity. The minor festivals will emphasise the inter-relation of the Whole, thus lifting the divine presentation out of the individual and the personal into that of the universal divine Purpose; the relationship of the Whole to the part and of the part to that Whole will be thereby fully expressed.

Humanity will therefore invoke the spiritual power of the Kingdom of God, the Hierarchy; the Hierarchy will respond, and God's plans will then be worked out on Earth. The Hierarchy, on a higher turn of the spiral, will invoke the centre of God's Will, Shamballa / Shangri-Lha, thus invoking the Purpose of God. Thus will the Will of God be implemented by Love and manifested intelligently; for this mankind is ready, and for this the Earth waits.

W-Holy Festivals / Celebrations of Life:

Substantiate the fact of the Christ's, [AKA the Prince of Peace because representing the Spirit of Peace], physical existence among us ever since His so-called departure.
To demonstrate on the physical plane, the factual solidarity of the Eastern and Western approaches to God. Both the Christ, Prince of Peace and the Buddha, the Illumined One are present.
To rally and meet in synthesis, and, symbolically to link up and represent the Father's House_ the Kingdom of God [some noos / noos. Initiates merged with the Angel / Deva lives are the fifth kingdom in Nature & up.].
To demonstrate the nature of the work of The Prince of Peace as the great and chosen Intermediary, standing as the representative of the Spiritual Hierarchy; Head of the Fourth Hierarchy ( all human Initiates); founder and leader, in His person, of the New Group of World Servers. He voices their demand for the recognition of the factual existence of the Kingdom of God, here and now.
Beginning acknowledgement and recognition of the great truth and fact of the physical Presence on Earth at this time of the Prince of Peace, His Group of noos and executives, of Their representative activities on behalf of mankind, and Their close relationship.
To continue the present cycle (since 1946) in which humanity became more involved in the fests / CoL than ever before.
To achieve the intention of the Illumined One and the Prince of Peace that in each country there should be groups who will act as Their Representative at the Time of the festivals, so that the distribution of spiritual energy from the First Great Aspect / Ray will be direct from the Illumined One (and later Shamballa) to the Prince of Peace, and then from the Prince of Peace to those noos in every country who can be overshadowed, and so act as channels for the direct current of Energy.
The same procedure will be followed at the time of the Full Moon of June, except that Shamballa will not be so involved, and with the difference that at the May Festival it will be first Ray noos who will be overshadowed, and at the June festival second ray noos will represent the Prince of Peace in every land. This can mean the soul or the personality ray of the noos.

No cost is too great to pay in order to be of use to the Hierarchy at the time of the Full Moon of May, the Wesak Festival; no price is too high in order to gain the spiritual illumination which can be possible, particularly at that time.


ngws' pledge law karmic liabilities freewill 1.0 synopsis of law the first purpose of deity
the fourth purpose of deity death present attitudes to death death & the etheric body
disease & death the devachanic experience service distinctive methods of ray service
seven rays the rays enumerated theproblemofsex W-HolyFestivals W-Holy Festivals updated W-Holy Festivals part 3 Notice of imminent changes Shamballa Ageless Wisdom
Wesak Data3

a. For the importance of the Full Moon.

b. What should be done and happen at the time of the Full Moon.

c. Information that you may find of the cause of the spiritual opportunity.

@@@@@@@

To those of you who can appreciate and use the Great Invocation, we would suggest its renewed and earnest use. This alternative invocation might, however, be suggested and found useful:

"O Lord of Light and Love, come forth and rule the world.

May the Prince of Peace appear and end the conflict of the nations.

May the reign of Light and Love and Justice be begun.

Let there be peace on earth, and let it begin with us."

&&&&&&&

Legend:

He or he/she = Heesh

His or his/her = Hisser

Him or him/her = Himmer

Bros./Sis. = brosis

Right Relations = RR

&&&&&&&

We are seeking today all over the world for groups of aspirants and noos who can and will use the Great Invocation in the right way and who will be willing, consequently, to be trained to do so. In this way there will be groups upon the physical plane and in everyday life who will be able to combine their efforts with those of the Hierarchy and thus produce an effective use of the Great Invocation with its stupendous results.

The Masters of the Ageless Wisdom

&&&&&&&

History 101:

CALL TO A UNITED ACT OF SERVICE

November 1939

The situation is serious. Sea and air and land are arrayed against the Forces of Light; they are the agents of material substance and can be used potently against the spiritual Forces. The forces of the air are, however, increasingly on our side. The Members of the Hierarchy are hard put to it to turn the tide in favour of that true and more spiritual civilisation which is on the way. This civilisation will be a combination of the best which has hitherto been produced and that which is new and, as yet, dimly sensed by the best of the world thinkers. The tide must be turned in favour of that which we call righteousness.

The seeds of evil are in every country; those who conflict against that which is good are numerous in every land, whether they conflict with aggressive and planned intent, whether they preserve an attitude of passivity and acceptance, or a planned neutrality, as in America, or are actively fighting for that which is against the material forces.

The World Crisis was, as you know, inevitable, but physical warfare could have been avoided if right psychological methods had been employed, and it could have been cured if a process of transmutation and of transference had been correctly carried forward, and if the spirit of sacrifice had also been demonstrated by the world aspirants. The need for group sacrifice has not met with adequate response, except in those cases where it has been imposed by governments upon their nationals. Such is the sorry history of what is taking place today.

What can be done at the present moment to arrest defeat and the overwhelming of the Forces of Light? Here we refer not to the outer physical victory. True victory will not be indicated unless the higher values which should govern human civilisation emerge with clarity and power. We would here like to emphasise the fact that the tide must be definitely turned before the close of the year if a prolonged conflict is to be avoided. We would ask you, therefore, to participate in the subjective focussing and rallying of the world thinkers, and particularly the heads of organisations, groups and churches of all kinds and temperaments who can swing their many adherents into a uniform and united activity.

The Masters of the Wisdom have no time today to do the task Themselves; Their hands are full, combating the forces of materialism. These forces are active in every country; the Hierarchy in its consciousness does not isolate Germany, even though these forces have chosen that sad land for their major point of departure and enterprise; in Germany They have Their people working as elsewhere. The Masters of the Wisdom are active in dispelling the depressions and terrors which settle down upon all Their workers in the arena of the world today, as these workers struggle to stand steady under the fierce impact of wrong thinking and of world-wide despair; these workers are likewise sensitive (owing to their point of integrated development) to the agony of mind, the tension of emotion and the ravages of physical pain which are felt by all those upon whom the Conflict has had its dire effects, and upon whom it has laid the hand of suffering. Such a sensitivity and such a sympathetic response are apt to produce a condition of negativity and a psychic preoccupation with the immediate situation among all workers, and thus render them deaf to the call of their actual duty or else liable to become distraught by the dual effort of being effective in service, whilst at the same time fighting off emotional reactions. The capacity of the worker to respond, therefore, to the inner voices and to serve dispassionately and selflessly is seriously handicapped.

We challenge all workers and all members of the New Group of World Servers to leave their personal problems behind. This is a time of crisis and such problems must be solved through complete self-forgetfulness. We ask you to work anew with fresh ardour in joyful service, forgetting past weaknesses and failures in the urgency of that which we ask all to do for the world. There has been much lack of joy in the service rendered to the world lately. When we speak thus, we refer not to happiness, which is a personality reaction, but to that joyous confidence in the Law and in the Hierarchy which lies behind the Biblical words, "The joy of the Lord is our strength." "Rise up and fight, Arjuna," preserving the flame of love intact, permitting no breath of hate to disturb the serenity of love or upset that inner poise which will enable you to sound forth the clarion note of world understanding, that will rally all men of goodwill to the aid of the Hierarchy. This will bring to an end all hatred, separativeness and aggression, which are the three major sins of humanity. All men have hated; all men have been separative in both thought and action; all have been and many still are materialistic, full of pride and the desire to gain that which is not their own by right. This spirit of acquisitiveness belongs to no one group; it has been a universal and general fault, and has produced the present disastrous economic situation, thus precipitating the world into conflict, hate and cruelty.

The fusion of many minds into one directed activity is today of supreme importance; this has been symbolised in the union which now exists between two great nations, France and Great Britain. Unity of directed thought and purpose is the guarantee of inevitable and future success. The power of massed thought is omnipotent. The potency of focussed and directed mental activity is unpredictable. If you accept this premise and this statement, then act upon it.

The Spirit of Peace is hovering close to humanity, seeking opportunity to make HisPresence felt. The Spirit of Peace is not an abstract concept but a potent Individual, wielding forces hitherto unfamiliar to our planet. Great Forces are awaiting the hour when They can function as the Liberators and the Deliverers of mankind. But the door to Their entrance must be opened by humanity itself and it will be opened by a united act of the will, expressed through some formula of words and expressed in sound. It will be brought about by an activity performed simultaneously by all men and women of goodwill and by all the world aspirants and noos. The door will not open unless the act of invocation is backed by the focussed will. The directed determination of the man or the group who is using the suggested formula, prayer or invocation is essential.

We would ask you to call as many people as you can reach through the medium of every available channel to a definite activity upon the coming Christmas day, if possible, and again at the time of the full moon of January, thus making two great appeals to the Forces of Peace and Light, so that they may help humanity. We would ask you to get in touch with leaders and workers_ important and unimportant_ in every land, asking them to associate themselves in their own way and with their own people, and to do this on as large a scale as possible_ as large, at least, as that of your effort in May, 1936.

The times are ripe for a response to these ideas; the recognised pain and distress of the world will open both hearts and purses. The idea of a Christmas appeal and call to prayer and to invocation of the Prince of Peace will be potent in evoking a desirable reaction, and will serve also to blend into closer unity all who recognise the work the Hierarchy is attempting to do. We would ask you to call for help from all sides, and to let these ideas work out into the world on the basis of their usefulness and opportuneness. Omit from this appeal none that you know, for through them millions can be reached and swung into the desired activity.

To those of you who can appreciate and use the Great Invocation, We would suggest its renewed and earnest use. This alternative invocation might, however, be suggested and found useful:

"O Lord of Light and Love, come forth and rule the world.

May the Prince of Peace appear and end the conflict of the nations.

May the reign of Light and Love and Justice be begun.

Let there be peace on earth, and let it begin with us."

THE COMING WORLD ORDER

April 1940

This analysis of world conditions is being written in America, where there is, as yet, relative physical safety and time for the re-adjustment of views, and the opportunity also to give direction_ along with embattled Britain and her Allies_ to a world sorely needing guidance and vision. There is great confusion of voices. Those who know the least speak ever the loudest and apportion the blame for events with facility. There is much mental distress everywhere, occasioned by the conflict and also by the desire of the well-intentioned to stress their particular solutions of the world problem.

It is necessary, therefore, to speak with directness, to indicate the inherent dangers of the present situation, to present its amazing opportunity to bring about needed changes, and to point out the lines of demarcation between the right and the wrong ways of living, between a vision of the new world order and the retrograde plans of the so-called "new order" with which the totalitarian powers seek to bewilder humanity.

We start with the premise that two opposing world visions confront humanity and that two world orders are presented to mankind. Between these man must choose, and his choice will determine the future.

The years 1941 and 1942 will be years of crisis and of tension. Those who perceive the risks, the opportunity, and the important decision to be made are struggling with almost frantic haste to awaken the masses to the uniqueness of this moment. What mankind decides during the next twelve months will condition the future as no other human decision has ever before done in the history of mankind.

There have been points of crisis before in history, but not one that involved the entire planetary population. There have been periods of danger, difficulty, conflict, famine and distress, but none which conditioned the lives of untold millions as does the present. Time and again there has been the emergence of leaders, conquerors, dictators and world figures, but they have hitherto come at a time when their influence was limited by world communications and by national limitations; therefore their power was not universal and their progress was arrested by the conditions of the period in which they lived. Today, the entire planet is involved and all the nations of the world are definitely affected.

There is the setting up of barriers in a futile effort to keep out of trouble and avoid conflict; dominant groups are swinging many nations under their banners so that they are either associated with the totalitarian powers or with those nations which are opposing them. The nations which are not actually belligerents are equally active in the task of endeavouring to preserve their national integrity.

The conflict today is a world conflict. The following groups of people are involved:

1. The fighting aggressor nations, ruled by ambitious dictators.

2. The nations which are seeking to defend themselves and the liberties of humanity.

3. The neutral nations, seeing the issues involved and faced with the immediate necessity to take sides.

The momentum of this struggle is gaining daily. Fresh areas of the world are being swept into the conflict every week. The real issues, the impending economic results and the political implications are emerging with growing clarity in every land and_ make no mistake_ even in those lands which lie numbed and suffering under the heel of the conqueror. Among them there is a silent and at present voiceless revolt. The inner speechless revolt in itself constitutes a menace to world peace and, if evoked into full expression, may plunge the world still deeper into conflict.

Facing humanity today are two major dangers. These are: first, the conflict will be so prolonged that humanity will be completely exhausted, and thus a stalemate will be reached and a situation will arise which will bring to an end all civilised relationships and all hope of an ordered life of beauty, peace and culture. Secondly, the nations not yet involved will fail to see the realities of the situation and will not come to the assistance of those fighting for the preservation of national and individual freedom. If this should prove to be the case, then_ without so intending and yet inevitably_ they will stand on the side of evil and share in the responsibility of engineering world disaster.

Today, there are no more than two parties in the world_ those who are on the side of right human relations and those who are on the side of selfish and cruel power politics. The totalitarian powers are on the march_ ruthless, selfish, cruel and aggressive; the powers which are battling for human liberty and for the rights of the defenceless little nations are standing with their backs to the wall, facing the strongest display of human might that the world has ever seen. The nations which are not yet physically involved are preparing for some form of action and for defence_ defence against the dictator powers but not against the fighting democracies.

The battle today is being fought out on the land, on the sea, and in the air. From the economic standpoint, every country is involved, and ruin stalks in the wake of conflict; the stopping of imports or of exports in many lands is bringing about the financial ruin of thousands; the pressure of economic disaster, the fear of famine and pestilence and the constant risk of becoming actively a part of the conflict faces every country not yet actually in the fighting line. The fear of defeat, of death and injury, and of the loss of all possessions is added to these problems, where the nations at conflict are concerned.

Humanity must face up to these facts. No matter how people may evade the truth, no matter how they may escape into a dream world of wishful thinking, the fact remains_ inevitable and undeniable_ that the world is at war/in conflict and everyone is involved.

&&&&&&&

An Historical Perspective

Special occasions on which these forms will be employed.

The great event on the planet in direct relation to the human race is the Wesak Festival. There is one still greater moment in the calendar when a funnel is created directly between the earth and the supreme Ruler Hisself, the Logos of our system. This is accomplished through the power of certain mantrams and the united efforts of the Hierarchy and the Deva Lords / Arch - Angels of the planes. These Arch - Angels / Deva Lords are aided by the deva /angel evolution, and the Hierarchy by those of the human race who are steady. They focus through the Lords of the Rays then in manifestation as well as through the Planetary Logos of this planet. The date of this event is not yet for exoteric communication.

&&&&&&&

THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE WESAK FESTIVAL

May 1942

We have now reached the most important moment of the year. This year two such moments are brought together, reinforcing each other, the Full Moon of May and the Full Moon of June. We would have you bear in mind that time and energy are interchangeable terms upon the inner planes. Time is an event, and an event is a focussed expression of force of some type or kind. Two great streams of energy_ one focussed through the Lord of Wisdom and the other focussed through the Christ_ are to be fused and blended and it is the task of the world noos, the initiates and the accepted noos to precipitate this combined energy on to the waiting world where its effective use will be largely dependent upon the sensitive response of the world aspirants. These are to be found in every country and their task is to react to the stream of directed energy. These are the points we would have you bear in mind as you endeavour to work through and in the ashram; in that ashram are to be found all types of noos with all types and degrees of responsiveness.

There is an increasing emphasis being given in the West by esotericists to the Full Moon of May, which is the Festival of the Buddha and is held at the time when He makes His annual contact with humanity. This emphasis, which will continue to increase for years to come, has not been brought about in order to impose recognition of the Buddha upon the Occident. There have been two main reasons why, since 1900, this effort has been made. One was the desire on the part of the Hierarchy to bring to the attention of the public the fact of the two Avatars, the Buddha and the Christ, both upon the second Ray of Love, Who were the first of our humanity to come forth as human-divine Avatars and to embody in Themselves certain cosmic Principles and give them form. The Buddha embodied the Principle of Light, and because of this illumination, humanity was enabled to recognise Christ, Who embodied the still greater Principle of Love. The point to be borne in mind is that light is substance, and the Buddha demonstrated the consummation of substance-matter as the medium of Light, hence His title of the "Illumined One." Christ embodied the underlying energy of Consciousness. The one demonstrated the height of the attainment of the third divine aspect; the other that of the second aspect, and these two together present one perfect Whole. The second reason was to initiate, as we have earlier said, the theme of the new world religion. This theme will eventually underlie all religious observances, colour all approaches to the divine centre of spiritual life, give the clue to all healing processes, and_ using light scientifically_ govern all techniques for bringing about conscious unity and relationship between a man and his/her soul, and between humanity and the Hierarchy.

The first objective has been definitely reached. Today, at the Full Moon of May, many millions everywhere will be turning their thoughts towards the Illumined One, seeking to come under His influence and blessing and that of the Hierarchy at His annual, though brief, return to bless humanity. This recognition will grow until the time in the not too distant future when His term of service will be over and He will return no more, because the coming Avatar will take His place in the minds and thoughts of the peoples of the world. His task of reminding aspirants continuously of the possibility of illumination, and His work of keeping a channel open for the light to irradiate men's minds by piercing annually through light substance to the Earth is nearly completed; the time has nearly come when "in that light we shall see Light."

We would ask you to ponder on these two functions which the Illumined One has performed. There is a third which, in collaboration with the Lord of Love, He has made possible; this is the establishment of a more easily achieved relation between the Hierarchy and Shamballa, thus facilitating the impress of the Will of God upon the minds of men, through the medium of the Hierarchy. This impress we interpret as yet in terms of the divine Plan. This is expressing itself at present in the keen recognition by m-w-c everywhere of the need to establish right human relations, culminating in the objectives for which the United Nations are fighting. These have been voiced for humanity by two great world noos in terms of The Four Freedoms and The Atlantic Pact. These Four Freedoms relate basically to the four aspects of the lower self, the quaternary. Enough light has been permitted to penetrate by the efforts of the Illumined One, to lead to a world-wide recognition of the desirability of these formulas; and there is enough love already in the world, released by the Lord of Love, to make possible the working out of the formulas. Rest back on that assurance and_ in full practice upon the physical plane_ demonstrate its truth. We said "to make possible," for the working out lies in the hands of the New Group of World Servers and the men, women and children of goodwill. Will they prove adequate for the task? Will they brace themselves for the needed strenuous effort?

What now is the task which the Illumined One has set Himself this coming Full Moon? As far as your comprehension is concerned, it is to evoke in humanity the spirit of demand, whilst holding open for them the channel whereby that demand can reach straight through to Shamballa. This is the point to have in mind as you prepare for the Wesak Festival and attempt to participate in the Full Moon blessing_ blessing for the world and not for yourself. The Illumined One comes this year, embodying the force which can stimulate m-w-c everywhere to focus their "massed intent" and thus reach symbolically "the ear and the heart" of the Avatar, wresting thus from the secret place of the Most High the aid, help, and directed recognition which will bring about a phenomenal event in due and proper time. Whilst He is attempting to do this, the Lord of Love will join in the effort by focussing in Himself the spirit of appeal as it is evoked by the stimulation being applied by the Lord of Wisdom, the Illumined One. He will embody that appeal in a Great Invocation, one which cannot be given to you, but which He is prepared to use if the appeal comes forth in sufficient strength from the people of the world. Will humanity respond to the evocation of the Illumined One? Will their massed intent be vital enough to enable the Lord of Love to become Himself, in a mysterious way, the very Spirit of Invocation on their behalf? These are the possibilities with which we are confronted this Full Moon of May.

It is these which we would ask you to have in mind from now until the Wesak Moon and on until after the June Full Moon. It is at that Full Moon that the Lord of Love can and will use this Invocation, provided the will of the people permits. At that time He will attempt to reach the Lords of Liberation and evoke Their response to the focussed will of the spiritually minded people of the world, the aspirants, noos and initiates; They, if evoked, can give the impetus which will enable the Lord of Love (as the Rider from the Secret Place) to come forth in response to the "massed intent" of the general public.

Do you see, therefore, the imminent and vital possibilities? Do you recognise the urgency of the opportunity? The two Full Moons form one complete cycle of work and should be prepared for in line with these statements of ours, both now and in the years which will follow. As you prepare your own hearts, remember that the Full Moon of May is the time in which the New Group of World Servers and all the esotericists and spiritually oriented people of the world must work in full cooperation with the Illumined One, and that the Full Moon of June is the opportunity for the men of goodwill_ aided by the New Group of World Servers_ to arouse people everywhere to make a great appeal, and by this appeal enable the Lord of Love to invoke for them the needed aid.

One thing we would request. Set no dates for the appearing of the Coming One, the Avatar, or for any spectacular aid. If the work is rightly done, He will come at the set and appointed time and the needed aid will be forthcoming. Modes and methods are none of your concern. Regard the ancient prophecies as intrinsically right, true and correct, but recognise that their phraseology is symbolic and not to be taken literally. How the Lords of Liberation will work can only be known to the Hierarchy. Their aid will be focussed upon evoking in the Hierarchy those attitudes and capacities which will make possible the inflow of energy from Shamballa. Their work is with the Hierarchy, and the reaction of humanity to Their activity will come only from the New Group of World Servers, and may even then only be registered consciously by the senior noos and initiates.

The work of the Avatar, the Rider from the Secret Place, will be primarily with humanity and will be for their relief and salvation.

The first half of this work, focussed through the Illumined One, will begin in May 1942. The second half will be started by the Lord of Love in June 1942, but only if the invocation of the New Group of World Servers and the massed intent of the men of goodwill is adequately strong and adequately focussed. It will consequently be a reciprocal process of invocation and evocation, facilitated by the extreme readiness to act and to respond on the part of Those invoked by humanity, but handicapped by the lack of sensitivity and the weakness of the will of those seeking aid. It is this inadequacy which the Illumined One hopes to remove when He comes to His people in May. It is the strengthening and focussing of the will which the Lord of Love is endeavouring to foster with a special effort in June.

These two Full Moons are therefore of paramount importance and should have a definite effect subconsciously upon the minds of the New Group of World Servers and upon the hearts of the men of goodwill in every land, nation and group. Let your meetings, your meditation/IDtation and your individual thinking be steadily focussed upon these points, and endeavour to enter into the Full Moon exercises_ both of May and June_ with as clear an understanding of what is taking place as you can and a clear picture of the possibilities which can come as the result of right action. Both the Full Moons should be times of effective service. The Illumined One does not require invoking. He will come. But the spirit of invocation needs evoking from the masses and it is this work that aspirants everywhere can aid the Illumined One in bringing out, standing thus with Him and with the Hierarchy. At the time of the Full Moon of June, and in preparation for the opportunity during the entire month of May, the point of focus for all servers must be the Lord of Love and every effort must be directed to aiding His work as Representative for the people. He will endeavour to gather into Himself all that they have of appeal, prayer and demand_ voiced or unvoiced_ transmitting it in an act of spiritual intent to Shamballa.

A mobilising of the Forces of Light is going on upon the inner side of life. These Forces stand ready, but the word for action must come from the Lord of Love, and He will give that word when the people give it to Him. We are the conditioners of our own destiny. Neither the Lord of Love nor the Hierarchy may, at this stage in human evolution, take any step vitally affecting humanity unless released into this activity by humanity itself.

From April 15th till June 15th are critical weeks, spiritually and materially,

and this is one of the important facts we want at this time to bring to your attention. We cannot detail to you what you should do or what should be your line of endeavour. We can give you a general idea of the hierarchical Approach and the nature of the human problem. The rest lies in your hands.

Even if the work done is entirely successful, the time of the Appearing and of divine intervention by the Forces of Light, through the medium of Their Agents, the Lords of Liberation and the Lord of Love is dependent upon many factors beside that of right invocation. Of these you can know little, if anything. The question of right timing is one of deep esoteric significance and is basically involved here. The next three years are years of fulfilment and for that period the aspirants of the world are asked to stand steady in patient, yet convinced, expectancy. The task to be done by the Hierarchy involves not only the physical plane but also the inner planes of causes and impulses, of thought and desire. This all noos know but are apt to forget. The critical situation upon the outer plane is only a reflection of still more critical inner conditions, and you can give acceptable help if you evoke your own will and control your emotions, disciplining your personality. Thus you will be able to present a tiny focal point through which the spiritual Forces can work. Through the agency of the many tiny points of light and will, much potency can be transmitted.

It is the will-to-victory that is demanded at this time; it is the will-to-invoke that which is needed; it is the will-to-focus and through this focussing to aid in the great act of invocation for which the Lord of Love is at this time preparing Himself; it is the will-to-goodness, to self-control and to the evocation of right action for which the Hierarchy asks today. If humanity does its part, it will find that Hierarchy more than ready to respond and do its share in bringing about world release from the Forces of Evil.

Will you ponder on this and will you cooperate in every possible way? The plans may be laid, the vision may be seen but unless everyone recognises his/her essential contribution and his/her real usefulness, nothing can be done. There are no limitations when true esoteric work is undertaken. To this end, we seek to emphasise renewed application to meditation/IDtation and a constant steady use of the Invocation, particularly the one which begins by invoking the Lords of Liberation.

"This work," the Lord of Love said, "goeth not forth save by prayer and fasting." We call you to prayer and to meditation/IDtation for both are needed today, fusing as they do the emotional and mental bodies into one aspiring whole. We call you to discipline, for that is the meaning of fasting and to the constant effort to live at the highest possible point all the time; this is so often a dream but not often a fact. Today, in the hour of the world's need, aspirants and noos who are willing to make at least consistent, persistent effort are needed by humanity and the Hierarchy.

Brothers, we have presented the picture; we have held before you for years the vision of opportunity, service and nooship. We have outlined to you the mechanism of service which already is in existence and which can be galvanised into activity and world usefulness. We leave the matter in your hands, asking you to remember that the united interest, love, service and money of the many is far more potent than even the consecrated effort of the two or three. No one is futile or useless, unless he/she chooses so to be.

And in the meantime, paralleling your subjective work and externalising your inner endeavour must be your work for your country and for your fellowm-w-c in humanity's hour of need. There must be steadiness, selflessness and silence, plus courage and confidence_ confidence in the strength of your own souls, confidence in the watching Hierarchy and confidence in the Plan. The end of tribulation is not yet, but it is in sight. With this thought we leave you. May the blessing of the Masters rest upon you as a group and as individuals, and may the Holy Ones Whose pupils you seek to become show you the light you seek, give you the strong aid of Their compassion and Their wisdom until you stand where the One Initiator is invoked, until you see His star shine forth.

Much will depend upon what you and all m-w-c of goodwill and noos think and what they do. We would like to remind you of another most encouraging thing, and that is that the power wielded by those who are seeking to live as souls and in touch with the soul and the world of spiritual realities is out of all proportion to their registered sense of power and usefulness. You are, as you endeavour to wield spiritual force constructively and selflessly, far more potent than you realise. If you add to this realisation the recognition that you are not alone in this, but that people with a vision similar to yours and with the same ideals and spiritual aspiration are to be found in every country without exception of any kind, in every religion, group and organisation, then indeed you can go forward with courage and with hopeful faith. If this is a statement of fact (and we believe it to be so) then let us go forward in unison with Brothers everywhere, conscious of opportunity, of strength, of responsibility and of the joy of service.

As regards some of the things which you can do, We would suggest the following. Refuse to allow yourselves to be swept by any fear psychosis or to be stampeded into any attitude through which the anxiety and unrest and distress in the world can overwhelm you. Strive to stand in spiritual being. Each morning, in your meditation/IDtation, seek to take that attitude with a new and fresh definiteness and to hold it during the hours of service which lie ahead each day. This will not be an easy thing to do, but it can be done if you can get quiet enough for five minutes each morning_ completely and interiorly quiet_ and if you fill your days with vital occupation and true service, guarding with care all thought and speech.

Between now and the Wesak Festival let each of you gain that control of speech which has often been your goal but seldom your achievement, and remember that the most powerful factor in the control of speech is a loving heart. Wild and fearful talk, hateful gossip, cruel innuendo, suspicion, the ascribing of wrong and wicked motives to persons and peoples, and the divergences of attitude which have separated the many different nations in the world are rampant today and have brought the world to its present distressing situation. It is so easy to drift into the same habits of speech and thought which we find around us and to discover ourselves participating in attack and the spirit of hate. Guard yourselves strenuously against this and say nothing which could inflame hate and suspicion in connection with any race, any person, any group or any leaders of groups and nations. You will have to guard yourselves with care, so that even in defense of that which you may personally or nationally approve you do not find yourselves full of hate and breaking the law of love_ the only law which can truly save the world. Perhaps the key to your success along this line will be the silence of a loving heart.

It will be good also to cultivate the joy that brings strength. This is not the time for gloom, despair or depression. If you give way to these, you become negative and destructive focal points in your environment. If you truly believe that the spiritual life is fundamental in the world today, if you do believe that divinity guides the world, if you truly grasp the fact that all men are Brothers and that we are all the children of the One Father , and if you are convinced that the heart of humanity is sound_ are these not adequately potent ideas to hold us joyously steady in the midst of a changing world?

Will you, therefore, carry with you the following ideas?

First, that the Hierarchy of spiritual Forces stands in spiritual Being.

Second, that I too can stand steady in spiritual Being.

Third, that the silence of a loving heart should be my keynote for the coming year.

Fourth, that strength to stand is the result of a joyous attitude and a true orientation to the soul.

&&&&&&&

Preparation for World Goodwill

The causes of the present conflict are ancient. This historical sequence of the predisposing factors can be clearly traced in the exoteric records of all nations as well as in the esoteric records of the Hierarchy. The inherent human qualities which have led to the development of the present conflict are well known. All who are conscious of and observers of the conflict within their own natures, between personality selfishness and the selflessness of the soul, are aware of the implications and the correspondences. Where then lies the solution? What must be done to arrest the fires of hate and of aggression, of revenge and of fear? What also must be done to prepare for that time when the rebuilding of the world of men and the inauguration of the new and better civilisation arrives? With this we might now briefly deal.

As regards active participation in the work to be done in preparing the world for the expression of goodwill, there is little to be done of an active exoteric nature at this time; it is necessary to wait with patience and to see what is going to happen and along what lines the activity of the nations will run. But there is very much to be done of an esoteric and a preparatory nature and it is this which we seek to impress upon your minds.

Up to date and in spite of appearances, the Forces of Light are victorious and are definitely holding things steady. It is for this reason that nothing has yet quenched the spirit of goodwill and of sympathetic understanding which exists among the peoples of all nations, not excluding Germany; this has been the outstanding significant characteristic of the present conflict. There is little hate or vindictiveness to be found, and this fact constitutes the difference between this conflict and the last, in 1914. It indicates a triumph for the Forces of Light and in it lies the hope of the future. It is here, however, that the time factor must be considered, for a prolonged conflict may cause a change in this desirable attitude, and much drastic experience may produce deep psychological and unavoidable changes in human thought and action. This must be consciously offset. It has not yet occurred but it could happen and if it does much pain, terror, fearful anticipation, suffering and the agony entailed by the sight of suffering might eventually turn this goodwill into a dynamic spirit of hate and revenge unless it is definitely and consciously offset. Groups who are adhering to the principles of the Forces of Light, who are bending every effort to end the spirit of aggression and to rid the world of the focal points for material influence and power, must yet carry forward the task of binding men of every nation together in a spirit of loving understanding; they must interpret nation to nation in terms of brother/sisterhood and of the new order.

This is no easy thing to do at this time. The astral or emotional bodies of human beings (which constitute the astral body of humanity as a whole) are today in a state of chaos, and are swept by ancient desires, ancient and deep-seated selfish attitudes and by ancient hatreds. The task is also complicated by the activity of the mental processes of man-woman-child which is characterised by pronounced and developed illusions, by separative attitudes and by specious arguments. But there are, at the same time, enough people in the world who are responsive to the spirit of goodwill, of tolerant understanding, and animated by a desire for permanent right human relations.

We have earlier suggested to you* that it should be possible to have_ at a later date_ a world-wide recognition of a Day of Forgetfulness, of Forgiveness and of Fulfilment of the Biblical injunction to "forget the things which lie behind and to press forward" into the New Age, the new relationships and the new civilisation. For that time we can all begin to plan, and to work for that psychological moment wherein this idea can be presented. It will come immediately after the cessation of hostilities. But today and in every land, where possible, the peoples must be educated in this expression of human synthesis and human interrelation.

It involves, however, an emphasising of the values to which we have referred earlier in this article. This is humanity's joint responsibility because of humanity's general mistakes, and the ancient wrong attitudes and controls. It involves, consequently, a stepping down from the position of critics and assigners of responsibility to that of a joint shouldering of the stupendous task of changing present conditions and of instituting those reversals of policy which will make a united world order possible and beautiful. This is no easy task. It is one which calls all men of goodwill in the world today and challenges them to prepare whilst the conflict is on for what can be done when it is over.

We have given much in the past which can provide a platform of objectives and of methods. Nothing that we have outlined is now abrogated; only fulfilment is postponed. For seven critical years, it lay in the hands of the spiritually minded men of the world, in the hands of the Churches in all lands and of the men of goodwill and of the world aspirants so to work that the present conflict could have been avoided. But the spirit of the Lord of Love was lost in clerical organisation; emphasis has been laid upon technical theology; the spirit of goodwill was not expressed dynamically and practically, but theoretically and negatively; the aspirants of the world had no true sense of values but were content to give a little time to the spiritual life and to other people, but much time was lost in individual, personal aims. A spirit of inertia settled down upon /the better inclined and upon the more understanding people; nothing that we could do served to arouse them to powerful action or to sacrifice personal temporary values to the lasting and universal values. The individual remained more important to him/herself than did the good of the whole.

Be not over-distressed, Brothers. You are not alone in this but part of a vast number, if that is to you any real satisfaction.

But a renewed opportunity lies in front of you and it is of a practical nature, falling into definite spheres of work and of planned activity. You are asked, first of all, to prepare for the great opportunity which will come at the close of this conflict, and

1. To explain clearly to all people the cause which produces the opportunity and which is dedicated to the ending of the present state of affairs.

2. To engineer some dramatic and universal event which will serve as the inspiration and the inauguration of the new era of goodwill and of right human relations.

Secondly, to keep up a steady process of right thought, right interpretation of current events and a right preparation whilst the conflict lasts, so that any weakening of the gained spirit of goodwill can be immediately offset, and so that understanding can grow in potency and not suffer obscuration. In order to bring this about, the following activities are suggested beginning with those which concern the individual worker.

1. A close personal watch over every word said or written, so that nothing said or written by any of you will have in it hate or bias of the wrong kind and your minds and hearts will be kept clear of all undesirable reactions. This is the personal and practical thing to do and the difficult task set before each of you who read our words.

2. Study and apprehend clearly the issues which lie behind this conflict, so that there is no inner wavering as to the rightness of the side on which your interests lie_ the side of the Forces of Light. Parallel this with an understanding appreciation of the problem of those who are bewildered by the emphasis and the dynamic activities of those through whom the Forces of materialism are working. At the same time, also, kill out all hateful criticism in your minds.

3. Endeavour to use the following formula or mantram every day. It is a modernised and mystically worded version of the one which was used widely in Atlantean days during the period of the ancient conflict of which the present is an effect. For many of you this mantram will be in the nature of a recovery of an old and well-known form of words:

"The sons/daughters of men are one and I am one with them. I seek to love not hate: I seek to serve and not exact due service. I seek to heal, not hurt.

"Let pain bring due reward of light and love. Let the soul control the outer form and life and all events, and bring to light the love which underlies the happenings of the time. Let vision come and insight; let the future stand revealed. Let inner union demonstrate and outer cleavages be gone. Let love prevail. Let all men love."

These words may seem inadequate, but said with power and an understanding of their significance and with the potency of the mind and heart behind them, they can prove unbelievably potent in the life of the one who says them. They will produce also an effect in his/her environment, and the accumulated effects in the world, as you spread the knowledge of the formula, will be great and effective. It will change attitudes, enlighten the vision and lead the aspirant to fuller service and to a wider cooperation based upon sacrifice. Brothers, you cannot evade the sacrifice in the long run, even if you have evaded it until now.

4. Then apply yourselves to the spreading of the use of the Great Invocation and help to carry forward the plan for distribution. The Great Invocation, as you will see in the next article which we are writing for your information, is a potent solar instrument designed to bring about changes and needed readjustments. It is so powerful that when it was suggested for general use in the world of men some opposition was evoked among the members of the Hierarchy because They feared its potent effects upon the unready, and undeveloped people. Its use has, however, been justified and it is desired that its usefulness should be very greatly increased and its use far more widely spread.

5. We would have you in your own way prepare for a major spiritual effort which is to take place when this conflict has worn itself out and some measure of peace and calm has come about. Each of you has your own sphere of influence and of contacts and each of you is in touch with similarly minded or enquiring people, with groups and churches, clubs, organisations and societies which are pledged to some form of effort towards human betterment, of goodwill effort, and of endeavour of some kind towards human welfare. Now is the time for much work to be done with the leaders and senior workers in such groups and with people who can be prepared by each of you for active effort when the right time comes. To this task we call each of you. Later you can swing these people into active goodwill work and to effort which will tend to world understanding and fusion. You can with them bring about the healing of the wounds of humanity which will be greatly needed and for which you can now prepare. You can get in touch with such people, keep records of names and addresses and capacity to serve and help, establish group contacts and so systematise your work that when the call goes out (as it did in 1936) there will be found available to the organisers a wealth of ready contacts and of interested and prepared people who will then work intelligently to establish the new order.

6. The instructions in our earlier pamphlets remain as before and should be carefully followed in preparation for a campaign at the close of hostilities. Mailing lists can be gradually brought alive by judicious correspondence and new lists can be compiled; the Great Invocation can be increasingly used if the method outlined by us is studied and rightly organised by each of you, and so the goodwill already present in the world can be brought to a point of dynamic livingness, ready for later use. But, Brothers, nothing can be done unless you do it.

THE GREAT INVOCATION - Stanza One

Let the Forces of Light bring illumination to all mankind.

Let the Spirit of Peace be spread abroad.

May men of goodwill everywhere meet in a spirit of cooperation.

May forgiveness on the part of all m-w-c be the keynote at this time.

Let power attend the efforts of the Great Ones.

So let it be and help us to do our part.

October 1939

Some facts anent the Great Invocation and some explanation of its significance and meanings may enable the psyientific students in the world today to use it with greater fervour and with greater understanding and, consequently, with greater success.

There are several such mantric formulas and Words of Power in use by such students but they fail to accomplish very much because the person using them has no real understanding of their import and purpose and is usually so focussed in his/her emotional, aspirational, astral nature that all that he/she says and does (in connection with such Words of Power) is entirely innocuous and futile. Words of Power, ancient mantrams (such as the Lord's Prayer) and the Great Invocation are only effective if used upon the mental plane and with the power of a controlled mind_ focussed on their intent and meaning_ behind the spoken effort. They then become potent. When said with the power of the soul as well as with the directed attention of the mind, they automatically become dynamically effective.

Students all the world over have for years used the Sacred Word, and have sounded the O.M. with great diligence. We would like here to ask: With what results? We ourselves will reply. With practically no results except a slight stimulation of the aspiration and a small awakening of the creative imagination. This means that the results achieved have had effect only within the aura of the person concerned and have not penetrated into his/her environment or produced any recognisable effects. The O.M. is potent and dynamically effective when rightly used and will produce changes, destroy that which must be eliminated or ended, and will build in, by attraction and consolidation that which is desired into the fabric of the group life, producing incidentally (though none the less certainly) needed changes and the wise reconstruction of the individual life. Ponder upon this.

If the above is true of the O.M. and of its group effects, it is infinitely more true of the Great Invocation. Words of Power (and this is true also of the O.M.) are all of second ray origin. This is the ray of the manifestation of consciousness. They are, therefore, intended for soul use because the soul is the expression of the second aspect of divinity, and only the soul can really employ these Words and sounds and thus produce the desired results which are always in line with the divine Plan. It is frequently forgotten that they must be used by the soul in a dynamic manner, involving the serious recognition of the will aspect. The Great Invocation, the O.M. and all such Words of Power must go forth from the soul (whose nature is love and whose purpose is solely group good), backed by or "psyientificly propelled forth" (to use a translation of an almost untranslatable psyientific idea) by the dynamic will aspect, and carried outwards as an integrated thoughtform upon a stream of living, illumined mental substance. This process therefore brings into activity the will, the love and the intelligence of the man-woman-child who is using these words and formulas. Frequently, however, an hiatus occurs even when a m-w-c has integrated these three controlling factors within him/herself as far as he/she is able to do so at his/her particular point in evolution. All that he/she has succeeded in doing is the retaining of the created thoughtform upon the mental plane; he/she fails to make its presence felt upon the physical plane and to achieve the desired results because his/her brain (the lower receiving and distributing centre within the head) is incapable of the needed dual activity_ retaining awareness of the intent, meaning and purpose of the formula being used and, at the same time, carrying on the task of sending forth the potency, hidden yet conveyed by the Words or sounds. These two activities must be carried on simultaneously by the soul on its own plane through the medium of the mind and the brain. Here again is one of the objectives of all meditation/IDtation work but one which is not emphasised as it is a sequential happening and not an objective. Effectiveness is, therefore, dependent upon a grasp of the above facts and a developed and trained integration between soul, mind, desire, brain and the spoken Word or sound.

What we are here telling you refers not only to the use of the Great Invocation but also to the daily and constant use of the Sacred Word by psyientific students and aspirants in their daily meditation/IDtation. They could change their lives, reorient their life purpose and focus, and achieve spiritual unfoldment and expansion if they could use the OM as it should be used. The Great Invocation, rightly used by the many hundred thousand people who have already attempted to use it, could reorient the consciousness of humanity, stabilise m-w-c in spiritual being, disrupt and rebuild the planetary thoughtform which men have created in the past and which has had (and is having) such disastrous and cataclysmic results, and open the door into the New Age, thus ushering in the new and better civilisation. This could be done so rapidly, that the needed changes would come about almost overnight; the present reign of horror would end and the race of men could settle down to a life of group goodwill, individual harmlessness and right human relations.

Nevertheless, for your encouragement, we would state that the use of it has materially hastened world events, even though it has definitely stirred up a great deal of the trouble and brought it into manifestation upon the physical plane. The basically selfish purpose (even if unrecognised) of those who have used the Great Invocation has served to stimulate the selfish purposes of the forces of materialism. We would ask you: How many used the Great Invocation in a purely detached, spiritually potent and fully understanding manner? The merest handful. How many sent forth the Great Invocation in a spirit of pure love and with a completely unbiased attitude? Very few indeed. How many sounded it out through the medium of a controlled mind, with a recognition and deep belief that it embodied the will of the planetary Logos and must, therefore, become dynamically effective upon the physical plane? Hardly more than a tiny handful. Most of those who used it were intrigued by its novelty, or felt it to be comprehensive though in an unrealisable manner, or considered it must be psyientificly effective because they heard that it emanated from a member of the Hierarchy, was used by the psyientific Hierarchy of the planet, and was endorsed by those they trusted, or because_ foremost reason of all_ anything that could make the world nicer, more comfortable, happier and provide eventually easier living conditions must be at least tried; it did not take long to say and was probably well worth doing. But the dynamic power behind the effort in individual cases has often been personal self-interest, distress at the existing terrible and unhappy world conditions and an emotional reaction at pain and horror and fear. In many ways, this has been a normal reaction to world tension and was to be expected. The standard that we have indicated above is, we well know, too high and too impossible for the average aspirant, and most people are average. But the world need is such that they must now swing out of the normal and, for the sake of service, heighten their consciousness and work more definitely from a higher plane of awareness.

We are seeking today all over the world for groups of aspirants and noos who can and will use the Great Invocation in the right way and who will be willing, consequently, to be trained to do so. In this way there will be groups upon the physical plane and in everyday life who will be able to combine their efforts with those of the Hierarchy and thus produce an effective use of the Great Invocation with its stupendous results.

We would remind you that for the purpose of developing human will and human freedom of action, motivated by group consciousness, the Hierarchy chooses to produce the desired unfoldments and changes upon the physical plane only through the medium of a conscious and awakening humanity. Such a humanity (and it is rapidly coming to this state of awareness through joint pain and suffering) will be impressed by and responsive to the directed thought of the guiding Elder Brothers of the race, but will be free at all times to reject that impression and to proceed as they personally may choose. There is no authoritative control over the minds of men assumed or cultivated by the Hierarchy; all aspirants and noos are free to choose a different way to the one suggested if they so prefer, or if they are unconvinced of the advisability of the indicated method of work, or fear the arduous task of carrying forward the stage of the plan which has been indicated to them, or if they shirk the discipline implied and required by those who seek to make m-w-c correctly responsive to spiritual contact and teaching and so able rightly to interpret the intent of the Hierarchy.

Ability to use the Great Invocation so that it may be effective can be developed if those who are working along the lines of true meditation/IDtation can make a beginning by the right use of the Sacred Word, which does not require such a sustained effort in psyientific concentration. They must learn to breathe it forth in the manner we have indicated above when speaking of the Great Invocation, and must also learn to gauge its results in their individual lives, thus viewing those lives from the angle of the trained spiritual Observer.

We would like to touch briefly and for a few minutes upon the significance of the entire process and method of invocation.

Much has been said and written in the past by the curious investigator and by those engaged in magical work of any kind anent the use of invocation as it applies to elemental forces and subhuman agents, with the consequent evocation of active agents and responsible energies of some kind or another upon the physical plane. What is oft forgotten is that this process consists entirely of the production of contact and subsequent control of the forces of earth, water, fire and air. This is one of the aims of the magical workers but it concerns material nature and the control of substance and, in the realm of the lower psyientism, is allied to the invocation and evocation of money, good health and the tangible material results as practised in the realm of mysticism by many schools of thought. Note this, for it holds a clue to the relation of psyientism and mysticism upon the lower levels of consciousness and indicates the need of both groups to shift their focus of interest and their emphasis on to the higher and more spiritual values. The control of the natural forces and the evocation of the desired material rewards will arrive normally and inevitably but as secondary effects; they will depend also upon the karma or destiny of man recognised and considered, and the m-w-c will escape the danger of being him/herself controlled and motivated by the forces of materialism, letting in_ as this condition must_ much that is evil and dangerous.

The invocation, evocation and resultant activity of the Hierarchy and of those Forces, Energies and Beings Who are not controlled by matter in any way, or by substance (the lower pole of manifestation) but Who are related to the positive spiritual pole is a new activity, and as yet relatively an untried experiment on the part of humanity and the formulas unknown Of what use was it to impart the formulas to humanity when it was as yet controlled by the lower values and unable to lay hold upon the soul aspect and to function on that level of consciousness whereon the soul is found. Only those can use the formulas effectively who live, work, think and feel as souls, which means ever in group terms.

Today, however, there are those in every land who are rapidly becoming aware of the soul as a controlling factor in consciousness, who respond to world affairs and conditions increasingly as souls, and who can, therefore, be trained to work upon the physical plane. When this is so, it becomes possible to impart certain of these Words of Power and mantrams and to institute that new and potent activity which will bring the Hierarchy and Humanity into conscious and direct cooperation, as well as Shamballa and certain great Forces which are interplanetary or solar, and also great cosmic Energies. It is now possible to discover those who_ being free within themselves and who are learning rapidly to be detached and selfless_ can institute and carry forward the task of invoking these higher spiritual forces, thus reinforcing the efforts of the Great Light Lodge. It is this process of spiritual invocation which will motivate the new and coming world religion. This is not magical invocation, as m-w-c understands it, and which is concerned with the invocation and control of the substantial and elemental forces of the manifested world, but the invocation which will evoke contact with the spiritual Lives and the divine embodied Energies as well as with the Hierarchy (which is Their intermediary) in order to bring about the manifestation on earth of the soul of humanity and the qualities of the subjective and inner divine life which all outer forms veil. This is now for the first time possible in the life of the planet.

The objective of these processes of invocation is threefold:

1. To invoke the soul of humanity and so bring about its freer expression upon the physical plane. This can be brought about in two ways:

a. The stimulation of the souls of m-w-c everywhere by the increased inflow of the Lord of Love principle of love, which will express itself in world understanding, goodwill, cooperation, and peace.

b. The setting up of a vibration within humanity itself of such potency that it will magnetically attract a response from the waiting, watching Hierarchy and bring about a much closer and likewise conscious rapport between the two planetary centres, the Hierarchy and Humanity.

This is called the invocation of the Great Light Lodge. Much of this invocation of the Lord of Love principle is carried forward by true believers in all lands (Christian and non-Christian) who address themselves to the Lord of Love, no matter under what name they recognise Him and then, with love in their hearts to Him and their fellowmen seek to ameliorate world conditions, end hatred and misery and demonstrate goodwill everywhere. This refers to the first stage of evoking the response to love and understanding in human hearts and minds as the result of the invocation of the Lord of Love and of the Peace and Love principle. Ponder on these words and see on every hand the process going forward. Esoteric students are apt to overestimate the effectiveness of the work that they are doing. The focussed aspiration and the unselfish struggle to serve which characterises millions of people in the world who do pray to, follow and seek to invoke the great spiritual head of the Hierarchy, the Master of all Masters, the Lord of Love, has now reached a point of true and real effectiveness. It may be, and usually is, untinged by much mental activity or intellectual perception of the implications or the scientific nature of their procedure but is, for that very reason, potent. Esoteric and psyientific students demonstrate almost unavoidably a divided focus, owing to the activity of the mind and their failure as yet to blend perfectly both soul and personality. This leads to the dissipation of energy and oft renders their good intent futile. But, out of these groups are rapidly emerging those who can work in the right way and the results will be increasingly effective.

The evocation of the Hierarchy through right invocation is proceeding also rapidly, producing much activity and response from the Hierarchy of Light.

2. To set up a closer relation with the third, major divine centre on our planet, Shamballa. From that centre, the will of God goes forth and the power of God becomes the messenger of His will. Hitherto that highest form of spiritual energy has only reached humanity (as we have before told you) via the Hierarchy. Today, it is deemed desirable that it should be ascertained whether there are enough selfless and group-conscious people upon the planet to warrant a direct inflow of that higher energy to humanity, thus producing upon the physical plane a hastening of the divine plan and a more rapid working out of that which is to be. This direct contact can be produced if the Great Invocation is used by the world aspirants and noos in collaboration with the Hierarchy. Hence the emphasis we have laid upon all of you using this Great Invocation as souls and as those who are in touch in some small measure with the Hierarchy. When the note of humanity and the note of the Hierarchy are synchronised by the use of the Great Invocation, there will come a dynamic and immediate response from Shamballa, and that will rapidly take place which the Hierarchy and the world noos desire to see.

The primary result of the correct use of the Great Invocation (as far as humanity is concerned) is acceleration. As we have also earlier pointed out, such an acceleration carries with it its own risks, and consequently we have the appearance of the truly terrific problems and the dire happenings which have for many years overtaken the aspirants and the noos in the world. They are by this process learning the work of world salvage and becoming gradually fitted for the post of world saviour and to be absorbers of evil karma. You might here quite correctly point out that all the world is now suffering and that the past twenty-five years have been those of a general and most unhappy world karma. Wherein then lies the distinction between the pain and suffering of the world in general and that of aspirants and noos in particular? We would reply that aspirants and noos are conscious of this karma and its results in all three vehicles simultaneously_ in the mind as well as in the emotional body with resultant physical reactions. This produces an intensification, retrospection and anticipation which the larger group does not register, involving as it does the entire personality. To this, in the case of the noo in particular, must be added sensitivity and the ability to tune in and to absorb world pain, world reactions, and world conditions, thereby greatly increasing that which they may have individually to bear. The capacity to shoulder and register group pain as well as to bear his/her own personal karma greatly aggravates the noo 's task.

When, therefore, we call the world aspirants and noos to the use of the Great Invocation, We call them also to the "fellowship of the Christ's sufferings"; this is ever preliminary to the resurrection or to the release of the human consciousness into higher realms of spiritual awareness. The Forces which are contacted by the use of this Great Invocation, in conjunction with trained hierarchical effort, are thereby attracted or magnetically impelled to respond and then potent energies can be sent direct to the waiting planetary centre, Humanity. Two effects of an immediate nature are consequently induced over a specific period of time:

a. The energy of the Will of God serves to awaken the illumined but latent will-to-good in men and this, once dynamically awakened, will flower forth as goodwill. There is so much of this which remains latent and unexpressed because the will to demonstrate goodwill activity has not been aroused; it will be automatically aroused in the general public once the world noos have invoked and evoked the inflow of this higher dynamic energy. Humanity awaits this and its arrival is dependent upon the efforts of those who know what should be done and who should now make their spiritual theories facts in outer expression. Nothing can arrest the eventual progress of this will-to-good and its planned activity any more than a bud which has started to unfold its petals in the light of the sun and subject to the proper stimulation can revert again to the condition of a tightly closed bud, potential but unexpressed. The expression of what has been potential will be the result of the impact of first ray force, of the will-to-good at this time, induced by the efforts of the world noos.

b. The second effect will be the forming or constitution of a planetary triangle or recognisable triad which will be the correspondence between the three planetary centres to the spiritual triad of Monad, Soul and Personality (the atma-buddhi-manas of the theosophical literature). Hitherto the word alignment has best described the planetary situation; there has been a straight line along which energy has poured from Shamballa to the Hierarchy and from the Hierarchy to Humanity, but this has meant no direct interplay between Humanity and Shamballa. If the Great Invocation can be rendered effective, humanity can then set up a direct relationship with Shamballa. The resultant triangle of force-relationship will promote the circulation of spiritual energies between the three centres from point to point so that there will be a triple relation. A planetary process of give and take between all three will then be established, and the emphasis upon giving pand not just taking the sacrifice of the planetary lives for personal wealth. What is lovingly shared for the whole and not the part. wsw] will be far more pronounced.

You will now see a little of the psyientific objective which lay behind the words which we asked you all to repeat in connection with the Great Invocation:

We know, O Lord of Life and Love, about the need;

Touch our hearts anew with love, that we too may love and give.

It is this thought of the free circulation of energy between the three world centres which motivates this mantric sentence. A study of this will show you how the implication and significance of apparently simple words may be far deeper and far more wide-reaching in effect than you have been able to conceive. A recognition of this and a creative impassioned use of the imagination may serve to add greater potency to your thought and to your personal will-to-good as you use the Great Invocation and its subsidiary mantram. The keynote of the first aspect Sacrifice, and of the second, Love. The words therefore "that we too may love and give" can produce a contact between the two.

A clue also to the significance of pain and of suffering will gradually emerge in the world consciousness as study is made of the above statements. Suffering is the most effective and most rapid way of evoking world understanding and of burning away the barriers which human beings have set up to the expression of the will-to-good. One of the most beneficent results of the inflow of the Shamballa force through the focussed demand of the aspirants and world noos will be the intelligent recognition of the uses of pain and suffering. It is this truth_ distorted and selfishly misapplied and interpreted_ which has led certain types of people and certain types of governing bodies among the nations to take the position that the greater the suffering inflicted (as, for instance, in conflict time) and the greater the process of terrorism, the quicker the end which is desirable and right; they hold often that the more dire the effects of planned first ray force to selfish ends or material objectives; responsibility cannot be veiled behind specious and distorted half truths and evil cannot be done in order that good may come. conditions, the more rapidly will the correct consummation be achieved. It is not, however, the duty or right of m-w-c to turn What is applied by the Lord of the World in Shamballa under the motivation of love, wisdom and selflessness with a sure touch and a judgment as to times and seasons cannot be so used by those motivated by personality objectives, either on an individual or a personality scale (for nations as well as individuals have personalities). Ponder on this and seek enlightenment from the soul.

3. When the Great Invocation is thus rightly used and the world centres are consequently consciously interrelated, then certain extra-planetary Energies can be called in by the Ruler of Shamballa to aid in the re-adjustments required for the New Age and its coming civilisation. These Forces_ spiritual and potent in nature_ exist in two categories: solar Forces which are inter-planetary and cosmic Forces which enter into our solar system via Jupiter as the transmitter of divine energies from Virgo and Aquarius which Jupiter esoterically governs. Virgo is esoterically the mother of the Lord of Love child and is, therefore, the emanator of energies which nourish and aid the growth of the Lord of Love consciousness; Aquarius is the coming expression of the group consciousness which is the first and immediate revelation of the ever present Peace and Love consciousness on a large scale in humanity. Jupiter also, exoterically and from the angle of orthodox astrology, rules Sagittarius, the sign of nooship, and also Pisces, the sign of the world saviours. The implications will, therefore, be obvious to real students.

In considering these great Energies, there is little you can do beyond accepting_ if you care to do so_ our statements anent them, regarding them as interesting and simply explanatory hypotheses. There is little that you can do (or we either) to arrive at first hand knowledge of the facts along this line. Few even of the Members of the Hierarchy are conscious of the impact of force from extra-solar centres or reservoirs of spiritual force. Only the group of Contemplatives in the Hierarchy which are given the exoteric name of Nirmanakayas are responsive to Their influence in any conscious manner and then only when that influence has been stepped down by certain powerful agencies in Shamballa. It is not necessary for us or for you to say more anent Them though we shall touch upon Them again later in this article.

Prior to taking up the Great Invocation sentence by sentence, we would like briefly to touch upon the needed procedure as you attempt to say it correctly and effectively:

Forget not, first of all, the necessary process of alignment wherein you do two things:

1. Endeavour consciously (which for most of you at present means imaginatively) to align or link soul, mind and brain so that there is a direct and free inflow from the higher Self to the lower.

2. Endeavour to realise or register your relation to the Hierarchy, via your own group of noos (if you know which it is) or in relation to whichever one of the Great Ones or Masters appeals the most to your heart and mind. If neither makes any appeal to your consciousness, the same results will be achieved if you seek to link up with the Lord of Love.

We might here point out that the difference between the linking up that you can effectively do and that which is done by a Member of the Hierarchy itself is that you link up via the Hierarchy and then through the medium of the Great Invocation reach forth to Shamballa whereas the initiates and the Masters link Themselves directly with Shamballa and use the Great Invocation in a manner totally different to that in which you use it. There is for you and the average aspirant no direct contact, and that is definitely fortunate for you. We may not further elucidate.

The second thing which you do is then to focus yourself in as high a consciousness as you are capable of achieving. Then you aim at complete self-forgetfulness and when that has been gained you direct your attention to the dual activity of the true noo to which we earlier referred, i.e., the task of emphasising a significant understanding of the implications and meanings of the words said and of the results to be achieved. There comes next the sending forth of the words with their hidden potency and this must be done by you as a soul, using the mind and the brain as agents.

Integration, conscious activity, and the expression of the work to be done upon the physical plane will cover the entire story. These rightly carried forward will prove effective. Would it clarify matters for you if we state that:

1. Integration is a correspondence in consciousness to the Inhalation of the breath. This is the withdrawing of the consciousness to as high a point as possible.

2. Conscious activity corresponds to the right use of the Interlude between inhalation and exhalation. It involves the recognition of the forces contacted and their purpose.

3. Right expression corresponds to the period of Exhalation. This is the sending forth of the forces contacted by an act of the will in order that they may produce the desired ends.

Forget not that this has to be a group endeavour and must be carried forward in cooperation with the Hierarchy. It involves also the recognition that the soul is one and that there is no such thing as my soul_ only our soul.

In considering the five sentences which form what might be called the mandate of the Great Invocation we would like, first of all, to point out a few underlying and basic ideas.

This Great Invocation has been used by the Hierarchy ever since the year 1425 A.D.

though it is thousands of years older than that. Owing, however, to the unreadiness of humanity to cooperate in its use, the results have been delayed and are regarded as "hovering." We know not how else to express the results already achieved. Today, they can precipitate, if right cooperation can be extended by humanity, and such cooperation now seems immediately possible.

The first phase, Let the Forces of Light bring illumination to mankind,

definitely invokes potencies which are to be found upon monadic levels of consciousness and upon what is psyientificly called the second plane of divine manifestation. These Forces include the Lord of the World and the Representatives of the seven sacred planets Who are spoken of in the Christian Bible as the "seven Spirits before the Throne of God." They include also the three Agents of the Divine Triplicity Who are known, esoterically and in the East as the three Kumaras, or the three Buddhas of Activity.

What do these names and these great Individualities mean to you and to average humanity? Nothing at all and this is necessarily so. They remain but names and possible hypothetical expressions of divinity until after the third initiation when the conscious recognition of the Monad becomes possible; then Forces and Energies, personified for us in these great and stupendous Lives, can be demonstrated as having true existence. On the way to these fundamental recognitions, Their three Representatives within the limits of the Hierarchy must be accepted and known to be correspondingly functioning Activities. These Three are, the Manu, the focal point of the first Ray of Will or Power; the Lord of Love, the head of the Hierarchy and the representative of the second Ray of Love; and the Lord of Civilisation, the expression of the third Ray of Active Intelligence. This knowledge is achieved during the process of training for the first three initiations. Therefore, all that we here tell you must be regarded as possible of verification, and as being testified to by all the world Scriptures and by the initiates of all lands, but it must necessarily remain personally unverified by you until a much later date in your unfoldment.

The Spirit of Peace Who is invoked in the second phrase, Let the Spirit of Peace be spread abroad,

is that mysterious and divine Entity with Whom the Lord of Love came into touch and Whose influence played through Him at the time that He earned the right to be called the "Prince of Peace." As we have elsewhere told you in our earlier writings, the Lord of Love embodied in Himself the cosmic principle of love, the expression of which in manifestation will work out as "glory to God, peace on earth and goodwill towards men." To this the angels testified at His birth. When He expressed this principle of love in His life and world service, He definitely linked up our planet and humanity (in particular) with the Source of the light, love and to which we refer in this second phrase. This was the world salvation which He brought_ a fact which is as yet little realised and which will not be widely recognised until this powerful Invocation has taken due effect.

When the world aspirants and noos use this Invocation, the first phrase takes the consciousness to the Hierarchy of Light, which is the intermediate centre between Humanity and Shamballa. It serves then to emphasise and establish a close rapport, blending and fusing the human and the hierarchical centres. When this has taken place, the Hierarchy can then use this Great Invocation with greater potency and can carry the relation to a higher state still and produce a blending with the Shamballa centre, where the Forces of Light are found as embodied Presences and where Their focussed energy serves to provide great reservoirs of light and love. These have hitherto not been made available for planetary distribution, owing to the lack of established relation between the three centres: Humanity, Hierarchy and Shamballa. That relation is now becoming somewhat established; the inflow of light and love to humanity is now possible if the noos and aspirants of the world can be led to make the needed effort to stand in spiritual being and, from that poised attentive attitude, to invoke these great Entities. It was to this possibility that the story in the New Testament refers where reference is made to the pool which was stirred at times by the Angel and thus a condition was produced which led to the healing of the sick. The Angel of the Presence, the soul of humanity, as embodied in the Hierarchy and those who are consciously endeavouring to function as souls can now stir these reservoirs of force and light upon etheric levels in Shamballa so that a definite "healing of the nations" can take place.

When the thought behind the Great Invocation can be carried high enough in the consciousness of those using it through a joint effort of the world noos and the Hierarchy of Light_ as well as being reinforced by the Forces of Light_ then the Spirit of Peace can be invoked.

On a lower turn of the spiral, you will note that the Wesak Festival enacts a similar invocation and process. It is a re-enacting and training process. There and at that time, the three Representatives of Shamballa within the Hierarchy_ the Manu, the Lord of Love and the Mahachohan_ invoke the Illumined One, Who in His turn is the transmitter of still higher Forces. He is invoked by a special mantram and transmits the appeal to the One Whose agent He is. If this Great Invocation which we are studying can be rightly said, the three great planetary centres can be related in a similar manner. The Lord of Civilisation, the Master R., representing humanity, the Lord of Love representing the Hierarchy and the Lord of the World, linked through the Manu and representing Shamballa can be brought into a close relation so that the result will be the setting up of such a potent vibration and note that the Spirit of Peace will be invoked and contacted. By the voiced appeal His attention will be forced to turn itself towards our planet. The consequences will be significant and potent but as to the form which they will take it is impossible for us to say. Perhaps it will lead to some peculiar and powerful demonstration of the meaning of peace as the expression of universal and planetary love; perhaps it will produce the sending of an Avatar or Messenger of Peace to lead the nations to right action; perhaps some happening will take place of such significance that its import will be immediately recognised by humanity as a whole, leading them to take all the needed steps to restore right human relations. The nature of the activities which the Spirit of Peace will institute is not our responsibility. Our duty is to learn rightly to contact the Hierarchy, via our own souls; rightly to use the Great Invocation as souls, and rightly to render ourselves responsive to and sensitive to the resultant effects. Ponder on the above.

It might, therefore, be noted that the Forces of Light express Themselves through the Hierarchy of Light and Their major effect is the illumination of the minds of men with love and light. This precipitates upon the mental plane. The personality or the form aspect of humanity is thereby pervaded and illumined. Thus the third great planetary centre, Humanity, becomes creative and magnetic, and two divine aspects_ intelligence and love_ will reach fruition upon the physical plane, making it possible for the first aspect and the will of God (understood by humanity as the Plan) to be consciously carried forward on earth in conformity with the activity instituted at Shamballa. The will of God is purpose and this is, for the first time, to be recognised consciously by man.

The Spirit of Peace will, when the right time comes, vitalise the responsiveness of humanity, via the influence of the Hierarchy, to the will of God, which has for basic intent the bringing of peace on earth.

What is peace? It is essentially the establishing

of right human relations, of synthetic rapport with its resultant cooperation, of correct interplay between the three planetary centres and an illumined, loving understanding of the will of God as it affects humanity and works out divine intent. It is for this reason that the Lord of Love and Sacrifice, Who established for the first time in planetary history a contact between the Hierarchy, Humanity, Shamballa and the Spirit of Peace in His Own high place, in His first recorded utterance said that He must be about His Father's business and then at the end of His life, reiterated the same thought in the words: "Father, not my will but Thine be done," thus carrying the thought up to the highest plane for He addressed the Father, the first Aspect of Divinity. He then focussed in Himself the two major divine attributes and aspects_ will and love (atma-buddhi)_ and because of this, His consciousness became extra-planetary as is the consciousness of the Lord of the World, and He could then touch certain heights of awareness and contact certain solar Agencies which had never before been contacted by man. This achievement enabled Him to put Humanity in touch with the Spirit of Peace. He thus Himself became the Light of the World and the Lord of Love.

In this manner, Shamballa and the Hierarchy were brought into a close relationship and two great streams of force were blended and a definite interplay set up between them. The Illumined One, through His achievement of illumination, established the first major link with the Forces of Light. The Lord of Love, through His ability to express the will of God in love and as world salvage, established the first major link with the Spirit of Peace.

If you will study the above information with care, you will find that the importance of the Wesak Festival at the time of the full moon of May will assume increasing importance in your minds. It is the Festival at which three factors of importance to humanity are brought into relation:

1. The Illumined One, the embodiment or agent of the Forces of Light / Wisdom can then be contacted and that which They seek to transmit to humanity can be consciously appropriated.

2. The Lord of Love, the embodiment of the love and the will of God and the agent of the Spirit of Peace, can also be contacted and humanity can be trained to appropriate this extra-planetary type of energy.

3. Through the Lord of Love / Prince of Peace and the Illumined One, humanity can now establish a close relationship with Shamballa and then make its own contribution_ as a world centre_ to the planetary life. Pervaded by light and controlled by the Spirit of Peace, the expression of humanity's will-to-good can emanate powerfully from this third planetary centre. Humanity will then for the first time enter upon its destined task as the intelligent, loving intermediary between the higher states of planetary consciousness, the super-human states and the sub-human kingdoms. Thus humanity will become eventually the planetary saviour.

If you will have these thoughts in mind, the first three phrases of the Great Invocation will assume great significance. Let us put some of these significances in tabular form:

Let the Forces of Light bring illumination to mankind

Intermediary The Hierarchy. Soul consciousness

Agent The Illumined One

Expression Light. Understanding. The illumined mind

Planes of emphasis The second or monadic plane

The buddhic or intuitional plane

The mental plane

Focal point The head centre

Planetary centre The Hierarchy

Let the Spirit of Peace be spread abroad

Intermediary Shamballa. Spiritual consciousness

Agent The Lord of Love

Expression The will of God as love and peace

Sentient response

Planes of emphasis The logoic or first plane

The buddhic, or intuitional plane

The astral or emotional plane

Focal point The heart centre

Planetary centre Shamballa

May men of goodwill everywhere meet in a spirit of cooperation

Intermediary Humanity itself. Self-consciousness

Agent The Lord of Civilisation

Expression Intelligent love, dedicated to the Plan

Creativity

The will-to-good

Planes of emphasis The atmic or plane of spiritual will

The mental plane

The physical plane

Focal point The throat centre

Planetary centre Humanity

Thus all the great centres are linked and all the planes are interrelated; the past has contributed its finished work; the present is evoking its just and right development; the future of wonder and of divine possibility appears_ its results contingent upon a spirit of right understanding and invocation. Three statements in the New Testament begin now to demonstrate their profound esoteric significance and their amazing living potency:

I am the Light of the World The Forces of Light _ Phrase 1. 2nd Aspect

My peace I give unto you The Spirit of Peace _ Phrase 2. 1st Aspect

Love thy neighbour as thyself The men of Goodwill _ Phrase 3. 3rd Aspect

The three aspects of divinity in man-woman-child achieve practical expression through the influence of the Great Invocation, both in living usefulness and true comprehension_ true at least in so far as man's present point in evolution permits of his/her correct apprehension of significance. Goodwill, as the practical and possible expression of love demonstrates on earth, evoking right relationship; light, as the expression of the Hierarchy pours into the human consciousness, irradiating all dark places and evoking a response from all forms of life in the three worlds of manifestation, and in the three subhuman kingdoms through the medium of the human; peace, as the expression of the will of Shamballa produces balance, equilibrium, synthesis and understanding, plus a spirit of invocation which is basically an action, producing reaction. This demonstrates as the first great creative and magical work of which humanity is capable, swinging, as it does, all the three divine aspects into a simultaneous activity in line with the will of God.

We come now to the last two phrases which summarise the effects_ synthetic and eternal (and consequently lasting) which the establishment of direct relationship with Shamballa will produce in the two other planetary centres, the Hierarchy and Humanity. We refer to effects which will express themselves as a group activity, motivated by the essential values of selflessness and persistent effort (which is sustained concentration, in the last analysis) and thereby producing conditions for which the Lord of the World, the Ancient of Days, has long waited. The patience and sustaining love of Shamballa is infinite.

The fourth phrase runs: May forgiveness on the part of all men be the keynote at this time.

As you know, the word "forgiveness" is a curious and unusual one and signifies (according to the best derivative sources) simply "to give for." Forgiveness is not therefore, a synonym for pardon though the word has been distorted in theological circles to mean this, so little has the Church understood the basic, motivating power behind divine expression in our solar system. Theologians ever think in terms of the human mind and not in terms of the divine mind. Forgiveness is sacrifice, and is the giving up of one's self, even of one's very life, for the sake of others and for the good of the whole group. This spirit of sacrifice is ever found when the Shamballa force is rightly contacted, even in the smallest degree, and the underlying impulse behind the loving will of God is sensed and understood, accompanied as this always is with the desire to participate in that will and its spirit of divine sacrifice. Manifestation is itself the Great Forgiveness. The stupendous Lives_ outside manifested existence_ entered into manifestation in order to give Themselves for the lesser lives and forms of existence in order that these lesser lives might be enabled to proceed onward towards a goal which is known to Deity alone, and thus eventually reach high places of spiritual expression. Achievement is ever followed by sacrifice and the giving of the greater for the lesser. This is an aspect of the Law of Evolution. Such is the note and theme of the entire creative process and is the basic meaning of the phrase, "God is Love," for love signifies giving and sacrifice, at least in this solar system.

It is for this reason that the esoteric teaching emphasises the fact that the soul of man is a Lord of Sacrifice and of loving persistent Devotion_ the two outstanding qualities of the Shamballa Lives, sustaining life and giving. This is lasting devotion to the good of the whole or the expression of the spirit of synthesis and sacrifice in order again that all lesser lives (such as those embodied in the personality of man) may rise to the "resurrection which is in Lord of Love," through the crucifixion or sacrifice of the soul upon the Cross of Matter.

It is this thought again which gives significance to the life of the Lord of Love on earth for He re-enacted for us an eternal process, externalising it in such a way that it became the symbol of the motive of the entire manifested universe and the impulse which should direct each of us_ crucifixion and death, resurrection and life, and the consequent salvation of the whole.

It is this thought which is embodied in the challenge of this fourth phrase of the Great Invocation, and means literally, "May all men everywhere respond to the keynote of the universe and give themselves for others."

Know that the note which will evoke an immediate response from the unit and the individual is fundamentally the good of the larger unit (the nation or the group of nations). Therefore, forgiveness or sacrifice in order to save others is increasingly the recognised needed keynote at this time and in this recognition lies much to justify the sorry story of past evolutionary processes and methods. When it is recognised that the "giving-for" involves right living upon the physical plane and not (as is so often thought) the dying of the physical body then we shall see a revitalised world. It is the living the Lord of Love (the living world Saviour) Who saves humanity. It is the sacrifice, day by day, in the process of daily living which can save the world of men _ the sacrifice of selfish personal interests for the good of the whole and the giving up of one's practical life to the salvage of the world. It is living in order that others too may live which is the theme of the New Testament. When, therefore, the mode of sacrifice enters into the realm of the subtler and subjective values and the true meaning of forgiveness is intellectually, practically and spiritually comprehended, the New Age will be abundantly realised with its truly human civilisation and a culture which will embody the realities of the esoteric teaching, as well as the best of the externalised past. Then and only then will the new esotericism be revealed to a race of men who have made aspiration a fact in their outer experience. The attitude of the masses in the present conflict is the guarantee of this and the proof also of the success of the Lord of Love 's mission.

The result of what is happening today must, sooner or later, produce an at-one-ment between all nations and peoples. At-one-ment is ever (under evolutionary law) the consequence of sacrifice. Of this, the Lord of Love 's sacrifice was the symbol and the guarantee, impulsed as His life and activities were by the Spirit of Peace. As He made "of twain, one new man, so making peace" (Ephesians 2:15) so today out of the duality of soul and body, humanity is achieving the same ends and the result of this final stage of the Piscean Age will be the fusion in consciousness of soul and body. The Aquarian Age will demonstrate an increasing expression of this at-one-ment, wrought out in the crucifixion of humanity at the present time. The difference between this coming stage and that of the past is that, in the past, the soul has sought this development and at-one-ment and (from the angle of evolution) it has been slowly and gradually attained, but in the future, it will be consciously sought, achieved and recognised by man-woman-child upon the physical plane as a result of the present period of "giving-for" the whole, of the best which the individual can give.

We would point out that just as the energies released by use of the first three phrases of the Invocation relate to the Head, Shamballa; to the Heart, the Hierarchy; and to the Throat centre, Humanity; so the right use of this fourth phrase will bring into conscious, functioning activity the centre between the eyebrows, the ajna centre in individual m-w-c and in humanity as whole. This centre begins to become active and to function dynamically, governing and directing the individual energies, once any real measure of personality integration has been achieved. It is, as you know, the fourth centre found above the diaphragm in the human body and the phrase which awakens it (both individually and in the group) is this fourth phrase. There is, therefore, a numerical relationship. When used wisely and intelligently by human beings, many of the blended potencies which the first three phrases have made available are invoked and so made available to the individual as well as to the group. They can then be focussed for his/her use in the ajna centre. In many ways, therefore, this fourth phrase of the Great Invocation is of paramount importance to the individual as well as to humanity, invoking as it does great and vital potencies and indicating process (Sacrifice) and purpose, plus the identification of the unit and the group with the basic intent of manifestation.

The fifth phrase, Let power attend the efforts of the Great Ones,

is definitely related to the effect in the Hierarchy of a constructive use of the Great Invocation, just as the previous one is related to the effect in humanity. This effect in the Hierarchy is a relatively new one and is due to the participation of humanity in the process of invocation, thus producing new effects and contacts. It is the united effort of the two great centres which is of such paramount importance and upon which we desire to have you concentrate. Its utterance by man-woman-child throws the weight of human appeal and desire behind the age-old efforts of the Hierarchy and this is now, for the first time, truly possible on a large scale. For aeons, the Hierarchy has struggled alone to help and lift humanity and to stimulate the potency of the human planetary centre so that its vibratory activity would eventually be sufficiently powerful to swing it into the radius or magnetic field of hierarchical activity. This long task has at last achieved success. The Hierarchy and humanity are at last en rapport. This is the higher reflection or correspondence to what goes on within the consciousness of a human being who_ having reached the stage of nooship_ is at the point of blending the light of the personality (as it is expressed through the ajna centre and its externalisation, the pituitary body) and the light of the soul (as it is, in its turn, expressed by the light in the head, or by the head centre and its externalisation, the pineal gland).

You will, therefore, note afresh the practical significance of these fourth and fifth phrases of the Great Invocation. One serves to arouse humanity (as a planetary centre) to activity and realisation and the other serves to aid the Hierarchy in its ancient efforts so that the two are then related to each other's magnetic fields and produce a blending and a synthesis which will lead to a fuller expression of the soul of divinity through the medium of humanity. Ponder on this statement.

In the esoteric teaching, this takes place in the life of the individual when_ by an act of the will_ the centre at the base of the spine is aroused and the fire and the light of the personal threefold life (one aspect of which is often called the kundalini fire) is carried upwards and merged with the power and the light of the soul. The major approach of the two basic energies of form and soul (as an expression of spirit) are thereby related within the human being; the "marriage in the heavens" takes place and the task of the creative process of incarnation or individual manifestation is on the way to completion. Within the planetary life, the same process goes on. The life of humanity as a whole (which is intelligent form life) and the life of the Hierarchy (which is the life of the soul), under impulse from the Spirit or will aspect as symbolised in Shamballa, are fused and blended and then a new departure in the evolutionary process becomes possible. The kingdom of God, which is the kingdom of souls, and the human kingdom as mutually expressive and interrelated, are perfectly synthesised and anchored on earth. The glory of the One can then be faintly seen, which is the glory of Shamballa. The Dweller upon the threshold of divinity and the Angel of the Presence then stand face to face.

This is the situation today. Tomorrow they will blend and synthesise and the glory of God will appear on earth. The second great Approach will have been achieved.

CALL TO A UNITED ACT OF SERVICE

The Masters of the Wisdom have no time today to swing their many adherents into a uniform and united activity Themselves; Their hands are full, combating the forces of materialism. These forces are active in every country; the Hierarchy in its consciousness does not isolate Germany, even though these forces have chosen that sad land for their major /point of departure and enterprise; in Germany They have Their people working as elsewhere. The Masters of the Wisdom are active in dispelling the depressions and terrors which settle down upon all Their workers in the arena of the world today, as these workers struggle to stand steady under the fierce impact of wrong thinking and of world-wide despair; these workers are likewise sensitive (owing to their point of integrated development) to the agony of mind, the tension of emotion and the ravages of physical pain which are felt by all those upon whom the Conflict has had its dire effects, and upon whom it has laid the hand of suffering. Such a sensitivity and such a sympathetic response are apt to produce a condition of negativity and a psychic preoccupation with the immediate situation among all workers, and thus render them deaf to the call of their actual duty or else liable to become distraught by the dual effort of being effective in service, whilst at the same time fighting off emotional reactions. The capacity of the worker to respond, therefore, to the inner voices and to serve dispassionately and selflessly is seriously handicapped.

We challenge all workers and all members of the New Group of World Servers to leave their personal problems behind. This is a time of crisis and such problems must be solved through complete self-forgetfulness. We ask you to work anew with fresh ardour in joyful service, forgetting past weaknesses and failures in the urgency of that which we ask all to do for the world. There has been much lack of joy in the service rendered to the world lately. When we speak thus, we refer not to happiness, which is a personality reaction, but to that joyous confidence in the law and in the Hierarchy which lies behind the Biblical words, "The joy of the Lord is our strength." "Rise up and fight, Arjuna," preserving the flame of love intact, permitting no breath of hate to disturb the serenity of love or upset that inner poise which will enable you to sound forth the clarion note of world understanding, that will rally all men of goodwill to the aid of the Hierarchy. This will bring to an end all hatred, separativeness and aggression, which are the three major sins of humanity. All men have hated; all men have been separative in both thought and action; all have been and many still are materialistic, full of pride and the desire to gain that which is not their own by right. This spirit of acquisitiveness belongs to no one group; it has been a universal and general fault, and has produced the present disastrous economic situation, thus precipitating the world into conflict, hate and cruelty.

The fusion of many minds into one directed activity is today of supreme importance; this has been symbolised in the union which now exists between two great nations, France and Great Britain. Unity of directed thought and purpose is the guarantee of inevitable and future success. The power of massed thought is omnipotent. The potency of focussed and directed mental activity is unpredictable. If you accept this premise and this statement, then act upon it.

The Spirit of Peace is hovering close to humanity, seeking opportunity to make His Presence felt. The Spirit of Peace is not an abstract concept but a potent Individual, wielding forces hitherto unfamiliar to our planet. Great Forces are awaiting the hour when They can function as the Liberators and the Deliverers of mankind. But the door to Their entrance must be opened by humanity itself and it will be opened by a united act of the will, expressed through some formula of words and expressed in sound. It will be brought about by an activity performed simultaneously by all men of goodwill and by all the world aspirants and noos. The door will not open unless the act of invocation is backed by the focussed will. The directed determination of the man-woman-child or the group who is using the suggested formula, prayer or invocation is essential.

We would ask you to call as many people as you can reach through the medium of every available channel to a definite activity upon the coming Christmas day, if possible, and again at the time of the full moon of January, thus making two great appeals to the Forces of Peace and Light, so that they may help humanity. We would ask you to get in touch with leaders and workers_ important and unimportant_ in every land, asking them to associate themselves in their own way and with their own people, and to do this on as large a scale as possible_ as large, at least, as that of your effort in May, 1936.

The times are ripe for a response to these ideas; the recognised pain and distress of the world will open both hearts and purses. The idea of a Christmas appeal and call to prayer and to invocation of the Prince of Peace will be potent in evoking a desirable reaction, and will serve also to blend into closer unity all who recognise the work the Hierarchy is attempting to do. We would ask you to call for help from all sides, and to let these ideas work out into the world on the basis of their usefulness and opportuneness. Omit from this appeal none that you know, for through them millions can be reached and swung into the desired activity.

To those of you who can appreciate and use the Great Invocation, we would suggest its renewed and earnest use. This alternative invocation might, however, be suggested and found useful:

"O Lord of Light and Love, come forth and rule the world.

May the Prince of Peace appear and end the conflict of the nations.

May the reign of Light and Love and Justice be begun.

Let there be peace on earth, and let it begin with us."

&&&&&&&

We would remind you that we write as believers in the great spiritual realities and who regard the unfolding spirit of man as the unshatterable evidence of the existence of "the One in Whom we live and move and have our being." We speak as believers in and Lovers of the Lord of Love and who know Him to be the Master of all the Masters and the Teacher alike of angels and of men. We are those who look to the Lord of Love as the supreme expression of divinity upon Earth and who know the extent of His sacrificial work for humanity, the wonder of the revelation which He brought, the imminence of His return and of His coming Assumption of spiritual rule in the hearts of men everywhere. We know that He has no pleasure in the great stone temples which man has built whilst His people are left without practical guidance or reasonable light upon their affairs; and we know too that He feels, with an aching heart, that the simplicity which He taught, and the simple Way to God which He emphasised have disappeared in the fogs of theology and the discussions of churchmen throughout the centuries. We know that He realises that the words He spoke have been lost in the labyrinths of the ecclesiastical minds which have sought to interpret them, and that the simple teaching of the Approach to God which He taught has been superseded by the pomp and ceremony of elaborate rituals.

To sum up: Because of the divergences of the many exoteric faiths, the multiplicity of the sects and cults in both the Orient and Occident, and the quarrels of theologians over words, phrases and interpretations, the sons / daughters of God_ in process of development_ are left without the needed help to contact the Lord of Love and His great group of noos, the spiritual leaders of humanity; the way to the Lord of Love, the living, loving Expression of God, is not made clear to the seeker. Together, the two great Sons of God present to mankind_ the One in the East and the Other in the West_ a complete and perfect representation of Deity; by Their lives and words They guarantee to man-woman-child the possibilities always latent in the human spirit.

Today the Lord of Love and the Illumined One wait until the hour strikes. Then Their united effort, plus the invocative appeal of all who truly know and truly love, will bring humanity the new revelation for which they wait.

The new world religion must be based upon those truths which have stood the test of the ages. This we said elsewhere and enumerated four of those truths:

1. The Fact of God

2. Man's Relationship to God

3. The Fact of Immortality and Eternal Persistence

4. The Continuity of Revelation and the Divine Approaches.

These four facts are basic realities and truths which have conditioned the masses of men for aeons. Human unhappiness is founded primarily upon man-woman-child's inability to live fully in the consciousness of these four fundamental realisations. But they are steadily taking shape in human thinking, and for them the United Nations fights.

Two more great and foundational facts are also part of the human state of awareness.

5. The fact of our relationship with each other. This is as much a foundational spiritual fact as is God Himself, because it is linked with our knowledge of Him as Father .

This relationship we call "brother/sisterhood" and it expresses itself (or should we say, it will eventually express itself?) through human fellowship and right human relations. For this we work, and humanity is moving towards that relationship_ and that in spite of the fact of conflict.

6. The fact of the Path to God. Awareness of this has been preserved for us down the ages by those who knew God and whom the world called mystics, psyientists and saints Opening out before aspiring men stretches the Way. The history of the human soul is the history of the search for that Way and its discovery by the persistent.

In every race and nation, in every climate and part of the world, and throughout the endless reaches of time itself, back into the limitless past, men have found the Path to God; they have trodden it and accepted its conditions, endured its disciplines, rested back in confidence upon its realities, received its rewards and found their goal. Arrived there, they have "entered into the joy of the Lord," participated in the mysteries of the kingdom of heaven, dwelt in the glory of the divine Presence, and then returned to the ways of men, to serve. The testimony to the existence of this Path is the priceless treasure of all the great religions and its witnesses are those who have transcended all forms and all theologies, and have penetrated into the world of meaning which all symbols veil.

These truths are part of all that the past gives to man-woman-child. They are our eternal heritage, and connected with them there is no new revelation but only participation and understanding. These are the facts which the World Teachers have brought to us, suited to our need and capacity at any given time. They are the inner structure of the One Truth upon which all the world theologies have been built, including the Christian doctrines and dogmas built around the Person of the Lord of Love and His teaching.

Dimly sensed by the evolving human consciousness hovers another emerging truth of a larger nature_ larger because related to the Whole and not just to individual man and his/her personal salvation. It is an extension of the individual approach to truth. Let us call it the truth of the Great Cyclic Approaches of the divine to the human of which all world Teachers and Saviours were the symbol and the guarantee. At certain great moments, down the ages, God drew nearer to His people and humanity (blindly and unconscious of their objective) at the same time made great efforts to draw near to God. On the part of God, this was intentional, conscious and deliberate; on the part of man, it was largely unconscious, forced upon him by the tragedy of circumstance, by desperate need and by the driving urge of the collective soul. These Great Approaches can be traced down the centuries, and each time one took place it meant a clearer understanding of divine purpose, a new and fresh revelation, the institution of some form of a new religion and the sounding of a note which produced a new civilisation and culture, or a fresh recognition of relationship between God and man or man and his/her brother/sister.

A new definition of God was given us when the Illumined One taught that God was Light and showed us the way of illumination, and when the [Prince of Peace] revealed to us that God was Love through His life and service on earth. Today the knowledge aspect of illumination is being comprehended, but the inner meaning of love is only now dimly sensed. Yet light and love have been revealed to the world by two great Sons of God in two Approaches. A new Approach is on the Way, bringing us the next needed truth. We ask ourselves: What will it be? For it, the knowers and lovers of God and of their fellowm-w-c are prepared; for it, the masses of men wait.

Some of these Approaches have been of a major nature, affecting humanity as a whole, and some of them are of less importance affecting only a relatively small part of mankind_ a nation or a group. Those Who come as the Revealers of the love of God come from that spiritual centre to which the Lord of Love and Prince of Peace gave the name "the Kingdom of God." Here dwell the "spirits of just men made perfect"; here the spiritual Guides of the race are to be found and here the spiritual Executives of God's plans live and work and oversee human and planetary affairs. It is called by many names by many people. It is spoken of as the Spiritual Hierarchy, as the Abode of Light, as the centre where the Masters of the Wisdom are to be found, as the Great Light Lodge. From it come those who act as Messengers of the Wisdom of God, Custodians of the truth as it is in the Lord of Love , and Those Whose task it is to save the world, to impart the next revelation and to demonstrate divinity. All the world Scriptures bear witness to the existence of this centre of spiritual energy. This spiritual Hierarchy has been steadily drawing nearer to humanity as men have become more conscious of divinity and more fitted for contact with the divine.

Behind this spiritual centre of Love and Light another centre is to be found, for which the West has no name but which is called in the East by the name Shamballa. Perhaps the Western name is Shangri-Lha_ a name which is finding recognition everywhere and which stands for a centre of happiness and purpose. Shamballa or Shangri-Lha is the place where the Will of God is focussed and from which His divine purposes are directed. From it the great political movements and the destiny of races and nations and their progress are determined, just as the religious movements, the cultural unfoldments and spiritual ideas are sent forth from the hierarchical centre of Love and Light. Political and social ideologies and world religions, the Will of God and the Love of God, the Purpose of divinity and the plans whereby that purpose is brought into activity all focus through that centre of which we are each consciously a part, Humanity itself. There are, therefore, three great spiritual centres on the planet: Shamballa, the spiritual Hierarchy, and Humanity.

There is definite Biblical testimony to this highest of all centres, Shamballa. At moments of crisis in the earthly life of the Lord of Love we read that a Voice spoke to Him, the Voice of the Father was heard by Him, affirming His Sonship and setting the seal of approval upon His acts and work. At that moment a great fusion of the two spiritual centres_ the Hierarchy and Shamballa, the Kingdom of God and the world of Spirit_ was brought about, and thus spiritual energy was released on Earth. We need to remember that the work of all World Saviours and Teachers is to act primarily as distributors of divine energy and as channels for spiritual force. This outpouring manifests either as the impulse behind a world religion, the incentive behind some new political ideology, or the principle of some scientific discovery of importance to the growth of the human spirit. Thus do religions, governments and civilisations find their motivation. History has demonstrated that again and again these developments are the results of the appearance and the activity of some great man-woman-child at an advanced stage of development. Those who come forth as Teachers, Saviours or Founders of a new religion come forth from the Hierarchy and are of the highest order of spiritual perfection. Those who convey to man the purposes of God through new ideological concepts are not as yet of so high an order, because man-woman-child is not yet ready for the highest presentation. Much has yet to be learnt and mastered by man, and spiritual unfoldment always outpaces the outer expression of human relationships and the social order; hence the world religions come first and produce the conditions which make the work of the rulers possible. Those who come forth from the spiritual centre, Shamballa, are of great power, however, and the thread of Their influence can be traced throughout history in great declarations and pronouncements such as the Magna Charta, the Declaration of Independence and the Atlantic Charter. Those who come forth from Shamballa or the Hierarchy for the release and the guidance of humanity are evoked by human desire and demand, for there is a spiritual interplay existing between Humanity and the Hierarchy, and between both and Shamballa.

Such Messengers embody divine intention. The response of mankind to Their messages is dependent upon the point in evolution which has been attained by man-woman-child. Back in the early history of the race these Approaches were rare indeed. Countless ages passed between them. Today, owing to the greatly increased power of the human mind and the growing sensitivity of the human soul to the spiritual values as they express themselves through major world ideologies, these Approaches of the divine to the human can become more frequent and are taking on a new form. Man's inner realisation of his/her own innate spiritual potency and the unfoldment of his/her sense of relationship are bringing about an effort on his/her part_ consciously undertaken_ to make true progress towards the good, the true and the beautiful, and this in spite of the fact of the conflict and the misery and suffering present upon our Earth. It has therefore become possible to synchronise the Approach of the divine to the human and to instruct the masses of men in the technique of thus invoking the Approach. This attitude of humanity will lead to a new revelation, to the new world religion and to new attitudes in the relation of man-woman-child to God (religion) and of man-woman-child to man-woman-child (government or social relationships).

Two major Approaches are to be found in the past history of the race, and both are of such significance that it would be well to note them here. They lie so far back in human history that we have only myth and monument to indicate their happening.

The first great Approach of the divine to man caused the appearance of the human soul and the adding of another kingdom in nature to the three (mineral, vegetable and animal) already existing. The kingdom of man appeared on Earth.

Aeons passed away whilst primitive man continued to evolve, and when the second great Approach took place and the Spiritual Hierarchy of our planet drew nearer to humanity; the spiritual Way to God was opened for those who consciously can move forward, who can definitely demonstrate the Lord of Love spirit, and who earnestly seek enlightenment and liberation. The true appeal of Lord of Love's words: "Ye shall know the truth and the truth shall make you free" urges them to move forward into the light, through the gate of initiation and on to that path which "shineth ever more and more until the perfect day." At the time of the second great Approach, the fact of the existence of the Spiritual Hierarchy, of the open door to initiation and of the Way of Sacrifice first dawned on the human consciousness; from that moment men have found the Way and have moved out of the human kingdom into the spiritual; they have transformed their human consciousness into divine awareness. The kingdom of man and the kingdom of God were brought into relationship. Religion became a factor in the development of the human spirit and God drew nearer to His Own. God Transcendent first conditioned man's concept of Deity. Then God as the national controller took possession of man's mind, and the Jehovah concept (as depicted in the Jewish dispensation) appeared; next God was seen as the perfected human being, and the divine God-man walked the Earth in the person of the Lord of Love. Today, we have a rapidly growing emphasis on God Immanent in every human being. Such have been the results of the second great Approach and such have been the results of the work of the world Saviours and Teachers down the ages, culminating in the work of the Lord of Love , Who summed up in Himself the unfoldments of the past and the hope of the future.

A third great Approach is now possible and will take place once the world conflict is over and man_ purified by fire and suffering_ has set his/her house in order and is ready, therefore, for a new revelation. For this coming revelation the work of the Illumined One and of the Lord of Love has been preparatory. They embodied in Themselves two lesser Approaches, and through Their united effort, humanity throughout the world has been prepared to play its part in this third Approach.

The Illumined One came embodying in Himself a great divine principle or quality. He was the Conveyor of Enlightenment to the world; He was the Lord of Light. As is always the case, He re-enacted in Himself, for the instruction of His noos, the processes of illumination and became the "Illumined One." We are told in the scriptures of India that He achieved illumination under the tree, just as the Lord of Love achieved the liberation of the human spirit upon the tree set up on Golgotha. Light, wisdom, reason, as divine yet human attributes, were focussed in the Illumined One. He proved the possibility of all men achieving this illumination and of walking in the light. He challenged the people to tread the Path of Illumination, of which wisdom, mental perception and intuition are the aspects.

Then came the next great Teacher, the Prince of Peace. He embodied in Himself a still greater divine principle or aspect, that of Love, whilst at the same time embracing within Himself all that the Illumined One had of Light. The Lord of Love was the expression of both Light and Love.

Through Their work, therefore, there is now possible a deeper reaction to, and a broader comprehension of the work and influence of those great Lives Who are waiting today to help humanity. The work of these two Sons of God produced among many results the following:

1. They embodied in Themselves certain cosmic principles, and by Their work and sacrifice certain divine potencies poured through and upon the race, stimulating intelligence into wisdom and emotion into love. The Illumined One, when He achieved illumination, "let in" a flood of light upon life and world problems. He formulated this revelation into the Four Truths. His group of noos erected a structure of truth which (by the power of collective thought) has flooded mankind with light.

2. Through the message of the Illumined One, man-woman-child has for the first time grasped the cause of his/her constant distaste and dissatisfaction and has learnt that the Way of Release is to be found in detachment, dispassion and discrimination. Where these are present, there is rapid release from the wheel of rebirth.

3. Through the message of the Lord of Love, three concepts emerge into the racial consciousness:

a. The value of the individual and the necessity for tensity of effort on his/her part.

b. The opportunity which was to be presented to humanity to take a tremendous step forward and undergo the new birth or the first initiation.

c. The method whereby this next step could be taken in the new age, voiced for us in the words "love your neighbour as yourself." Individual effort, group opportunity and men 's identification with each other_ such is the message of the Lord of Love.

In the message of the Illumined One we have the three methods whereby the personality can be changed and prepared to be a conscious expression of divinity. Through detachment, the brain consciousness or state of awareness (embodying physical recognition of inner causes) is withdrawn or abstracted from the things of the senses and from the calls of the lower nature. Detachment is in reality the imposition of a new rhythm or habit reaction upon the cells of the brain which renders the brain unaware of the lure of the world of sensory perception. Through dispassion, the emotional nature is rendered immune from the appeal of the senses and desire fails to deter the soul from its rightful task. Through discrimination, the mind learns to select the good, the beautiful and the true, and to substitute these for the sense of "identification with the personality," which is so characteristic of the majority of men . Personality holds so many in thrall. This has to go. These three attitudes, when correctly and sanely held, will organise the personality, bring in the rule of wisdom, and prepare the noo for initiation.

Then follows the work of the Lord of Love, resulting in an understanding of the value of the individual and his/her self-initiated effort at release and illumination, with the objective of group goodwill. We learn to perfect ourselves in order to have somewhat to sacrifice to the group, and thus enrich the group with our individual contribution. This is the first result of the activity of the Lord of Love Principle in the life of the individual. Personality fades out in the glory of the soul, which (like the rising sun) blots out the darkness and irradiates the lower nature. This is the second result, and is a group activity. The word goes forth to the initiates of the future: Lose sight of self in group endeavour. Forget the self in group activity. Pass through the portal to initiation in group formation and let the personality life be lost in the group life.

The final result of the work of the Lord of Love is to be found in our identification with the whole: individuality, initiation, and identification_ these are the terms in which the message of the Lord of Love can be summarised. He said, when on Earth: "I and my Father are One," and in these words epitomised His entire message. I, the individual, through initiation, am identified with Deity. Therefore we have:

1. The Illumined One . . . the method . . . Detachment, Dispassion, Discrimination.

2. The Lord of Love . . . the result . . . Individualism, Initiation, Identification.

It is interesting to note that the work of the Illumined One is expressed in words all beginning with the fourth letter of the alphabet, the letter D. The sense of personality is achieved; the quaternary is transcended, and the Illumined One gave us the reason for this transmutation and the rules. The work of the Lord of Love is expressed for us in words beginning with the ninth letter of the alphabet, the letter I, and this number is the number of initiation. These things happen not idly but all have their underlying purpose.

We have here very briefly and inadequately outlined the nature of two Great Approaches and two minor. These have prepared humanity for the third great Approach which will bring the new revelation, with its realised consequences, of a new heaven and a new earth. We would ask the orthodox theologian how he/she interprets the words "a new heaven"? May it not signify an entirely new conception as to the world of spiritual realities and perhaps of the very nature of God Himself? May it not be possible that our present ideas of God as the Universal Mind, as Love and as Will, may be enriched by a new idea and quality for which we have as yet no name or word and of which we have as yet no faintest understanding? Each of the three present concepts as to the divine nature_ the Trinity_ have been entirely new when first sequentially presented to humanity.

What this third major Approach will bring to humanity we do not and cannot know. It will bring about as definite results as did the two earlier Approaches. For some years now the spiritual Hierarchy has been drawing nearer to mankind, and this is responsible for the great concepts of freedom which are so close to the hearts of men everywhere today and for which humanity is now fighting. As the Members of the Hierarchy approach closer to us, the dream of brother/sisterhood, of fellowship, of world cooperation and of a peace (based upon right human relations) becomes clearer in our minds. As They draw nearer we vision a new and vital world religion, a universal faith, at-one in its basic idealism with the past but different in its mode of expression.

We have cited earlier the foundational truths upon which the new world religion will rest. We would suggest that the theme of the coming religion will be that of the Great Approaches themselves; that it will emphasise anew God's love for man-woman-child as evidenced in these divine Approaches, and also m-w-c's response to God as the word goes forth: "Draw near to God and He will draw near to you"; that it will_ in its rites and ceremonies_ be concerned with the invocative and evocative side of spiritual appeal.

Man invokes the divine Approach in two ways: by means of the inchoate, voiceless appeal or invocative cry of the masses, and also by the planned, defined invocation of the spiritually oriented aspirants, the intelligently convinced worker, noo and initiate_ by all, in fact, who form the New Group of World Servers.

The science of invocation and evocation will take the place of what we now call prayer and worship. Be not disturbed by the use of the word "science." It is not the cold and heartless intellectual thing so oft depicted. It is in reality the intelligent organisation of spiritual energy and of the forces of love, and when effective, will evoke the response of spiritual Beings Who can again walk openly among men and thus establish a close relation and a constant communication between humanity and the spiritual Hierarchy.

It will be obvious to you that as humanity, through its most advanced units, prepares for this next great Approach it must accept with faith and conviction (faith for the masses, and conviction for the knowers and the New Group of World Servers) the premises stated above:

1. The fact of God (God Transcendent)

2. Man's relationship to the divine (God Immanent)

3. The fact of immortality

4. The Brotherhood of man (God in expression)

5. The existence of the Way to God

6. The historicity of the two Great Approaches and the possibility of a third and imminent Approach.

It is here that the churches, if regenerated, can concentrate their efforts, cease perpetuating the outer and visible form, and begin to deal with the reality underlying all dogmas and doctrines. Upon these inner assurances man must take his/her stand, and a study of them will reveal that the majority of the unthinking masses (an immense majority) do accept them hopefully and with desire, though without any definite understanding, and that a steadily increasing minority also accept them with a full convinced awareness_ an awareness that is the result of the transformation of hope into self-proven fact. In between these two extremes is a large group of questioning people; they are not part of the unintelligent mass, nor are they yet either psyientists, mystics or even aspirants. They question and seek conviction; they repudiate faith as unintelligent, but long for a substitute; they are constantly emerging out of the mass of men and constantly moving forward in consciousness through the following of spiritual techniques, eventually taking their stand among those who can say with St. Paul: "I know Whom I have believed." It is with these techniques that the true religious teaching should primarily concern itself.

As we look ahead into the world of tomorrow and begin to question what structure the faith of humanity should assume and what building the skill of the knowers will erect to house the religious spirit of man-woman-child, three more fundamental truths appear to be emerging as necessary adjuncts to the revealed body of truth:

1. The demonstrated existence of a Spiritual Hierarchy, the life-purpose of which is the good of humanity. The Members of the Hierarchy are seen to be the Custodians of the divine Plan and expressions of the Love of God.

2. The development of the Science of Invocation and Evocation as a means and method of approach to divinity. This will grow out of the ancient habits of prayer as used by the masses, and the practice of meditation/IDtation as developed by the mystics and psyientists. Prayer and meditation/IDtation are the preliminary steps to this emerging science, and what is vaguely called "worship" is the group effort to establish some form of united approach to the spiritual Hierarchy, functioning under the guidance and control of the Lord of Love and related to the highest spiritual centre, Shamballa, through its most advanced individuals, just as humanity is related to the Hierarchy by its spiritually minded people.

3. The realisation that the starry heavens, the solar system and the planetary spheres are all of them the manifestations of great spiritual Lives and that the interrelation between these embodied Lives is as real and effectual as is the relation between members of the human family.

The spiritual Hierarchy of the planet, the ability of mankind to contact its Members and to work in cooperation with Them, and the existence of the greater Hierarchy of spiritual energies of which our tiny planetary sphere is a part_ these are the three truths upon which the coming world religion may be based.

Relationship to God, through the Lord of Love , has ever been the teaching of the spiritual leaders of the world, no matter by what name they called Him. In the future we shall draw closer and more intelligently to the living substance of Reality and be more definite in our apprehension of this hitherto vaguely sensed relationship. We shall know and see and understand. We shall not just believe, have hope and try to comprehend. We shall speak openly of the Hierarchy and of its Members and Their work. The hierarchical nature of all spiritual Lives, and the fact of the great "chain of hierarchies" stretching all the way up from the mineral kingdom through the human and the kingdom of God to apparently remote spiritual groups, will be emphasised. Then there will open for the spiritual Lives what has been called "the Way of the Higher Evolution." Much along these lines has been given out during the past two centuries. The fact of the existence of the Hierarchy is consciously recognised by hundreds of thousands today, though still denied by the orthodox; the general public are familiar with the idea of the existence of the Masters, and either gullibly accept the mass of futile and idiotic information handed out by many today or fight furiously against the spread of this teaching. Others are open-minded enough to investigate whether the teaching is true and to follow the techniques suggested, in the hope that hypothesis may turn to fact. This last group is steadily increasing in number and upon their accumulating evidence belief can be translated into knowledge. So many know the truth today; so many people of integrity and worth are cooperating consciously with Members of this Hierarchy that the very foundations of the ecclesiastical antagonisms and the belittling comments of the concrete minded are of no avail. What the orthodox theologian and the narrow doctrinaire have to offer no longer satisfies the intelligent seeker or suffices to answer his/her questions; he/she is shifting his/her allegiances into wider and more spiritual areas. He/She is moving out from under doctrinal authority into direct personal, spiritual experience and coming under the direct authority which contact with the Lord of Love and His noos, the Masters, gives.

In considering our second point, the Science of Invocation and Evocation, we are also moving forward into the area of mental understanding. The grasping nature of many of the prayers of men , based as they are upon desire for something, has long disturbed the intelligent; the vagueness of the meditation/IDtation taught and practised in the East and in the West, and its emphatically selfish note (personal liberation and personal knowledge) are likewise causing a revolt. The demand today is for group work, group good, group knowledge, group contact with the divine, group salvation, group understanding and group relationship to God and the Spiritual Hierarchy. All this indicates progress.

At this point it should be useful to repeat part of what we said elsewhere concerning future developments along this line. (- - - - -.])

This new invocative work will be the keynote of the coming world religion and will fall into two parts. There will be the invocative work of the masses of the people, trained by the spiritually minded people of the world (working in the churches, whenever possible, under an enlightened clergy) to accept the fact of the approaching spiritual energies, focussed through the spiritual Hierarchy, and to voice their spiritual demand for light, liberation and understanding. There will also be the trained, scientific work of appeal and invocation as practised by those who have trained their minds through right meditation/IDtation, who know the uses of sound, of formulas and of invocation, and who can work consciously, focussing the invocative cry of the masses and at the same time using certain great formulas of words which will later be given to the race, as The Lord's Prayer was given by the Lord of Love and The Great Invocation has been given in this day and age.

This new religious science (for which prayer, meditation/IDtation and ritual have laid the foundation) will train its students to present, at certain stated periods throughout the year, the voiced demand of the people of the world for relationship with God and with each other. This work, when rightly carried forward, will evoke response from the waiting Hierarchy; through this response, the belief of the masses will gradually be changed into the conviction of the knowers. In this way humanity will be transformed and spiritualised. Then will begin, as the ages pass away, the regeneration of material nature, with the two spiritual centres_ the Hierarchy and Humanity_ working together in full consciousness and understanding. The Kingdom of God will be functioning on Earth.

It will be apparent to you that we can indicate only the broad general outlines of the new world religion. The expansion of the human consciousness which will take place as a result of the coming great Approach will enable man-woman-child to grasp not only his/her relation to the spiritual Life of our planet, the "One in Whom we live and move and have our being," but will also give him a glimpse of the relation of our planet to the circle of planetary lives moving within the orbit of the Sun, and the still greater circle of spiritual Influences which contact our solar system as it pursues its orbit in the Heavens (the twelve constellations of the zodiac). Astronomical and astrological investigation has demonstrated this relationship and the influences exerted, but there is still speculation and much foolish claiming and interpretation. Yet the churches have ever recognised this relationship, and the Bible has testified to it. "The stars in their courses fought against Sisera"; "Who can withstand the sweet influences of the Pleiades?"; and many other passages bear out this contention of the Knowers. Many church festivals are fixed by reference to the moon or a zodiacal constellation. Investigation will prove this to be increasingly the case, and when the ritual of the new world religion is universally established this will be one of the important factors considered.

The establishing of certain major festivals in relation to the moon, and in a lesser degree to the zodiac, will bring a strengthening of the spirit of invocation and the resultant inflow of responsive influences. The truth lying behind all invocation is based upon the power of thought, particularly in its telepathic nature, rapport and aspect. The unified invocative thought of the masses and the focussed, directed thought of the New Group of World Servers constitute an outgoing stream of energy. This will reach telepathically those spiritual Beings Who are sensitive and responsive to such impacts. Their evoked response, sent out as spiritual energy, will in turn reach humanity, after having been stepped down into thought energy, and in that form will make its due impact upon the minds of men-women-children , convincing them and carrying inspiration and revelation. Thus has it ever been in the history of the spiritual unfoldment of the world and in the procedure followed in writing the world Scriptures.

Secondly, the establishing of a certain uniformity in the world religious rituals will aid men everywhere to strengthen each other's work and enhance powerfully the thought currents directed to the waiting Spiritual Lives. At present, the Christian religion has its great festivals, the Buddhist keeps his/her different set of spiritual events, and the Hindu has still another list of holy days. In the future world, when organised, all men of spiritual inclination and intention everywhere will keep the same holy days. This will bring about a pooling of spiritual resources and a united spiritual effort, plus a simultaneous spiritual invocation. The potency of this will be apparent.

Let us indicate the possibilities of such spiritual events, and prophesy the nature of the coming world-wide Festivals. There will be three such major Festivals each year, concentrated in three consecutive months, and leading therefore to a prolonged spiritual effort which will affect the remainder of the year. These will be:

1. The Festival of Easter. This is the festival of the risen, living Lord of Love, the Teacher of all men and the Head of the Spiritual Hierarchy. He is the Expression of the Love of God. On this day the Spiritual Hierarchy which He guides and directs will be recognised, and the nature of God's love will be emphasised. This festival is determined always by the date of the first Full Moon of spring, and is the great Western and Christian festival.

2. The Festival of Wesak. This is the festival of the Illumined One, the spiritual Intermediary between the highest spiritual centre, Shamballa, and the Hierarchy. The Illumined One is the Expression of the Wisdom of God, the Embodiment of Light, and the Indicator of the divine Purpose. This will be fixed annually in relation to the Full Moon of May, as is at present the case. It is the great Eastern festival.

3. The Festival of Goodwill. This will be the festival of the spirit of humanity_ aspiring towards God, seeking conformity with the Will of God and dedicated to the expression of right human relation. This will be fixed annually in relation to the Full Moon of June. It will be a day whereon the spiritual and divine nature of mankind will be recognised. On this festival, for two thousand years, the Lord of Love has represented humanity and has stood before the Hierarchy and in the sight of Shamballa as the God-Man, the Leader of His people and "the Eldest in a great family of Brothers [/Sisters]" (Romans VIII:29). Each year at that time He has preached the last sermon of the Illumined One before the assembled Hierarchy. This will therefore be a festival of deep invocation and appeal, of a basic aspiration towards fellowship, of human and spiritual unity, and will represent the effect in the human consciousness of the work of the Illumined One and of the Lord of Love.

These three festivals are already being kept throughout the world, though they are not as yet related to each other, and as part of the unified spiritual Approach of humanity. The time is coming when all three festivals will be kept simultaneously throughout the world, and by their means a great spiritual unity will be achieved and the effects of the great Approach so close to us at this time will be stabilised by the united invocation of humanity throughout the planet.

The remaining full moons will constitute lesser festivals, but will be recognised to be also of vital importance. They will establish the divine attributes in the consciousness of man-woman-child, just as the major festivals establish the three divine aspects. These aspects and qualities will be arrived at and determined by a close study of the nature of a particular constellation or constellations influencing those months. For instance, Capricorn (December) will call attention to the first initiation, the birth of the Lord of Love in the cave of the heart, and indicate the training needed to bring about that great spiritual event in the life of the individual man-woman-child. We give this one instance to you in order to indicate the possibilities for spiritual unfoldment that could be given through an understanding of these influences, and in order to revivify the ancient faiths by expanding them into their larger undying relationships.

We have, therefore, the following:

Shamballa the Will aspect of God Wesak May Full Moon (Taurus)

Hierarchy the Love aspect of God Easter April Full Moon (Aries)

Humanity divine Intelligence Goodwill June Full Moon (Gemini)

The remaining nine Full Moons will be concerned with the divine characteristics and their development in mankind.

Thus the twelve festivals will constitute a revelation of divinity. They will present a means of bringing about relationship, first of all during three months with the three great spiritual centres, the three expressions of the divine Trinity. The minor festivals will emphasise the inter-relation of the Whole, thus lifting the divine presentation out of the individual and the personal into that of the universal divine Purpose; the relationship of the Whole to the part and of the part to that Whole will be thereby fully expressed.

Humanity will therefore invoke the spiritual power of the Kingdom of God, the Hierarchy; the Hierarchy will respond, and God's plans will then be worked out on Earth. The Hierarchy, on a higher turn of the spiral, will invoke the centre of God's Will, Shamballa or Shangri-Lha, thus invoking the Purpose of God. Thus will the Will of God be implemented by Love and manifested intelligently; for this mankind is ready, and for this the Earth waits.

&&&&&&&

FACTORS IN THE WORLD SITUATION

April 1944

We have written to the world aspirants for many Wesaks now. We have again and again brought to your attention and theirs the close relation which is being established between the world of men and the world of souls. We have again and again pointed out that, under the Law of Evolution, certain great fusions, at-one-ments or Great Approaches are taking place. We have indicated that the present activity of our planetary Logos is bringing certain major adjustments within the planetary sphere of influence and that these primarily affect the human kingdom. We have called to your notice the urgency of the incoming life, producing tension, spiritual recognitions of a far-reaching nature, the immediate overthrow of false Gods and standards, and the destruction of outworn and crystallised interpretations (called doctrines) of the spiritual realities. By these means, the way is cleared for a new and simple recognition of divinity which will satisfy not only the heart of the simplest person, but which will meet the need of the most intelligent. We have talked in terms of the union of Eastern and Western thought and of the need for the great civilisations_ nurtured under the influence of Shri Krishna, the Illumined One and the Lord of Love_ to be brought closer together. We have said (and we here re-affirm) that He Who comes will make this union possible and effective. This event will evoke world-wide recognition.

We have stated also that we are reaching a climaxing period in human history; in this period the Lords of Karma are unusually active; the Law of Cause and Effect is bringing the results of past activities, the subjective thinking and the secret impulses to the surface, and exacting penalty and the planned cleaning of the slate of human history. When He Whom all noos serve was on Earth two thousand years ago, He said that secret things would be made plain; by this emergence of the good and of the bad into prominence, men will arrive at knowledge, at understanding, and will be forced to take those steps which will be needed to build a new and better world, based on the Law of Love and not on the Law of Separateness and hate. This is what is happening today.

We have said also that the Forces of Light are nearing the Earth and that the Hierarchy is coming steadily closer to mankind.

These basic events, these subjective happenings and these spiritual determinations_ under the Law of Action and Reaction_ have evoked a more rapid response from the Forces of Evil (present in our planetary life) than from humanity. Certain great Forces or embodied Energies of darkness and of evil organised themselves and took the needed steps (so they believed) to prevent humanity from stepping onward into light. They availed themselves of the weaknesses, the selfishness and the self-interest of man-woman-child; just as good can stimulate the latent goodness in mankind into expression, so evil can evoke greater evil from those susceptible from innate weakness, and from the unthinking and emotional: the Forces of Light work only with men's souls. Lies, false teaching, evil propaganda, a conflict of nerves, the culture of fear, the organisation of groups and of isolated workers in every nation pledged to undermine righteousness and distort the truth, went rapidly forward. Great and fundamental truths were twisted to meet the ends of the evil workers.

The doctrine, for instance, of the super-race was interpreted to mean the superiority of the German nation and culture to all in the West, whilst the divinity of the Sons of Heaven (the Japanese race) was emphasised to all in the East. The bewildered peoples of both nations were led to believe that they had a great and spiritual mission to dominate the world.

This was the first result of the approach of the Kingdom of God to the earth, or rather to the physical plane. In that kingdom men of all races will demonstrate their divinity; the kingdom of souls will be recognised as the universal home and race of all men. Separative nationalities will, in that kingdom, have no place or recognition.

The Forces of Evil sought for those leaders and groups who are the materialistic correspondence to the spiritual leaders and those who seek to guide humanity along right lines. They took possession (and we use this word with deliberation) of the evil men who led the Axis Powers_ Hitler, Tojo, Goebbels, Ribbentrop, Himmler and_ to a much lesser degree_ Mussolini, Hess, Goering and others. They completely overpowered the minds of these men, already distorted with ambition and sadistic inclinations. Who, you ask, do we mean by "they"? We mean those intelligent evil, unloving, hateful Individualities who are to the world of selfish and material focus what the Hierarchy of Masters, working under the Lord of Love, are to struggling human aspirants. The power of these evil forces is enormous, for they recognise no restrictions or ordinary decent, human limitations; they work through violence, coercion, cruelty, hate, terror and lies; they aim to subjugate the human consciousness through the complete control of men's minds, through the withholding of good and the promulgation of evil. They stimulate the brains of men through the extent of their evil and magical knowledge; we mean this literally and physically. The Great Light Lodge, working under the inspiration of the Lord of Love and of Shamballa, functions necessarily under certain spiritual restrictions. Coercion is not permitted; the minds of men must be and are left free; the stimulation of the souls of men is permitted, because it results in the stimulation of the expression of love and of understanding, leading to right human relations. These spiritual restrictions greatly slow down the progress of the Forces of Light; it should interest you to remember that the length of the conflict was partly dependent upon the inability of the Armies of the Lord to commit the crimes for which the Axis Powers have been responsible. The physical activities of the Forces of Light do recognise certain limitations, and of this the Forces of Evil take constant advantage. The bombing of massed populations was started by Hitler and could have been ended by him immediately if he so chose.

There is another aspect of this matter to which we would like to call your attention. These restrictions which the Forces of Light recognise have also an undesirable effect where the unintelligent and well-meaning are concerned, and where those who are emotionally polarised interpret the Law of Love. The United Nations, working for human liberation and freedom (and therefore working under the Law of Love, rightly understood) is prevented from following the lines of indiscriminate cruelty which characterised the German and Japanese techniques: torture, starvation, lying propaganda, misuse of prisoners, the dissemination of a terror campaign. These are not permitted by the rules of the Brothers of Humanity. From a purely physical angle, this can be interpreted as putting the "Armies of the Lord" at a disadvantage. It is this right attitude on the part of the Forces of Light which has an undesirable effect upon the appeasers and pacifists of the world. These would, for humanitarian reasons and from love of the forms through which humanity functions, bring the conflict to an immediate end.

In their well-meaning blindness they would sacrifice the future of humanity and the lives of millions of people at a later date for a temporary cessation of hostilities. We would emphasise to you that the Forces of Evil must be defeated now; the evil leaders must be wrenched from their high place, and the complete defeat and annihilation of those responsible for launching this horror on humanity is an absolute necessity and bounden duty, if security, well-being and a new order of happier living is to be the lot of coming generations. A temporary ending of the conflict would only give time for the Forces of Evil to reorganise, and the future conflict would be infinitely worse than this one. This the intelligent humanitarian is saying, and this is the opinion of the Hierarchy. The Hierarchy stands firmly on the side of those who demand a conflict to a finish, and the reasons are the ultimate saving of millions of lives and the preservation of certain basic spiritual values.

The issue is far more serious spiritually than you know; the work of the Hierarchy is handicapped not only by the restrictions under which the Forces of Light must work, but also by the work and utterances of the silly little men with small vision who see not the future possibilities if the conflict came to an inconclusive finish, and who (for the present comfort of the present generation) would sacrifice the children of tomorrow and later generations. The work of the Hierarchy is handicapped by the attitudes of men with no perspective and much selfishness, of no cruelty but of stupid thinking. These men_ in the houses of legislature in the various United Nations, in Parliament, in Congress, and in the churches_ plead for the cessation of the conflict before victory is won and before the enemies of humanity are beaten to their knees in supplication for mercy and in a demand for peace. They see the end of business as they have known it; they see the familiar landmarks of their comfortable world disappearing; they dislike the results of the conflict as it affects them; or they cannot bear the general suffering and prompted by pity they demand an immediate peace. Others are prompted by isolationism and the desire to withdraw from participation in the misery of conflict; others hate those whose duty it is to carry the conflict to a successful climax, or see their particular ambitions threatened by the conditionings of a changing world. They would sacrifice future generations, as we have said above, to their short-sighted policy and feeble judgment. They spread disunity, therefore, and shackle the hands of those administering in high places. Their efforts prolong the conflict, dishearten the fighting forces, break down national and military morale, and lay a poor foundation for the work of the post-conflict world. There are many of these in every nation, there are too many in the United States of America; there are none in the U.S.S.R., and hence her triumphant march forward.

You have, consequently, in the world today:

1. The Forces of Evil, working through Germany and Japan. To date, they are holding their own and they are not yet defeated. They are terrorising the world. Within their own national borders they do not possess enough people with courage, understanding, or with the ability to think clearly, who hate evil and who can hold to a vision. There is little in either nation to bring assistance to the Forces of Light. The Germans were deceived from the beginning, and a widespread national deception, backed by a terror campaign, argues a general weakness, lack of courage and a natural predilection for evil guidance. The tendency to be led along aggressive, selfish and evil lines has been characteristic of the German mentality for a great length of time. This negative nation, with its arrogant psychology (one of the great paradoxes of the ages), must be taught the ways of positive good, and a courageous championing of righteousness must take the place of the present negative acceptance of evil. With humility and intelligence must the German nation be taught to take a proper place in the community of nations. The Japanese nation, in spite of its great age, must go back into the nursery state; it must be taught, as children are taught, to be social and not anti-social, and it will be long before it will be safe to trust this nation. The Italian nation presents no greater problem than does any other nation in the world. It is normal, as are the United Nations; the German nation and the Japanese race are not normal, and must be brought back to normality by careful, kindly, but firm handling, and by applied educational processes.

2. The Forces of Light. We would here correct an impression which exists among esotericists. By this phrase, (the Forces of Light), they are apt to mean that the Hierarchy is literally fighting against the Axis nations. This is not so in the physical sense. The Hierarchy works_ as you well know_ with the souls of men and with those minds which are so oriented and disposed that they react to soul impression. When we use the expression "the Forces of Light" we mean those enlightened nations upon whom the light of Freedom shines and who will refuse, at all costs, to relinquish that light. There is no freedom in Germany or in Japan. In a lesser sense and for a brief time, there was no freedom in Italy, but Italy must be counted among the enlightened nations, for it could not be held in duress. The Forces of Light comprise those nations (working through their armies and in the diplomatic arena) who are today fighting for the freedom of humanity, for the eternal rights of man-woman-child, for liberty of conscience, for the position of the individual in any nation, and for freedom of religion or the right of m-w-c's self-chosen approach to the spiritual realities. Behind these nations stands the Hierarchy. Freedom is the birthright of mankind, and free will is the highest of the divine characteristics. Freedom is misinterpreted and misused by many, owing to the point in evolution of the mass of humanity, but it is a fundamental, divine principle; and where principles are involved the Hierarchy knows no compromise. There is no spiritual principle behind any of the activities of the Axis Powers, behind German activity or Japanese aggression. Therefore, the Hierarchy does not stand with power or strength behind any of their efforts.

3. Humanity as a whole. The men, women and children of the world are all implicated in and affected by this universal conflict. The effects reach into the most isolated village, the most extensive desert and the highest mountain top, as well as into the cities and congested areas of all the nations. No one is exempt from the consequences of this present catastrophe. The bulk of humanity are universal and innocent sufferers. The majority scarcely realise what it is all about; they view this great historical climax from the purely self-centred angle and from the point of view of how it affects them as individuals and their nation as a whole. An increasing number are coming to realise that this conflict must be fought to a successful finish because there is no peace or hope or right world relationships as long as two nations_ one in the Western hemisphere and the other in the Eastern_ can precipitate disaster upon countless millions. A minority are realising that the conflict has precipitated the condensed evil of the ages and that humanity is faced with the opportunity of erasing past errors, ancient selfishness and ingrained wickedness, and of inaugurating a new and better world. In this new world there will be freedom of approach to God, opportunity for individual expression, freedom to live in right relations and scope for creative living. A few_ a very few_ know that this is a climaxing point in an ancient conflict between Lord of Love with His Hierarchy of Masters, and "spiritual wickedness in high places." A mere handful of knowers and noos know, past all controversy and discussion, that, heading up those unhappy lands_ Germany and Japan_ are ancient leaders who have again sought to bring planetary disaster and to deflect the ends and the aims of the Great Light Lodge.

Among all these are thousands who stand bewildered, sensing the truth but feeling helpless in the face of the gigantic horror which the evil gang now ruling Germany has precipitated upon humanity. They tend to right thinking but are still the prey of the unscrupulous and the selfish. When their thinking has been guided into right lines through a process of right presentation of the situation, they will constitute a powerful asset to the Forces of Light.

Such is the situation with which the Hierarchy and humanity are today faced. The strength of the Forces of Light is growing; the power of the Forces of Darkness may be waning but is still vastly strong_ upon the physical plane. Their main hold is upon the minds of men and that is exceedingly potent and unweakened, for it is aided by the mild, unthinking person, by the bewildered, the pacifist, the appeaser and the isolationist. The idealism of this group is turned to the aid of Germany by the skilful evil workers. The German armies are still unbeaten; central Europe is a mighty fortress, dominated by the arch enemy of mankind, sitting on his mountain-top. There, symbolically, he is to be found, the initiator into evil conditions, and into slavery. The armies of the Lord stand poised, and victory will be theirs when there is complete unity of purpose, concentrated attention upon right human relations, and a spread of idealistic aspiration to all who are fighting this battle for freedom. For this unity of purpose all the enlightened people of the world must work. It is not yet adequately present.

Let us now turn to the work of the Hierarchy and to the event for which all initiates and noos are now preparing_ the coming Wesak Festival.

THE TASK OF IMPLEMENTING THE WILL-TO-GOOD

May 1944

How is the Hierarchy working at this time? In what manner are the Masters aiding the work of the Forces of Light? Can something of moment and of lasting significance happen at this coming May Full Moon? How do the Masters look at the world situation? What are Their plans? Can these plans be materialised? And what can the individual noo , initiate and world noo accomplish in the face of humanity's dilemma?

These are all normal and intelligent questions and can be answered partially, though not fully, owing to three reasons:

1. The outcome of the coming climaxing conflict depends on humanity itself. A greater effort is required, particularly in America_ an effort to see the issues clearly, to understand the causes of this conflict, and a determination to take those steps_ through propaganda and discussion_ which will clarify the minds of the masses. Into these age-long causes we cannot here go; there is not time to do more than enumerate certain of them

a. Universal and ancient selfishness, materialism, aggression, and national prides. Of these faults all nations have been guilty.

b. A sense of separateness of which the border issue between such nations as Russia and Poland is symbolic. The need of humanity and its general well-being comes eternally first. Nations and their ephemeral disputes are of secondary interest.

c. A tendency_ centuries old_ among the Germanic peoples to dominate, to take what is not their own, to regard themselves as unique, superior, and as embodying a super-race; there is also a fixed determination, on behalf of their own interests, to plunge other nations and races into conflict. Today they have achieved a planetary conflict.

2. There are factors present in this battle between evil and good which are so deeply esoteric and hidden from the understanding of the most advanced human being that it is useless for us to enlarge upon their existence. They are concerned with the ability of the mind, or of the mind principle, to react to truth or to lies; the mystery of this reaction is hidden in the evolutionary process itself. A point can be reached in human development where acceptance of deception is impossible and clear thinking is normal. The potency of glamour (which holds so many people in prison) is related to this mystery. Glamour holds not those who are mentally and emotionally undeveloped; they are complete realists and see life in its bare outlines and baldly. The highly developed are not subject to glamour; they also think realistically but this time with true mental perception and not instinctively. The thinking man, in his/her process of training, but who is still largely governed by his/her emotions, is exceedingly prone to glamour, and very often to the glamour of a sentimental so-called loving attitude. These people do not realise that love is a process of determining action on the basis of the ultimate good of the individual or the group, and that the immediate reactions of the personality are secondary. In this conflict the Hierarchy is concerned with the final issue, with the future welfare and the ultimate well-being of humanity. They are not so concerned with the immediate suffering and pain of the personalities involved. Is this a hard saying? A tiny replica of this correct attitude can be found in the influence, words and actions of those wise parents, those far-sighted guides of youth, who see the need of discipline if their children are in the future to be rightly oriented, and to live correctly. The temporary discomfort of the discipline and the rebellion of the children do not in any way condition such parents. They see ahead.

3. The conflict at present involving humanity has its source not only in human weakness and selfishness, but in a situation which has existed for ages between the Great Light Lodge of Masters and the Lodge of Self-aggrandisement / Black Magic / Dark Adepts. This started in Atlantean times and must now be fought out to a finish. With the details of this struggle (fought on mental levels) you have no concern, except in so far as you and the rest of mankind react to lies or to truth. Two streams of mental energy or of thought-directed ideas impinge powerfully at this time upon the human consciousness. One is embodied in the lying propaganda emanating from the Axis Powers and affecting potently not only their own peoples but the selfish politicians, the intolerant and the racially conditioned people, and the well-intentioned but short-sighted appeasers and pacifists. The second stream is embodied in the idealism, the humanitarianism, and the clear presentation of the factual situation which characterise the best minds in every nation and which condition the thinking of the leaders of the United Nations; this stream has, for instance, conditioned the attitude and the changed orientation of the U.S.S.R., and has brought them to a position of cooperation and to a relinquishing of some of their separative ideas.

The leader of the conflict against evil in high places is the Lord of Love, the Head of the Hierarchy. What is the attitude of the Prince of Peace at this time? In all reverence, and as one of His humblest friends and personal workers, we are permitted to tell you a little of His position as He nears the great event in May of this year. He knows Himself to be the inner spiritual Commander of the Armies of the Lord. Hiss is the responsibility of awakening the souls of men to their presented opportunity and to the need of bringing to an end this ancient conflict between the Lords of Evil and the Messengers of Light. Hiss has been the problem of teaching humanity that, in order to demonstrate true love and to provide scope and opportunity for a civilisation in which love, brother/sisterhood and right human relations are governing factors, those essential steps must be taken which will accomplish this.

He said when He was on earth two thousand years ago, "I came not to bring peace, but a sword." The sword of the spirit is wielded by the Hierarchy, and by its means cosmic evil is arrested; the sword of discrimination is wielded by the initiates and the noos of the world, and by its means the distinction between good and evil, with a consequent presentation of free choice between the two, has been laid before humanity, and the lines of demarcation have been made abundantly clear in this world conflict. It had been the hope of the Lord of Love and the longing of all the Masters that men would see clearly and make free and right choice, so that_ without physical plane warfare_ they would bring about the needed changes and the ending of wrong conditions. But the conflict descended on to the physical plane and the sword of material conflict (symbolically speaking) was taken up by humanity.

Forget not (particularly those of you who are outraged by physical conflict through your pacifist inclinations) that, in the West, it was Germany which first of all took the sword in hand, marching into Poland and bringing misery, devastation and cruelty to a smaller and much weaker nation, thus forcing France and Great Britain to fulfil their pledged obligations to that little nation and to declare conflict upon the aggressor. It was Japan who brought conflict into the Eastern hemisphere. The Forces of Light were left with no alternative but to fight in defense of freedom.

Prior to the conflict, the Hierarchy did what it could to change the trend of human living and thinking, awakening the consciences of the intelligent, stimulating the activity of the humanitarians and impressing the minds of Their noos in order to arouse goodwill, a driving desire for right human relations and peaceful conditions. But the movement was not strong enough; the sword appeared on earth and mankind was plunged into conflict.

Since then the work of impressing the minds of the world noos and of those whom they can influence has been along the lines of clarifying the issues, making plain that for which we fight, and arousing men to take such action as will, once and for all, end the possibility of a similar world cataclysm.

The activities of our Master, the Lord of Sacrifice, fall into three categories:

1. Stiffening the will to fight on behalf of the spiritual issues and for the great humanitarian aims of the Hierarchy.

2. Impressing the minds of diplomats, thinkers and lovers of mankind to work out now certain post-conflict plans which will entirely change our present civilisation and bring about the new.

3. Arousing the minds of the masses and turning them_ each in his/her own place and manner_ into a more religious channel. The growth of spiritual desire and aspiration is phenomenal today, could you but see the indications as the workers on the inner side do.

Our Master, the Lord of Love, is also at this time carrying forward three major activities. We can tell you briefly what they are, but only the noos of the world will grasp the true implications.

He is, first of all, occupied with the process of deflecting the will-energy, emanating from Shamballa, in such a way that it will not be seized upon and misused by the Axis Powers in order to stiffen their peoples into increased opposition to the Forces of Light. It must be rechannelled and used to stiffen the purpose of the United Nations to carry the conflict to a finish of victory and of triumph, to increase the will-to-unity of all the allied peoples and to make firm the intention of the post-conflict planners that freedom, educational facilities, truth and right living shall be the lot of the incoming generation. This necessitates on the part of the Lord of Love a concentration for which we have no equivalent word and a purely spiritual endeavour (a monadic effort) of which we have no faintest idea.

Secondly, He is working within the confines of the Hierarchy itself, preparing His noos, the Masters, for certain great post-conflict events. For the conflict will end. The Restoration of the Mysteries, the initiation of those noos who have stood firm and unafraid during the conflict, the enlargement of Their ashrams, owing to the almost unforeseen development of the spiritual sense among the world aspirants who would not normally have become noos during this incarnation, and also the externalisation of Their ashrams during the next one hundred years, preparatory to the reappearance of the Hierarchy upon earth, are some of His present hierarchical responsibilities. These involve a tremendous expenditure of force, of second ray energy, just as His first activity demands an unusual expenditure of first ray power_ something which even He , in His high place, is only now learning to handle, as a pledged noo of Sanat Kumara.

His third activity is the effort to offset the growing hate in the world, to strengthen the trend towards unity, and to show people everywhere the danger of separateness. A growing and (from the worldly point of view) reasonable hatred of the German people and of the Japanese is steadily rising. This hate they have brought upon themselves. Hate ever lacks discrimination. The great Law of Spiritual Retribution requires that justice be meted out, but hatred will close the eyes of justice. The law must be administered, and the world will see the expression of that same law, stated in the words, "Whatsoever a man-woman-child soweth, that shall he/she also reap." But the materialistic law of hate and of separation must be negated and offset. The problem with which the Lord of Love is faced is wellnigh_ from the human angle_ insoluble. He will require the united effort of all men of goodwill to stem the rising tide of hate_ the floodgates of which were opened by Germany when she began her attacks upon the Jews; she is now in danger of drowning in the waters which she has set loose. There is also a rising tendency to separation among certain of the Allied Nations, with which the Lord of Love must deal. Several of them are as houses divided against themselves. Such are Poland, France, Yugoslavia and Greece. How can their differences be reconciled?

The hate of those who have suffered at the hands of the Axis Powers, or as a result of conflict conditions, must be offset. How can this be done? Such are some of the problems with which the Lord of Love is wrestling. He must work through His noos, and They must be trained. He must work through the stimulation of the hearts of the intelligent people and of the humanitarians everywhere. He must pour out the life-giving energy of the Lord of Love-life on a wide scale throughout the entire world, and do so in the midst of those conditions wherein human receptivity and sensitivity are at their lowest point, owing to the numbness which comes through intense suffering. He stands in His place unmoved and unafraid, with clear perception of the truth and spiritual insight into the true situation. In collaboration with His great Brother, the Illumined One, He is preparing for the next step.

Today the Hierarchy is facing a climaxing activity. From the Full Moon of May, 1944, until the Full Moon of May, 1945, the Members of the Hierarchy will unitedly be putting forth Their maximum effort to close the door upon the Forces of Evil, to direct the Shamballa energy (now let loose upon the world) so that its destructive aspect may be transmuted or directed towards the stimulation which will result in the rebuilding of the world. This will then affect not only the Members of the Hierarchy, but all on Earth who respond to hierarchical impression. Have the following statement in mind:

"The focussed and concentrated work of the Hierarchy at the time of the Full Moon of May, 1944 is_ by Their united effort, Their blended thought and Their illumined will power, under the trained guidance of the Illumined One and the Lord of Love_ to withdraw the energy of the will-to-separation and aggression (a distortion of first ray energy) away from the Forces of Evil and channel it again, via the Hierarchy; it will then demonstrate as the Will-to-Good, and this will express itself via the men of goodwill on Earth. This requires a great Act of Absorption by the Hierarchy."

The Illumined One will start the process at the time of His appearance, through the use of a great first ray mantram. This can be used only by someone of His initiate standing and in collaboration with the Lord of the World. He will thereby deflect the Shamballa force which the Adepts of the Self-Aggrandising / evil / Dark Lodge have turned loose into the Axis nations; this has been made possible by their receptivity to the will-to-power. He will "corral" it (if we may use such a colloquial and inappropriate term) and will place it at the disposal of the Lord of Love. The reception and the acceptance of this first ray energy will require a tremendous effort upon the part of the Lord of Love, the Custodian of the energy of the second Ray of Love. It is for this "reception" that He started to prepare at the time of the April Full Moon.

We have told you elsewhere that this direct impact of the Shamballa energy upon humanity very seldom occurs. It has been loosed only three times during the entire history of the human kingdom. At other times, it makes its impact directly upon the Hierarchy, and is then transmuted or stepped down so that humanity can take it. The three times it has been directed, unimpeded and untransmuted, towards humanity are:

1. At the time of the individualisation of animal-man when the mind principle was implanted. This was the birth hour of the human soul.

2. In Atlantean days when the power of the Self-Aggrandising / evil / Dark Lodge was so great that defeat faced the Hierarchy and the destruction of the human soul. Shamballa then interfered, and the world of that time was destroyed. This period is recognised in modern history as the time of the Great Flood.

3. Today, once again, the Powers of Darkness are attempting to destroy humanity and the spiritual values. The power of Shamballa was let loose, destroying old forms_ political, social and religious_ but at the same time this power was seized upon by the evil forces to destroy the souls of men, to precipitate conflict and to destroy the cities and all our centres of civilisation and culture. The first phase or form of destruction was directed by the noos, the aspirants and the clear thinking people of the world, and this was needed and very good. The old social, political and religious forms were stultifying the human soul and handicapping all progress. The second phase or form of destruction was directed by evil, and was focussed through those nations who had succumbed to the glamour of superiority, to the temptation of material aggression and to intolerant racial hatreds, implemented by cruelty and barbarism.

The time has now come when this divine energy must express itself through the second aspect of the will-to-good, and not through the first aspect, the will-to-power. Mankind has had to be shown that it is not yet ready for power, because the will-to-good is not adequately strong to balance this first aspect of the will.

This then is the task of the Lord of Love and of the Illumined One at the time of the May Full Moon_ to channel and redirect the Shamballa force. If They can do this, the result will be a new realisation and accomplishment of the will-to-good by the New Group of World Servers, under the receptive guidance of the world noos and a responsive activity of the men of goodwill .

Therefore, get this clearly in mind, so that your cooperation can be intelligent and rightly directed.

First, at the time of the May Full Moon, the Illumined One will sound out a great mantram and become the "absorbing Agent" of the first ray force. He will use the magnetic power of the second ray to attract this force to Himself and will hold it steady, prior to redirecting it. The Lord of Love will then_ on behalf of the Hierarchy_ become the "receiving Agent" of this potent energy, and the seven groups of Masters Who work with the human and sub-human kingdoms will (in response to His demand) become the "directing Agents" for the sevenfold expression of this force.

Second, at the time of the June Full Moon, the Hierarchy, under the guidance of the Lord of Love, will let loose this will-to-good upon humanity, producing seven great results, according to the seven subrays of this first Ray of Will or Power:

1. Power will be given to the noos of the world and the initiates among men, so that they can direct efficiently and wisely the coming process of rebuilding.

2. The will-to-love will stimulate the men of goodwill everywhere so that hatred will gradually be overcome and men will seek to live together cooperatively. This will take some time, but the inner urge is there and subject to stimulation.

3. The will-to-action will lead intelligent people throughout the world to inaugurate those activities which will lay the foundation for a new, better and happier world.

4. The will-to-cooperate will steadily increase also. men will desire and demand right human relations_ a result more general than that produced by the activity of the first three aspects of this ray, but which will be a natural outcome of this activity.

5. The will-to-know and to think correctly and creatively will become an outstanding characteristic of the masses. Knowledge is the first step towards wisdom.

6. The will-to-persist (which is an aspect of devotion and idealism) will become a human characteristic_ a sublimation of the basic instinct of self-preservation. This will lead to a persistent belief in the ideals presented by the Hierarchy, and the demonstration of immortality.

7. The will-to-organise will further a building process which will be carried forward under the direct inspiration of the Hierarchy. The medium will be the potency of the will-to-good of the New Group of World Servers and the responsive goodwill of mankind.

We have expressed in these few simple terms the results of the planned determination of the two Great Lords which must take shape and emerge at the time of the May and June Full Moons. What they succeed in doing will take years to demonstrate, but the end is inevitable once the right direction of the will-to-good has been achieved. This demonstration is dependent, however, upon two things:

1. The focussed work of the Lord of Love and of the Hierarchy during the coming year, until May 1945.

2. The reflective thinking and careful planning of the New Group of World Servers during the same period.

Much outer activity upon a planetary scale will not be possible till 1945, but much can then become possible if hierarchical requirements are met. A year of preparation for the tremendous task of implementing the will-to-good and of producing a better civilisation and way of life is short indeed.

The Lord of Love has gone into retreat for a month and cannot be reached even by the Masters until May 5th. He is in closest consultation with the Illumined One and with the Lord of the World. This great Triangle of Potencies_ the Lord of Will or Power, the Lord of Wisdom, and the Lord of Love_ are today entirely preoccupied with the task of bringing the conflict to an end, and therefore with the task of neutralising the destroyer aspect of the first ray. This They will do by implementing the will-to-good by means of the wisdom of which the Illumined One is the experienced Custodian, and also by laying down those plans whereby the Lord of Love may_ via the Hierarchy and the New Group of World Servers_ bring about that "loving understanding" (esoterically understood and bearing little resemblance to what is usually understood by those words) in the hearts of men. When this Triangle of Energies has synchronised its efforts, then at the May Full Moon, the great task of leading humanity into the light of a new day can be begun.

In the meantime, the Masters and Their ashrams are likewise getting ready to implement these plans and are endeavouring to inspire Their noos with the same vision and objectives, so that they too may be prepared to play their due part.

Such, Brothers, is the situation as regards the position of humanity and the intentions and work of the Hierarchy. What then is the work which you can and must do?

We have for years indicated certain lines of activity which we, the Teachers and Guides on the inner side of life, would have all aspirants and noos follow. The plans outlined by us during the past ten years are definitely a part of the hierarchical programme and are being presented in their specific forms by the other Masters.

There is little that we can add. There is nothing which we tell you at this time that you do not already know.

Do we need to ask you to work in the place where you are for national and world unity?
Must we plead with you to do what you can to heal divisions, and thus render effective that basic integrity which should unite the three major world powers through which the Hierarchy is attempting to work?
Do we need to enjoin the necessity to counteract hate with justice, understanding and mercy?
Have we to continue explaining the need for the complete triumph of the Forces of Light, for the triumphant progress of the armies of the United Nations, and for that triumph to be won first of all on spiritual levels and then carried through_ with commonsense and persistence_ on to the physical side of life, as well as in the intervening mental world? Do we need to ask for the control of emotions in the general interest, and for the consecration of time, energy and money to the enormous task of human salvage?
On these points we shall not dwell. Nothing is here gained by reiteration except the growing burden of a responsibility which you can shoulder to your eternal happiness or discard to your shame and eventual karmic reaction. Only this will we say: Get rid of selfishness, provincialism and insularity. Think in terms of the one humanity. Let your lives count in the scale of useful and needed service. Leave off saying and thinking those things which are critical of others_ other people and other allied nations.

&&&&&&&

Forget not that the Forces of Evil are still powerful, particularly on the physical plane, and that there are many channels through which they can work. Germany is defeated, but is still capable of a final effort of destructiveness and violence. Japan is well on the way to defeat, but is still powerful. The hierarchy of evil on the inner side is being pushed back by the Forces of Light, but its grip on humanity has not relaxed. It is through ignorance that these forces can still attain much power_ the ignorance of humanity itself. Nations and people are still ignorant of the true nature of each other; the world is full of distrust and suspicion. Humanity as a whole knows little about Russia, for instance. The true significance of Its ideology is misunderstood because of the initial mistakes of those who engineered the revolution; the license of unruly men in the early days gave onlooking humanity a wrong slant on what was happening. But those days are over. In the fires of suffering and through deepened understanding, this great and composite nation will advance towards a demonstration of brother/sisterhood which may yet set an example to the entire world. China needs a full literacy; her citizens as a whole know nothing of other nations; on a higher turn of the spiral, that educational supremacy which distinguished an oligarchy of learning in the days of China's ancient glory will again distinguish the masses of her people. The great continent of Europe and the British peoples are still unaware of the real significance of the Western hemisphere and of the United States_ with its exuberant youthfulness. They find it as irritating as their deeper maturity and wide experience proves irritating to Americans. Americans, both in the northern and in the southern hemispheres, are still basically ignorant of the history of the nations from which they spring, because they have laid the emphasis upon their relatively brief history and have been brought up on a biased and oft prejudiced picture of European culture and of British aims. This ignorance throughout the world plays right into the hands of the Forces of Evil and_ beaten as they now are on the physical plane_ they will give more violent battle to world goodwill on the planes of emotional decision, and on mental levels to those ideologies which are of benefit to the whole of humanity.

Physical plane methods having resulted only in the complete devastation of Europe and in casualties which (if civilian men, women and children are included) amount to untold millions, the forces of evil will now endeavour to utilise the character of humanity as a whole (at its present total point of development) to hinder the Forces of Light, prevent the attainment of world tranquillity and world understanding, and thus delay the day of their own final defeat. This defeat, when accomplished, must include the three worlds of human evolution_ mental, emotional and physical. For long these evil forces have used psychology in order to reach the ends they had in view, and have used it with amazing success; they are still using it, and can be depended upon to employ its methods to the uttermost. They use the press and the radio in order to distort human thinking; they present half-truths, impute false motives, rake up past grievances, foretell (with foreboding) imminent difficulties; they foster ancient prejudices and hatreds, and emphasise religious and national differences. In spite of much shouting, demanding and proposed organisation, there is no truly free press anywhere; particularly is it absent in the United States, where parties and publishers dictate newspaper policies.

The main reason why there is no really free press is based on two factors:

first, the fact that humanity is not yet free from its predetermined reasonings, its basic ignorances of factual history, or of nations and their psychology; humanity is still controlled by racial and national bias and by prejudice.
Secondly, the fact that all this is nurtured and kept alive by the forces of evil, working upon the inner side of human affairs and dealing mainly with the psychological angle because it is so exceedingly potent. This they will increasingly do as this planetary conflict draws to a close; they will seek to offset the work of the Hierarchy, to hamper the activities of the New Group of World Servers and to cloud the issues involved to such a degree that the men of goodwill everywhere will be bewildered and will fail to see the clear outlines of the factual situation or distinguish between what is true and what is false. Forget not, the forces of evil are exceedingly clever.
It is necessary also to remind ourselves that, having won the conflict against aggression and barbarity upon the physical plane (and it is won), humanity has now earned the right to carry that accomplishment through to psychological and actual mental victory, and to do this together and with the mustered aid of enlightened men and women from every country_ hence the inauguration of this Cycle of Conferences and Councils. This cycle will prove long or short, according to the release of the will-to-good from the spiritual world, in response to the massed intent of the men of goodwill everywhere.

As the destroying aspect of the Will of God nears the accomplishing of divine purpose, the will-to-good can emerge with clarity and dominate human affairs. Out of the immensity of planetary evil, demonstrated through the destructive conflict of the past few years (1914-1945), great and permanent good can come; the spiritual Hierarchy stands ready to evoke the good latent behind the work of destruction which has been done, but this can be so only if the goodwill of humanity itself is employed with adequate invocative power. If this goodwill finds expression, two things can occur: first, certain potencies and forces can be released upon the earth which will aid men's effort to attain right human relations, with its resultant effect_ peace; secondly, the forces of evil will be so potently defeated that never again will they be able to wreak such universal destruction upon earth.

Years ago we said that the conflict which may follow this one would be waged in the field of the world religions. Such a conflict will not work out, however, in a similar period of extreme carnage and blood; it will be fought largely with mental weapons and in the world of thought; it will involve also the emotional realm, from the standpoint of idealistic fanaticism. This inherent fanaticism (found ever in reactionary groups) will fight against the appearance of the coming world religion and the spread of esotericism. For this struggle certain of the well-organised churches, through their conservative elements (their most powerful elements), are already girding themselves. Those sensitive to the new spiritual impacts are still far from powerful; that which is new always faces the supreme difficulty of superseding and overcoming that which is old and established. Fanaticism, entrenched theological positions, and materialistic selfishness are to be found actively organised in the churches in all continents and of all denominations. They can be expected to fight for their established ecclesiastical order, their material profit and their temporal rule, and already are making the needed preparations.

The coming struggle will emerge within the churches themselves; it will also be precipitated by the enlightened elements who exist in fair numbers already, and are rapidly growing in strength through the impact of human necessity. The fight will then spread to thinking men everywhere who_ in a protesting revolt_ have denied orthodox churchianity and theology. They are not irreligious but have, through pain and sorrow, learned (without ecclesiastical help) that the spiritual values are the only values which can salvage humanity, that the Hierarchy stands, and that the Lord of Love _ as the symbol of peace and the Leader of the Forces of Light_ is not a negligible force but one that is evoking response from the hearts of men everywhere. True religion will come to be interpreted in terms of the will-to-good and its practical expression, goodwill. The coming world conferences and the international councils will give indication of the strength of this new spiritual response (on the part of humanity) to the overshadowing spiritual Potencies awaiting the invocative cry of mankind. When that cry arises, these divine energies will precipitate themselves into the realm of human thinking and planning. Men will then find themselves gifted with renewed strength and with the needed insight which will enable them to drive out the entrenched materialistic forces and the power of selfish interests_ banded together to prevent human freedom. If the conferences to be held in the near future demonstrate that mankind is truly striving to bring about right human relations, the forces of evil can then be driven back; the Forces of Light will then take control.

The problem facing the Hierarchy is how to further these desirable ends without infringing on human freedom of thought and action. It is with this problem that the great Council of the spiritual realm, of the Kingdom of God, is dealing at this time, and it will provide the subject of Their discussions and final decision until the middle of June. When the sun begins to move southward again, Their decisions will have been made on the basis of human demand. Humanity will by then have indicated the strength and nature of its goodwill; it will have sounded the "word of invocation"_ reaching up into the spiritual realm like a breathing forth of the very soul of humanity; it will have expressed a measure of its willingness to sacrifice in order to stabilise human living, and to rid the world of separativeness and of the abuses which culminated in this conflict; it will at least have set the stage for the blueprinting and planning which the Cycle of Conferences and Councils will undertake. On the side of the Hierarchy and in response to human demand (in degree and in kind, according to the quality of the demand), the Hierarchy will play its part and aid in making possible that which men dream, vision, and for which they plan today.

Let us consider for a minute what the Hierarchy stands ready to do and what its Members will plan and formulate during the Easter Festival this month, during the Wesak Festival in April, and during the Festival of the Lord of Love at the end of May. It might be said that the Hierarchy, in conjunction with the great Council of the Will of God at Shamballa, will divide

Their work into three parts, each governing three phases of the coming restoration of humanity to civilised and cultured living on a new and higher turn of the spiral.

They will deal with the problem of spiritual freedom, as it embodies itself in the Four Freedoms, and with

the problem of right human relations, as it will express itself through international relations, national parties and general human affairs. It is not for us to tell you what humanity, through its statesmen and leaders, will plan to do at the coming conferences. It is our task to mobilise the New Group of World Servers and the men of goodwill so that they may stand as a great "army of implacable spiritual will" behind the participants in these conferences and councils, enabling them to think with clarity about the issues involved and thus (through this clear thinking) affect telepathically the minds of men; this involves the use of a power seldom employed as yet on the side of righteous endeavour, though already widely used by the materialistic leaders of the forces of evil.

It is the task of the Hierarchy to find and reach the enlightened men and women in all the churches, all the political parties, all the organisations_ social, economic, and educational_ so that their united purpose will be clear. This They will do through the medium of Their active, working noos in the world. Thus They will pave the way for the true freedom of mankind_ a freedom which is as yet a dream and a hope in even the most democratic countries.

But behind all this activity, watched over by the spiritual Guides of the race but determined and implemented by humanity itself, will be found the focussed attention of the Hierarchy. This spiritual tension which exists among Them is far more potent than any of you suspect; it is part of Their preparatory work to make available certain spiritual forces and powers which_ though complementary or supplementary to the self-initiated effort of mankind_ will make that effort successful. What humanity has now to do, and is already doing to a certain degree, is to arrive at a right orientation as regards human affairs. Let us therefore look at the three phases of this preparatory work now going on, and endeavour to gauge what will be the results if these energies and potencies are released through the invocative demand of men.

The Forces of Restoration

There is first of all the phase, now in progress, which will culminate at the time of the Easter Full Moon. This is dedicated to planning for an inflow of the Forces of Restoration. Do not misunderstand these words. The Hierarchy is not occupied with the restoration of the old order, with the state of life prior to the conflict, or with the renewal of the theologies (religious, political and social) which have governed the past and which have been largely responsible for the conflict. The restoration referred to is psychological in nature, but will work out in the restoration of the will-to-live and the will-to-good. It will consequently be foundational, and will guarantee the new civilisation and culture. This is a very different matter.

These Forces of Restoration are concerned with human vision, human integrity and human relations as they underlie the entire problem of the brother/sisterhood of man. These energies, if released upon the Earth, will render futile the efforts of the old order (in politics, religion and education) to restore what was and to bring back that which existed prior to the conflict. They will endeavour to offset two tendencies which will have to be taken into momentous consideration during the coming cycle of conferences:

a. The tendency to crystallise, to cherish that which has gone (and gone forever, let us hope) and to over-estimate that which is old, worn-out and, if we may use the word, stagnant.

b. The tendency to over-fatigue and to complete collapse_ once the conflict is over. This tendency is due to the weight of the conflict and to the physical and psychological strain under which mankind has laboured for so many years.

Great danger to the future of the race lies in these two tendencies; the Hierarchy is determined to offset them as far as possible, whilst the forces of evil are eagerly trying to foster and nurture them. They are also dangers which the intelligent leaders of the race equally recognise. This recognition will make them slow in arriving at final decisions, because they will realise the need for a cycle of restoration before final and lasting decisions are made. They will therefore work for a slower moving forward and for a more careful and even prolonged investigation of the situation and of future possibilities than may seem desirable to the impatient.

These new and living restorative forces are under the direction and the control of One Whom we might call (speaking symbolically, yet factually) the Spirit of Resurrection. It is this living spiritual Entity, working temporarily under the direction of the Lord of Love, Who will restore livingness to men's spiritual aims and life to their planning; Who will engender anew the vitality needed to implement the trends of the New Age and Who will guide humanity out of the dark cave of death, isolation and selfishness into the light of the new day. It is this resurrection life which will be poured into humanity at Easter time this year, to some degree, but which_ during the next three Easter periods_ can be poured in in full measure, if the men of goodwill will think clearly, speak forcefully, demand spiritually and implement the inner plans with intelligence.

On a planetary scale, and not just in reference to mankind, this Spirit of Resurrection is the opponent and the antagonist of the Spirit of Death. Physical death takes place only when the psychological and mental vitality of the individual, of a nation, or of humanity drops below a certain level. Humanity has been responding to the processes of dying during the last 150 years; psychologically, mankind has been ruled by selfishness, and selfishness is the potent seed of death_ material death, psychological death and mental death. This is seen well demonstrated in the German nation. Think this statement out, and then recognise that similar seeds and similar areas of death (though to a lesser degree) exist in every nation_ even in the younger nations of the world. Hence the conflict; hence the destruction of all the outer garments of civilisation.

But the work of the Angel of Death, awful as it may seem as it demonstrates today on a planetary scale_ but beneficent as we know it to be in intent and in purpose_ will give place to that of the Spirit of Resurrection.

It is the planning of this restoration and this resurrection activity which is now under consideration by the Hierarchy, having been handed over to Them because They are closer to m-w-c than are Those Who function in the Council Chamber at Shamballa. It must be remembered that this Spirit of Resurrection is a Member of that Council and Their chosen Emissary. He (if one may be permitted to personalise the impersonal) is in truth the "Sun of Righteousness" Who can now arise "with healing in His wings"; Who can carry this life-giving energy which counteracts death, this vision which gives incentive to life, and this hope which can restore all nations. At the Full Moon of March, let the demand go out for the appearance of this life-giving Spirit. Let it go forth with such intensity that the Hierarchy will be called into active response and will immediately release the potency of this Spirit into the hearts of men everywhere.

All of these spiritual forces, working as they are at this time under the direction of the Leader of the Forces of Light, the Lord of Love and Sacrifice, are closely related and their activity is most intimately synchronised. In a deeply psyientific sense, they are all working together, because in the human family there are those who are at every stage of responsiveness. This triple work of the Hierarchy, therefore, proceeds simultaneously_ from the standpoint of time. The Forces of Restoration are_ on a small scale_ evoking response from the members of the New Group of World Servers and from noos everywhere. As their psychological "morale" stiffens and their will-to-live and their will-to-good is strengthened, an immediate effect will be felt on a larger scale; the work of the Spirit of Resurrection will intensify, and is already making its presence felt. More and more people are beginning to be forward-looking and to hope with greater conviction and courage for a better world set-up; their hitherto wishful thinking and their emotional desire are slowly giving place to a more practical attitude; their clear thinking and their fixed determination are far more active and their plans better laid because both their thinking and their planning are today based on facts; they are also beginning to recognise those factors and conditions which must not be restored, and this is a point of major importance.

At the stage which we are now passing through, these responsive people fall into three categories:

The visionary dreamer or the well-intentioned but impractical person whose ideas and world plans and suggestions as to the new world order litter the desks of world leaders and of
those groups and organisations who are attempting practically to blueprint the future. Their dreams and ideas deal with projects for which the world of today is not ready and will not be ready for several thousand years
It is an easy thing for them to present impossible Utopias which have not the faintest relation to things which are needed today and which could be made possible. The name of these people is legion, and at this time they constitute a definite hindrance. A vision of the impossible is not the type of vision which will keep the people from perishing. Because of an inability to compromise and to face up to things as they are, these people and those whom they influence are landed in despair and disillusionment.

3. The intelligent people of the world who are actuated by the spirit of goodwill and by the conviction that things must be changed. They are often staggered by the magnitude of the task to be undertaken, and this frequently leads them to take one of three positions:

a. They fall into the depths of pessimism. It is a pessimism based on a real ability to sense the scope of the problem and to assess the resources available. This may land them in non-activity.

b. They may leave the settling of the problem to the trained statesmen, diplomats and politicians, standing ready to help when_ but only when_ decision has been made. This leads to a shifting of responsibility. Yet, because the conflict involved the people of all lands and masses of population, so must the reconstruction of the world.

c. They may assume responsibility, ventilate the abuses which must be put right, discuss proposed plans and, from their particular angle of vision, set to work to bring about, to the best of their ability, right human relations. This attitude of responsibility and consequent activity may lead to mistakes, but in the aggregate of the endeavour it will meet the demand for right action in an emergency_ this time a world emergency.

4. Those partisan and nationally minded persons who will attempt to exploit the world situation for their own immediate ends and for the benefiting of their particular nation or group. These people, and they are found in every nation, are selfishly motivated; they do not care for humanity as a whole and have no liking or interest in anything or anyone but their political party and the reactionary interests of some national group. They see in the present world situation a grand opportunity to engineer moves which will benefit an individual, a class or a nation. In doing this, they frequently have a wide grasp of affairs and are keen politicians, but all they know is to be used and so implemented that it attains their narrow ends, no matter at what cost to the rest of the world. These people are usually a large majority. Their attitude leads inevitably to trouble and hinders the work of restoration; it handicaps those who are seeking to establish the entire human family in a sounder way of life than heretofore, and to give a saner and wiser motivation to international relationships. These are the people who are the most to be feared at the coming conference at San Francisco. The isolationists in all nations, particularly in the United States, French national idealism, and the obsession of certain factors in the Polish race over boundaries will need watching, as these attitudes can be exploited by the evil and selfish interests which (behind the scenes) are seeking to prevent the world attaining that equilibrium which will permit tranquillity. These three groups, however, indicate the successful operation of the Forces of Restoration. These are tentatively beginning their work and preparing the way for a much fuller expression of the intentions of the Spirit of Resurrection, after the coming Full Moon of March and in the three years which lie ahead.

The Forces of Enlightenment

A realisation of the need of humanity, and a careful appraisal of that which must be done to meet that need, have awakened the men of goodwill to responsiveness to the Forces of Restoration; this has led to an insistent demand that the second phase of the hierarchial work be set in motion. This phase is directed towards those activities and the development of that invocative spirit which will bring the Forces of Enlightenment into contact with humanity and lead to activity on their part. These forces can function fully and until 1949 hold sway over the minds of men, if the people of the world can be organised to stand with massed intent behind that type of statesmanship which is seeking the greatest good of the greatest number, which sees the world as one great interdependent whole, and which refuses to be sidetracked by the clamouring of the selfish little minds or by the demands of the reactionary forces to be found in all lands.

These Forces of Enlightenment are always present on Earth on a small scale, influencing the minds of the New Group of World Servers, the selfless workers for humanity, and the thinkers in every school of thought, working in every field of human betterment; they work upon and through all who truly love their fellowm-w-c. They are unable to influence the minds of the closed egocentric person; they can do little with the separative isolationist; they are ineffectual where the theologian of all groups_ political, religious or social_ is concerned, and they can do little with the type of mind that is concentrated upon personal or group problems (their group, expressing their ideas and working their way) and who fail to see themselves or the group in relation to the whole of humanity.

Today, however, a community of suffering and a general recognition that the causes of conflict are to be found in selfishness and in inherent cruelty has greatly widened people's approach to reality and to possibility, as they exist today. Churchmen, statesmen and leaders of important world groups are admitting the failure of their church, or their legislative bodies, or their policies to bring about world order and world tranquillity. They are seeking earnestly for new ways in government, new modes of suitable living, and for a method whereby right human relations can be established. They present a field of expression to the Forces of Enlightenment and offer Them opportunity to change the ways of human thinking; they are being mobilised by the light-bearing energies upon the planet so that wisdom, understanding and skill in action may distinguish the activities of men in the immediate future.

The organiser of these Forces at this time is the Illumined One . He is the symbol of enlightenment or of illumination. Countless millions down the ages have recognised Him as a Light-bearer from on high. His Four Noble Truths exposed the causes of human trouble and pointed to the cure. His message can be paraphrased in the following words: Cease to identify yourselves with material things; gain a proper sense of the spiritual values; cease regarding possessions and earthly existence as of major importance; follow the Noble Eight-fold Path which is the path of right relations_ right relations to God and to each other_ and thus be happy. The steps on this Path are:

Right Values Right Aspiration

Right Speech Right Conduct

Right Mode of Living Right Effort

Right Thinking Right Rapture or true Happiness

His ancient message is as new today as it was when He spoke His words on earth; a recognition of its truth and value is desperately needed, and the following of the "eight right ways of living" will enable humanity to find liberation. It is on the foundation of His teaching that the Lord of Love raised the superstructure of the brother/sisterhood of man to form an expression of the Love of God. Today, as it views the crumbling, devastated world, mankind has a fresh opportunity to reject selfish, materialistic motives and philosophy and to begin those processes which will_ steadily and gradually_ bring about its liberation. It will then be possible for men to tread the Lighted Way which leads back to the divine Source of light and love.

The Illumined One could point to the goal and indicate the Way because He had achieved full enlightenment; the Lord of Love gave us an example of One Who has reached the same goal; the Lord of Wisdom left the world after reaching illumination; the Lord of Love returned to us, proclaiming Himself as the Light of the World, and showed us how we too could learn to tread the Lighted Way.

The Lord of Wisdom, the Illumined One, Whose Festival is held ever at the Full Moon of May (or of Taurus, falling this year during the last week in April), acts today as the agent of that great Life in Whom we live and move and have our being, Who is Himself the true Light of the World and the planetary Enlightener. We refer to the Ancient of Days (as He is called in the Old Testament), to the God of Love, to Sanat Kumara, the Eternal Youth, the One Who holds all men in life and Who is carrying His whole creation along the path of evolution to its consummation_ a consummation of which we have not as yet the faintest idea. Year after year, ever since the Illumined One achieved His goal of illumination, an effort has been made to increase the flow of enlightenment into the world and to throw the light of wisdom, experience and understanding (as it is called) into the minds of men. At each Full Moon of May this has been the effort of the spiritual Forces which are working out the Will of God. A supreme effort will be made by Them this year, during the five days of the Full Moon (April 25-30), and a major test of the effectiveness of Their activity will be given at the San Francisco Conference. This we would ask you to remember, and for this we beg you to mobilise.

A great Triangle of Force will be called into play during those five days as the nucleus through which the Forces of Enlightenment will work. The three Lives controlling the energy which it is hoped can be released for the illumining of men's-women’s-children’s minds are:

1. The Lord of the World, the Light of Life Itself.

2. The Illumined One, the Lord of Wisdom, bringing spiritual light to the Hierarchy and revealing what is the divine purpose.

3. The Prince of Peace, the Lord of Love, presenting the demand of humanity and acting as the distributing Agent for the Forces of Enlightenment.

The Forces of Light, upon the physical plane, have driven the forces of evil and of darkness backward, and are bringing the conflict to an end through the defeat of the Axis Nations.

But another great "division" of those Forces (if we may symbolically use a military term) is being mobilised and can be brought into active service at the Full Moon of May (Taurus) if the demand is strong enough, is mentally powerful and adequately focussed. These Forces work entirely upon the level of the mind and with the minds of men; it is their task to bring the battle between the Forces of Light and the Forces of Darkness to an end_ not only physically, but through the inauguration of an era of right thinking. This will end the present cycle of emotional distress, of agony, of glamour and illusion, and of materialistic desires which today form the pattern of men's lives. This has to be done by means of the spiritual will, working as enlightenment upon the mental plane and demonstrating as wisdom, and as skill in action, motivated by loving understanding. These three aspects of light_ mental enlightenment, the illumination which wisdom confers, and loving understanding_ all find their perfect expression in the Lord of the World (Whom the orthodox call God) and in His reflections, the Illumined One and the Lord of Love_ the One Who brought Illumination to the world and the Other Who demonstrated the actuality of the Love of God. These three great expressions of divinity (One so divine that we can only know Him through His representatives) can be called into a new and most potent activity through right invocation at the time of the Full Moon of May. Those who can carry out this great act of invocation are the spiritually minded people everywhere, the enlightened statesmen, the religious leaders, and the men of goodwill, if they can stand with massed intent, particularly throughout the entire month of April. Their assistance can also be invoked by the dire need of men, women and children everywhere who can voice no cry, for they know not where to turn, but whose appeal is heard and noted. Their work, however, must be focussed through and implemented by the world intelligentsia, by leading "lovers of humanity," working in the various organisations and groups dedicated to human betterment, and by representative unselfish people. It is they who must receive the inflow of "lighted wisdom" and of loving understanding; today this can be made possible in a manner never known before. The success of the effort now being spiritually planned is dependent upon the ability of mankind to use the light they already have, in order to establish right relations in their families, in their communities, in their nation and in the world.

This matter of being in a position to receive, and then be the agents of, enlightenment is an intensely practical matter. It is hoped that the response will be so real that it will constitute a great and uniform activity which will leave no single thinking person untouched, which will put the responsibility of establishing right human relations upon the shoulders of the men of goodwill , and not on the shoulders of the unthinking, undeveloped and suffering masses. This is a major point to bear in mind. If the thinking and executive people of the world can have their minds "illumined" by the spirit of wisdom and understanding, they can act as distributors of that light through enlightened planning and legislation, and thus affect the entire world. This is the immediate opportunity ahead, and when we say "immediate" we refer to the coming five days of the Wesak Festival. This should have a pronounced effect upon the San Francisco Conference. We also refer to the next five years, with their five Wesak Festivals on five May Full Moons.

This year will mark a climaxing effort in the long relation of the Illumined One to humanity. Year by year, since He left the earth, He has come back to humanity, bringing light and blessing. Year by year, He has released this light and has presented opportunity to the Forces of Enlightenment to strengthen Their hold upon the minds of men. The success of Their effort has been so great that it has led to the crescendo of knowledge, to the glory of modern science and to the widespread education which has distinguished the past five hundred years. Knowledge is the hallmark of our civilisation; it has often been knowledge misapplied and dedicated to the selfishness of men, but it has been an impersonal thing personally applied; this must end. Now another phase of that light can begin to demonstrate as the result of the past, and that is Wisdom. Wisdom is the enlightened application of knowledge, through love, to the affairs of men. It is understanding, pouring out everywhere as the result of experience.

We call you, therefore, everyone, to a great service of demand and of invocation on behalf of humanity_ a demand for the inflow of light upon the decisions of men. We would ask you to request and expect the needed enlightenment for those who have to make decision on behalf of men everywhere. Your individual enlightenment has nothing to do with this demand. It is a selfless motive which is required and which must lie behind your individual and group demand. You are demanding enlightenment and illumined perception for those who have to guide the destiny of races, nations and world groups. On their shoulders lies the responsibility to take wise action, based on world understanding, in the interests of international cooperation, and in the establishment of right human relations.

Throughout the month of April, until May first, the realisation of this is a major duty. To the support of the Forces of Enlightenment we call all today. As individuals, you must work for an open and receptive mind, free from prejudice or national bias; as individuals, you need to think in broader terms and of the one world and the one humanity. The mass of right-thinking and convinced demand which you, who seek to serve the Lord of Love, can throw behind the men legislating for the world, can bring great results and can release the Forces of Enlightenment in a new and potent manner.

Concentration upon the work to be done is of such importance and will call for such practical activities that we will write no more at this time. We desire to keep the immediate issue clear. We will deal later with the Forces of Reconstruction. We would like to close this message with some words which we wrote many years ago. They express the needed attitude and orientation:

"We ask you to drop your antagonisms and your antipathies, your hatreds and your racial differences, and attempt to think in terms of the one family, the one Life and the one humanity."

&&&&&&&

AN EASTER MESSAGE

Easter Day 1945

On this day, we recall to our minds the fact of Resurrection_ a universal and eternally recurring resurrection. We would like to talk with you anent the Lord of Love, about His work as head of the Hierarchy, and about the rebuilding which humanity must undertake and which the Hierarchy is seeking to impulse at this time. A great period of reconstruction is planned. Here are the two words around which we wish to create our theme: Resurrection and Reconstruction. It will be a reconstruction implemented by Those Who know the meaning of resurrection, and it will involve a resurrection of humanity through the medium of its intelligentsia and men of goodwill . These two groups (the Hierarchy and Humanity) will need to be brought into a closer rapport, and this is entirely possible if the followers of the Lord of Love realise their opportunity and shoulder their responsibilities. We would point out that when we use the phrase "followers of the Lord of Love" we refer to all those who love their fellowmen, irrespective of creed or religion. Only upon this basic premise can a hopeful future be founded.

We do not care whether or not those who read our words accept the psyientific teaching of a spiritual and planetary Hierarchy over which the Lord of Love presides, or whether they think in terms of the Prince of Peace and His noos. The essential recognition for which we plead is that this great group of spiritual Individuals, Who receive so general a recognition throughout the world and in all the great religions, should be regarded as active. The Christian view of the Lord of Love is built upon that which He enacted for us two thousand years ago and through which He symbolically indicated to us the way which all aspirants must go. It portrays a picture of a waiting, quiescent Lord of Love, living in some vague and far away heaven, "resting on His laurels" and practically doing nothing very much until such time as the sons/daughters of men of every race and creed acclaim Him as Saviour; this they must do both as individuals and as representing the organised Christian Church. It is a picture of a listening, observing Lord of Love, animated by pity and compassion, but Who has done all He could and now waits for us to do our part; it is also a picture of One Who waits to see what humanity, as a whole, will accept theologically. In the mind of the narrow, fundamentalist theologian, the Lord of Love is seen as presiding over a peaceful place called Heaven, into which the elect are welcomed; He is also seen as consigning all who remain aware of their own spiritual integrity and responsibility, who refuse to be gathered into organised churches or who go idly or wickedly through life, to some vague place of eternal punishment. To this vast multitude (probably the majority) His love and compassion apparently do not reach, and His heart remains untouched. It appears that He cares not whether they suffer eternally or attain complete annihilation.

This surely cannot be so. None of these pictures is accurate or adequate; they are not true in any sense of the word. This is being realised by the more intelligent of the world thinkers, and from the time of this Full Moon of June (Gemini, celebrated this year the last week of May) a different message must be sent out by the churches of Christiandom, if they are to meet the need of mankind and so aid in the work of reconstruction which lies ahead. They cannot stop this work, but the churches could be ignored if an inability to think with clarity is shown and if they are not freed from theological narrowness.

Resurrection is the keynote of nature; death is not. Death is only the ante-chamber of resurrection. Resurrection is the clue to the world of meaning, and is the fundamental theme of all the world religions_ past, present and the future. Resurrection of the spirit in man-woman-child, in all forms, in all kingdoms, is the objective of the entire evolutionary process and this involves liberation from materialism and selfishness. In that resurrection, evolution and death are only preparatory and familiar stages. The note and message sounded by the Lord of Love when last on Earth was resurrection, but so morbid has been mankind and so enveloped in glamour and illusion, that His death has been permitted to sidestep understanding; consequently, for centuries, the emphasis has been laid upon death, and only on Easter Day or in the cemeteries is the resurrection acclaimed. This must change. It is not helpful to a progressive understanding of the eternal verities to have this condition perpetuated. The Hierarchy is today dedicated to bringing about this change and thus altering the approach of mankind to the world of the unseen and to the spiritual realities.

Before, however, They could do anything, our present civilisation had to die. During the coming century, the meaning of the resurrection will be unfolded and the new age will reveal its true significance. The first step will be the emergence of humanity from the death of its civilisation, of its old ideas and modes of living, the relinquishing of its materialistic goals and its damning selfishness, and its moving into the clear light of the resurrection life. We are not here speaking in symbolical or mystical terms. We are dealing with facts_ facts as real and as imminent as the coming Cycle of Conferences, and facts for which the past two hundred years have prepared humanity. This preparation has culminated in the restlessness of the twentieth century and has led to the horror of this world conflict, 1914-1945 through which we have been passing.

The true work of The Cycle of Conferences about which we wrote earlier will only be inaugurated at San Francisco. There the stage will be set for those processes which will usher in an era of relative tranquillity; thus the door of the dark cave of materialism will be opened and the stone rolled from the door of the sepulchre which has too long entombed mankind. Then will follow those steps which will lead to a new and better life and which will indicate the expression of the spirit of resurrection. These facts (so near to manifestation) are physical facts; they will demonstrate as such if the noos of the world recognise what it is that the Lord of Love desires, and if the men of goodwill implement their response to His wishes.

Speaking symbolically, the first step after the advent of the spirit of the resurrection will be similar to that in the Biblical story. Mary, that woman of sorrow, of experience and of aspiration, stands (as ever in the symbolism of the world) as the symbol of materialism. Humanity must say with her, "They have taken away my Lord and we know not where they have laid Him." But_ she said it to the Lord Himself, not recognising Him and realising only her own deep need and despair. So must it be again. Humanity_ materialistic, suffering, facing the future with despair and agony, but still aspiring_ must go forth from the cave of matter, seeking the Lord of Love and at first not recognising Him or the work that He is attempting to do. The churches_ materialisticw hide-bound and submerged in their theological concepts, seeking political power or possessions, emphasising stone buildings and cathedrals whilst neglecting "the Temple of God, not made with hands, eternal in the heavens"_ are occupied with the symbols and not with the reality. Now they must learn to recognise that the Lord is not with them and they too must go forth, as Mary did, and seek Him anew. If they will do so, they will surely find Him and again become His messengers.

The fact of the resurrection will be demonstrated during the next few centuries, and the Living Lord of Love, Sacrifice and Peace will walk among men-women and lead them onward towards the Mount of Ascension. The Pentecost will become truth. All men will come under the tide of inspiration from on high, and though they may speak with many tongues, they will all understand each other.

What we have to say to you, we intend to divide into two parts:

The Work of the Lord of Love Today

The Coming Work of Reconstruction

These two convey the same basic ideas and thus complement each other. They proclaim the fact that all that truly concerns us is that which takes place upon Earth in line with the "blueprints" which guide the work of the Lord of Love. (When we use the phrase "concerns us" we refer to man's physical, emotional and mental reactions.) They proclaim the fact that every state of consciousness is anchored within humanity and that all are factual here and now, did men but know it. They proclaim also the truth that the Lord of Love has never left us for a distant heaven of nebulous outlines, but that He is ever within our reach. They proclaim also the fact that His interest, His arduous labours on our behalf and the activities of His working noos, the Masters of the Wisdom and the Lords of Compassion, are with us, here and now. They proclaim that we are not alone, but that the Forces of Light and of Enlightenment are constantly working; that the strength and the wisdom of Those who know are being mobilised to aid mankind, and that nothing can now arrest or prevent the contact between that intelligent aspiring centre, called humanity, and the inner spiritual group, the Hierarchy.

The Work of the Lord of Love Today

Forget not one important point. The Hierarchy itself is the result of human activity and aspiration; it has been created by humanity. Its members are human beings who have lived, suffered, achieved, failed, attained success, endured death and passed through the experience of resurrection. They are the same in nature as are those who struggle today with the processes of disintegration but who_ nevertheless_ have in them the seed of resurrection. All states of consciousness are known to Them and They have mastered all of them; They have mastered them as men, thus guaranteeing to humanity the same ultimate achievement. We are apt to look upon the members of the Hierarchy as different radically from humanity, forgetting that the Hierarchy is a community of successful men, Who earlier submitted Themselves to the purificatory fires of daily living, working out their own salvation as men and women of affairs, as business men, as husbands and wives, farmers and rulers and that they know life, therefore, in all its phases and gradation. They have surmounted the experiences of life; Their great Master is the Lord of Love; They have passed through the initiations of the new birth, the baptism, the transfiguration, the final crucifixion and the resurrection. But they still are men and differ from the Lord of Love only in the fact that He , the first of our humanity to attain divinity, the Eldest in a great family of Brothers / Sisters (as St. Paul expresses it), the Master of the Masters and the Teacher of angels and of men was deemed so pure, so holy and so enlightened that He was permitted to embody for us the great cosmic principle of love; He thus revealed to us, for the first time, the nature of the heart of God.

These perfected men, therefore, exist; They are more than men because the divine spirit in them registers all stages of consciousness and awareness_ subhuman, human and superhuman. This inclusive development enables them to work with men, to contact humanity at need, and to know how to lead us forward to the phases of resurrection.

There is no need for us to enlarge at this point upon the world that They are attempting to aid and to salvage. The state of humanity today is known to all truly thinking people. Devastation, crucifixion, slaughter and death are widespread; sorrow, pain, disillusionment and pessimism are conditioning the thinking and the reactions of millions, whilst the plight of the unthinking but helpless masses has reached an inconceivable height of misery. The ignorance, lack of understanding, and selfishness of men everywhere, particularly in the countries which have escaped the ravages of conflict, aggravate the situation. Nevertheless with serenity and confidence, the Hierarchy today faces its arduous task.

One aspect of Their work and attitude we would like to touch upon, for it is apt to cause misunderstanding among those with narrow vision and (if we may describe them) with constricted, though loving, hearts. We refer to the attitude taken by the Hierarchy during the past years of conflict. This attitude has caused some to find in it cause for criticism. Let us be explicit and also bring in the time equation. We can well do so, because it was through our writings that the position of the Hierarchy was affirmed and publicly stated.

In 1932, we wrote a series of pamphlets which were intended to mobilise the noos of the world under the name of the New Group of World Servers and to arouse the men of goodwill in a final effort to awaken humanity to the need for change. We endeavoured to institute a worldwide house cleaning and to incite men to take the steps which were needed to avert conflict_ a conflict which the Hierarchy saw coming closer, day by day. In a way unrealised and undreamt of by the average man-woman-child, the Forces of Evil were in a most potent manner emerging from their ancient lair; they were intent upon seeking those whom they could mould and obsess, and thus hurry mankind towards disaster. They found minds responsive to their evil promptings in every country; they found also that it was possible to take possession of two countries, Japan and Germany and_ to a very much less extent_ of Italy.

The Hierarchy, foreseeing this, attempted to offset their efforts. They made appeal to the spiritually minded people of the world; Their appeal reached millions and culminated in May, 1936, in a planetary effort wherein the Great Invocation was used upon a large scale in most of the countries of the world. For another three years Their labour of love continued; They struggled to save humanity and to arouse men to their imminent peril; They endeavoured to arrest the selfishness of humanity and to produce a new and fresh orientation to the spiritual values, and thus avert conflict. They failed. The men of goodwill and the spiritually minded people could not appreciate the true nature of the impending danger. Some recognised it and did their utmost; a few worked hard, trusting to the wisdom of those who knew and asked their aid; most of them were disturbed and worried, but none of them appreciated properly the double danger with which humanity was faced: the danger arising out of human selfishness and greed, plus the danger which was nearing the Earth through the agency of the combined forces of evil. These forces were organised by beings of most evil and expert experience and were preparing to obsess and ultimately possess the negative German people, ruled by a group of men of such positive selfishness and aggressive materialistic spirit that they could easily become the agents of the subjective evil forces.

In September, 1939, supreme wickedness broke loose upon earth. Because the Hierarchy could not and would not infringe upon human free will, the evil which humanity itself had engendered manifested itself, and that to which certain nations and certain individuals had responded appeared, and thus World Conflict II started. Rampant evil took possession of the earth through the medium of the Axis nations. The Germans marched into Poland. This country was the recipient of the first impact because of her national selfishness, her suppression of the lower classes, her exaltation of a Fascist-minded aristocracy and her hatred of the Jews. The United Nations then began slowly to organise under the impression of the Forces of Light. The conflict was on.

What, under these circumstances was the Hierarchy to do? Full opportunity had been given to humanity to arrest the descent of evil into manifestation. Voices of leaders and humanitarians everywhere were proclaiming the need for reform. On which side should the Hierarchy throw its weight and its influence? Should it take sides at all, or should it be neutral? Should it remain aloof and take the position of the onlooker, the observer? Should it stand superior to the deeds of mankind and await the decision of the battle to be fought? Should it conform to the sentimental ideas of the church-trained public and talk "Peace, peace" when there was no peace, and present a negative aspect of love-to-all-peoples whilst hatred strode rampant over the earth?

It must be remembered that if this conflict had resembled other conflicts down the centuries, and had simply been a fight between human groups and nations, the Hierarchy would have remained outside the conflict and left mankind to fight a conclusive victory on the merits of its fighting units. But this time a great deal more was involved and this the Hierarchy knew. This conflict has not only been an aggressive conflict between nations or of hate between the exponents of differing ideologies but something far more serious. The Hierarchy knew that extremely powerful forces were taking advantage of human stupidity to intrude into world affairs, and that potent groups of evil beings were organised to exploit the existing world situation. They knew also that the combination of ancient evil with men's selfishness would inevitably prove too strong for even the United Nations, if they were left unassisted to meet the Axis Powers and the Lords of Evil emerging from their hiding place. So the Hierarchy took its stand upon the side of the United Nations and let it be known that it had done so. In doing this, definite physical steps were taken to aid the Forces of Light; men and leaders were carefully chosen and picked noos were placed in positions of power and of authority. The leaders of the United Nations and of their armies are not Godless men, as are the leaders of the Axis Powers; they are men of rectitude and of spiritual and humanitarian purpose and are able thus to work_ consciously or unconsciously_ under the inspiration of the Hierarchy. This has been amply demonstrated. On account of this decision of the Hierarchy, the Lord of Love became automatically the Leader of these Forces.

His work has been greatly hindered by the sweet sentimentality of the unthinking Christian and by the well-meaning, but oft unintelligent, pacifist. Both these groups would sacrifice the future of humanity to temporary methods of "being nice" or "being kind" or taking gentle measures. The forces of evil, stalking the world today, do not understand such measures. The cry of such people that "God loves all men" is true_ eternally and forever true. It is one of the unalterable facts of existence itself. God loves_ without distinction and irrespective of race or creed. To that Great Life naught matters but humanity and its perfecting, because upon humanity depends the salvation of all the kingdoms in nature. But this statement (made in time and space and as it concerns the form aspect and not the spirit in man-woman-child) is frequently misleading, and the simple-minded are apt to forget that the Lord of Love said, "He that is not with me is against me."

men fail also to realise the potency of the thought wielded by Those who work under and with the Lord of Love. Thought is pure divine energy, impersonal and_ like the sun_ it pours down upon the worthy and the unworthy, unless definitely and deliberately directed. The Hierarchy was therefore faced with the problem and the necessity of seeing that pure impersonal thought energy did not find its way into the ranks of those fighting human freedoms, for it stimulates the minds and the mental processes of the good and the bad alike. This danger They deliberately offset by directing Their thought to the forces fighting under the leaders of the United Nations and by openly taking Their stand upon the side of right human relations. They did not dare to do otherwise, for_ in their place and given circumstances_ the leaders of the forces of evil have proved themselves cleverer and more calculating than those fighting for human freedom. It is this distinction and its necessity that some kindly and well-intentioned but ignorant Christian thinkers often overlook.

The work of the Lord of Love in relation to the conflict has also been handicapped by the commercially minded in all nations, particularly in the neutral countries, who have profited by the conflict, as well as by "big business" interests in many lands. These are focussed at this time through certain monied groups in every powerful nation, particularly in the United States. He has been hindered also by those individuals who seek to exploit the plight of suffering humanity to their own financial advantage.

Therefore, when the conflict broke out and humanity chose to fight and the forces of evil were let loose upon our planet, the Hierarchy ceased its efforts to bring peace through goodwill and openly sided with those fighting to drive evil back whence it came, and to defeat the Axis nations. Because of this decision on Their part, unthinking people claim that the statements of those who represent the Hierarchy on earth have been contradictory and that the actions of the Hierarchy have not been compatible with their preconceived ideas of how love should be demonstrated. For the past five years, therefore, the efforts of the Lord of Love and of His followers, the Masters of the Wisdom, have been directed towards clarifying the true issues in the minds of men, towards indicating the lines along which right action should be taken, and towards unifying inter-allied policies. They have been occupied with banding together the men of goodwill throughout the world in preparation for the Cycle of Conferences and the coming world readjustments. They have sought to protect the sufferers, organising methods of relief, guiding the minds of army leaders, and arousing public opinion to take those steps which will eventually lead to right human relations. Temporarily, the German people and the Japanese have been left to their fate and to the tender mercies of the armies of evil; the present debacle in Germany is a testimony as to what evil can bring upon those who follow it. With all these modes of strengthening the Forces of Light and of extricating humanity from the descended evil, the Hierarchy has also been occupied with lines of activity which may not be disclosed, because they concern the handling of the subjective forces of evil. The potency of these forces will be realised if the length of time which the conflict has lasted is considered and also the fact that two nations have been able to withstand_ until the past few months_ an entire world of nations united against them.

This is a phenomenal fact in itself and a witness to the strength of the evil group_ objective and subjective_ which has sought to gain dominance over mankind. Had the Hierarchy not taken sides with the United Nations and thrown the power of its thought into the battle, victory might still be a long way off. Today it is well-nigh in our hands.

As we said elsewhere, it is a fallacy to believe, as some do, that the main trend of the Lord of Love 's work is through the medium of the churches or the world religions. He necessarily works through them when conditions permit and there is a living nucleus of true spirituality within them, or when their invocative appeal is potent enough to reach Him. He uses all possible channels whereby the consciousness of man-woman-child may be enlarged and right orientation may be brought about. It is, however, truer to say that it is as World Teacher that He consistently works, and that the churches are but one of the teaching avenues He employs. All that enlightens the minds of men, all propaganda that tends to bring about right human relations, all modes of acquiring real knowledge, all methods of transmuting knowledge into wisdom and understanding, all that expands the consciousness of humanity and of all subhuman states of awareness and sensitivity, all that dispels glamour and illusion and that disrupts crystallisation and disturbs all static conditions, come under the realistic activities of the department within the Hierarchy which He supervises. He is limited by the quality and the calibre of the invocative appeal of humanity and that, in its turn, is conditioned by the point in evolution attained.

In the Middle Ages of history, and earlier, it was the churches and the schools of philosophy which provided the major avenues for His activity, but it is not so today; this is a point which the churches and organised religion would do well to remember. There is now a shift of His emphasis and attention into two new fields of endeavour: first, into the field of world-wide education, and secondly, into the sphere of implementing intelligently those activities which come under the department of government in its three aspects of statesmanship, politics and legislature. The common people are today awakening to the importance and responsibility of government; it is therefore realised by the Hierarchy that before the cycle of true democracy (as it essentially exists and will eventually demonstrate) can come into being, the education of the masses in cooperative statesmanship, in economic stabilisation through right sharing, and in clean, political interplay is imperatively necessary. The long divorce between religion and politics must be ended, and this can now come about because of the high level of the human mass intelligence and the fact that science has made all men so close that what happens in some remote area of the earth's surface is a matter of general interest within a few minutes. Time and space are now negated.

The Coming Work of Reconstruction

We have referred to the coming Full Moon of June as "The Lord of Love's Unique Occasion. Just what is entailed in that statement we are not empowered to say, but we can cast some light upon one phase of it. It has long been a legend (and who shall say it is not a fact?) that at each Full Moon of June, the Lord of Love repeats and preaches again to the assembled world (to the hearts and minds of men) the last sermon of the Illumined One, thus linking the full enlightenment of the pre-Christian era and the wisdom of the Illumined One to the cycle of the distribution of the energy of love, for which the Lord of Love is responsible.

This year the message of the past and of the present will be augmented, enhanced and supplemented by the enunciating of the new note, word or theme which will distinguish the New Age and characterise the coming civilisation and culture. It will climax all the past and lay the seeds for the future. The significance of this statement lies in the fact that telepathically and with the entire force of the Hierarchy behind Him, plus the potency of Those to Whom is committed the expression of the Will of God (later to be implemented by the Hierarchy under the direction of the Lord of Love), the World Teacher will, in His Own right, make certain statements and use certain word-formulas which will create the nucleus of the thoughtform and present the blueprint around which and upon which the New Age will be developed. For this moment the thinking and the planning of the enlightened aspirants of the world have made_ consciously, but mostly unconsciously_ long preparation. They have, through their efforts, provided the mass of thought substance which the coming pronouncement will affect. The Prince of Peace will bring this into proper form for the creative activity of the New Group of World Servers working in every nation and in every religious, social, economic and political group.

The Lord of Love's pronouncement will be embodied in certain Stanzas, of which those already given are a small part. Only He can use these Words of Power in their proper manner, connotation and emphasis; only an inadequate paraphrase of certain sentences found in that pronouncement can be given to humanity, and this paraphrase can be used only when the conflict is over and not before. This means that they can be employed only when both Germany and Japan are under the complete control of the United Nations, through whom the Hierarchy has been working. This will not imply the attainment of complete peace, but it will mean the end of all aggressive fighting and all organised resistance, leading to a period of relative tranquillity.

Standing in His Own place at a central point in Asia, remote from the throngs and the impact of humanity, the Lord of Love will bless the world at the exact moment of the Full Moon of June. He will then repeat the Illumined One 's last words or sermon, as well as the Beatitudes which He uttered when on earth and which have been so inadequately and misleadingly translated_ a translation based upon the memory of what He said but not upon direct dictation. To these two messages, the Prince of Peace will add a new one, imbued with power for the future. That part of what He says in which it is possible for men to participate will be used for years to come in the place of the two Stanzas of the Great Invocation which have been used for nine years.

Behind the Prince of Peace, focussing with intensity today and preparing for a great act of spiritual cooperation at the time of the June Full Moon, stands the Hierarchy. Together with Him, They will invoke a group of spiritual Forces which (for lack of a better name) we will call the Forces of Reconstruction.

We would ask you to have clearly in your minds the three groups of spiritual energies which_ at the time of the three Full Moons of April, May and June_ will be released into activity and which will aid humanity in its major task of rebuilding the new and better world:

The Forces of Restoration. These will work to restore morale and psychological health, thus implementing the resurrection of humanity from the death cycle through which it has been passing. The restoration of men's mental condition to a wholesome and happier approach to life is the primary objective. These forces will bring about the emergence of the new civilisation_ which is definitely man-woman-child's creative work.

The Forces of Enlightenment. These, when let loose upon Earth, will produce a clear grasp of the Plan which the Hierarchy desires to see work out, a revelation of the issues involved in their right and possible sequence; and they will also give a sense of proportion to human thinking, plus an appreciation of the spiritual values which should determine the objective policies. These Forces will salvage the cultural gains of the past (a past which is dead and gone and of which little should again be restored) and will implement (upon the few foundational cultures of the past) that new and better culture which will be distinctive of the New Age.

The Forces of Reconstruction. These will usher in an era of pronounced creative activity and will bring about the rebuilding of the tangible world upon the new lines. This the total destruction of the old forms will necessitate. It is this great group of Forces which will be set in motion by the Lord of Love at the June Full Moon; the focus of Their work will definitely be upon the physical plane. Their task is to precipitate and bring into manifestation that which the work of the Forces of Restoration and of Enlightenment have made subjectively possible.

These Forces might be regarded as embodying and making declarative the "new materialism." This is a statement warranting our closest consideration. It is essential that we bear in mind, as we face the activities of the future process of rebuilding, that matter and substance and their fusion into living forms are aspects of divinity; it has been the prostitution of matter to selfish ends and for separative purposes which has been responsible for the misery, the suffering, the failure and the evil which have characterised the career of mankind down the ages and which precipitated this world conflict. Today humanity is being given a fresh opportunity to build again on sounder and more constructive lines that better civilisation which is the dream of those who love their fellowm-w-c, and to attain a new aptitude in handling substance. If men can demonstrate a gained wisdom in the creation of a form which will house the spirit of resurrection and express the enlightenment gained by the bitter experience of the past, then humanity will rise again.

The unique opportunity which confronts the Lord of Love as His great hour draws near is that of unifying, synthesising and integrating all these forces into one great and potent downpouring of spiritual energy. These energies involve the activities of the Spirit of Resurrection, the inspiration of the Illumined One as He this year conveys the strength of the One in Whom we live and move and have our being, and that which the Lord of Love Himself will set in motion in response to the invocative appeal of the New Group of World Servers, the men of goodwill and the "massed intent" of the inarticulate masses. It is essential that we try to grasp the unity of this hierarchical effort.

The energy which will lead to the restoration of human aspiration, right idealism and fixed humanitarian intention is that distributed by the Forces of Restoration which were set in motion this year, at the time of the Easter Full Moon, under the direction of the Masters of the Wisdom and the supervision of the Prince of Peace. They will concern themselves with the reorientation of the human psyche and with the inevitable consequences of that reorientation_ the acquiring of the vision which will bring about right human relations. This will be largely done by the spiritual people in the world, by aspirants, working noos and (where possible) through the spiritually minded people in the churches and humanitarian and esoteric groups.

The energy which will lead to intelligent activity and to correct mental planning we have called that of the Forces of Enlightenment; once these have been released, it becomes the responsibility of the New Group of World Servers to direct them. Then through the enlightened plans of the world intelligentsia and prominent humanitarians and raycial servers, it will be possible to establish those spiritual principles and that correct cooperative relationship which should distinguish human affairs in the future. Those who will be directly affected, if the plans go as desired, are the big educational systems, the world-wide propaganda institutions, and all those agencies which work to educate and direct public thinking and mould public opinion.

The energy which we have called the Forces of Reconstruction will be more general in their application, and they will affect the masses of men through the work of the men of goodwill . We have therefore outlined a planned distribution of the three great streams of divine energy which will be set in motion at the three current Full Moons_ one already past and two to come:

The energy of restoration, at the time of the April Full Moon

The energy of enlightenment, at the time of the Wesak or May Full Moon

The energy of reconstruction, at the time of the June Full Moon.

The inspiring sources of these spiritual agencies are, first of all, the Spirit of Resurrection (an extra-planetary Being), then the Lord of the World, working through the Illumined One, and finally the Lord of Love Himself. These Three will work through the Hierarchy, the New Group of World Servers, and the men of goodwill . Such is the general plan proposed by Those Who stand_ with enlightened spiritual purpose_ ready at this time to lead humanity out of darkness into light, from the unreal to the real, and from death to immortality. That most ancient of prayers comes today to have its deepest spiritual significance. Let us repeat it in the order in which today it gains meaning:

Lead us, O Lord, from death to Immortality;

From darkness to Light;

From the unreal to the Real.

The beauty of this synthesis and the wonder of this opportunity are surely apparent as we study what is here written and consider these aspects of the divine Plan. Great Forces, under potent spiritual leadership, are standing ready to precipitate Themselves into this human world of chaos, confusion, aspiration and bewilderment. These groups of energies are ready to focus and distribute themselves, and the Hierarchy is closer to mankind than ever before; the New Group of World Servers are also "standing attentive to direction" in every country in the world, united in their idealism, in their humanitarian objectives, in their sensitivity to spiritual impression, in their united subjective purpose, in their love of their fellowm-w-c, and in their dedication to selfless service; the men of goodwill are also to be found everywhere, ready to be guided into constructive activity, and to be the agents (gradually trained and educated) for the establishment of what has never yet truly existed_ right human relations.

Thus, from the highest spiritual Being upon our planet, through the graded spiritual groups of enlightened and perfected men who work upon the inner side of life, on into the outer world of daily living, where thinking, loving men and women serve, the tide of the new life sweeps. The Plan is ready for immediate application and intelligent implementing; the workers are there, and the power to work is adequate to the need. The three Full Moons which we have been considering are simply the three points in time through which the needed power is to be released.

Here, Brothers, is a picture of possibility. We seek to present it to you today because of world need; here is the ground for a sound, optimistic approach to the future; here is the assurance that the world can be rebuilt, that constructive action can be successfully taken, that enlightenment will increasingly make its presence obvious, and that humanity will indeed rise out of its unhappy past into a new world of understanding, of tranquillity, of cooperation and of renewed spiritual impulse.

It will not be easy. The spiritual energies which will be released will inevitably evoke opposition. Selfishness and hate, with their secondary effects of greed, cruelty and nationalism, are not dead nor will they die for a long time to come. In the post-conflict world these conditions must be ignored and the New Group of World Servers and the men of goodwill must work together for an enlightened education, for a cooperative economic life, for right human relations in all departments of human experience, for clean political activity, for disinterested service, and for a world religion which will restore the Lord of Love to His rightful place in the hearts of men, which will take the pomp, the materialism and the politics out of the churches, and which will unify the spiritual intention of all the religions to be found in both hemispheres. This is a vast programme, but the number of enlightened men and women is also very great, and the power at their disposal ensures the ultimate triumph of their spiritual idealism.

The major need is to bring these people into a much closer relationship, to take those steps which will enable them to realise that they are an integral part of a group of directed and intelligent world servers, and yet to leave them free to work in their own way, each in his/her own place and chosen field of service, and to see all these phases of the work as supplementary to all others and as the working out of a divine Plan, originating in the Hierarchy of spiritual Lives. Their work will be consciously carried out under the direct guidance of the Lord of Love and His noos.

Long patience will be needed. Mistakes will be made. There will be periods of indecision, of ineffective action and of negative yet deep discouragement. Workers will be prone to attitudes of despair, and at times the task will appear to them to demand too much, to be too difficult and the forces opposing what they seek to do too strong. But behind all the reconstruction with which humanity is faced is the potency of inevitable resurrection, the constant flow of enlightened thinking into and directing the mass consciousness, plus a growing realisation that humanity is not alone, that the spiritual values are the only real values, and that the Hierarchy stands, immovable in its spiritual strength, steadily oriented towards world salvation, and acting ever under the direction of that great divine yet human Leader, the Prince of Peace. The Lord of Love has passed through all human experiences, and has never left us; with His noos, the Masters of the Wisdom, He is drawing closer to humanity decade after decade; when He said at the Ascension Initiation, "Lo, I am with you always even until the end of the age," He meant no vague or general idea of helping humanity from some distant locality called "the Throne of God in Heaven." He meant just what He said_ that He was staying with us. The fact of His Presence upon earth in physical form is known today by many hundreds of thousands, and will eventually be realised by as many millions.

Therefore, Brothers, believe in the reality of the work to be done by these great spiritual Potencies, invoked during the three Full Moons of April, May and June. Go forth to the task of helping humanity, of establishing goodwill, of bringing about right human relations and of restoring a true spiritual perspective, with undaunted courage, sure faith and the firm conviction that mankind is not alone.

May the blessing of the Lord of Love and of the Hierarchy rest upon all true servers and may they stand tranquil in the midst of strife.

THE GREAT INVOCATION - Stanza Three

April 17, 1945

As this world catastrophe draws to its inevitable close and the Forces of Light triumph over the forces of evil, the time of restoration opens up. For each of you this indicates a renewed time of service and of activity. We send you herewith the final Stanza of the Great Invocation, as we promised.* We gave you the first about nine years ago and the second during the course of the conflict. We would ask you to use it daily and as many times a day as you can remember to do so; you will thus create a seed thought or a clear-cut thoughtform which will make the launching of this Invocation among the masses of men a successful venture when the right time comes. That time is not yet.

This Great Invocation can be expressed in the following words:

From the point of Light within the Mind of God

Let light stream forth into the minds of men.

Let Light descend on Earth.

From the point of Love within the Heart of God

Let love stream forth into the hearts of men.

May the Prince of Peace return to Earth.

From the centre where the Will of God is known

Let purpose guide the little wills of men_

The purpose which the Masters know and serve.

From the centre which we call the race of men

Let the Plan of Love and Light work out

And may it seal the door where evil dwells.

Let Light and Love and Power restore the Plan on Earth.

It has been difficult to translate into understandable and adequate phrases, the very ancient word-forms which the Prince of Peace will employ. These word-forms are only seven in number, and they will constitute His complete, new utterance. We have only been able to give their general significance. Nothing else was possible, but even in this longer form, they will be potent in their invocative appeal, if said with mental intensity and ardent purpose. The points of emphasis upon which we would ask you to dwell (once it is permissible to use the phrases) are two in number:

1. May Christ, the Prince of Peace, Lord of Sacrifice and Lord of Love \ Brotherhood return to earth. This return must not be understood in its usual connotation and its well-known mystical, Christian sense. The Lord of Love has never left the earth. What is referred to is the externalisation of the Hierarchy and its exoteric appearance on earth. The Hierarchy will eventually, under its Head, the Prince of Peace, function openly and visibly on earth. This will happen when the purpose of the divine will and the plan which will implement it is better understood and the period of adjustment, of world enlightenment and of reconstruction has made real headway. This period begins at the San Francisco Conference (hence its major importance) and will move very slowly at first. It will take time but the Hierarchy thinks not in terms of years and of brief cycles (though long to humanity), but in terms of events and the expansion of consciousness.

2. May it seal the door where evil dwells. The sealing up of the evil forces, released during this conflict, will take place within the immediate future. It will be soon. The evil referred to has nothing to do with the evil inclinations, the selfish instincts and the separativeness found in the hearts and minds of human beings. These they must overcome and eliminate for themselves. But the reduction to impotency of the loosed forces of evil which took advantage of the world situation, which obsessed the German people and directed the Japanese people, and which worked through barbarity, murder, sadism, lying propaganda and which prostituted science to achieve their ends, requires the imposition of a power beyond the human. This must be invoked and the invocation will meet with speedy response. These evil potencies will be psyientificly "sealed" within their own place; what this exactly means has naught to do with humanity. Men today must learn the lessons of the past, profit from the discipline of the conflict and deal_ each in his/her own life and community_ with the weaknesses and errors to which he/she may find him/herself prone.

We would here recall to you what we said last year anent this final Stanza of the Invocation.

"We are preparing to present to you for wide distribution throughout the world, the last stanza of the Great Invocation. It is by no means easy to translate the words of this stanza in terms which will make it of general appeal and not simply of importance to convinced esotericists.... It can be so presented that the masses everywhere, the general public will be prompted to take it up and will use it widely; they will do this on a relatively larger scale than the intuitional, the spiritually minded or even the men of goodwill . A far wider public will comprehend it. We will give [- - -] this stanza at the earliest possible moment; this will be conditioned by world affairs and by our understanding of a certain esoteric appropriateness in the setting of a time cycle. If plans mature as desired by the Hierarchy, the new stanza can receive distribution at the time of the Full Moon of June 1945, as far as the Occident is concerned, and considerably later for the Orient. Prior to these set points in time, the stanza can be used by all esoteric school members, after being used for one clear month by our group, dating that month from the time that the most distant members of the group receive it."

We seek to have this Invocation go forth on the power generated by our Ashram and by all of you affiliated with our Ashram; the Ashrams of the Master [- -] and the Master [-] are likewise deeply committed to participation in this work.

We would ask you also to read and re-read the two Instructions which you are at this time receiving_ one dealing with the Cycle of Conferences and other with The Work of the Prince of Peace. Master their contents and let the blueprint of the hierarchical plan take shape in your minds. Then you can do your share in implementing it and will be able to recognise those who in other groups and in different lands are also a vital part of hierarchical effort.

THE RELEASE OF ATOMIC ENERGY

August 9, 1945

We would like at this time to touch upon the greatest spiritual event which has taken place since the fourth kingdom of nature, the human kingdom, appeared. We refer to the release of atomic energy, as related in the newspapers this week, August 6, 1945, in connection with the bombing of Japan.

Some years ago we told you that the new era would be ushered in by the scientists of the world and that the inauguration of the kingdom of God on Earth would be heralded by means of successful scientific investigation. By this first step in the releasing of the energy of the atom this has been accomplished, and our prophecy has been justified during this momentous year of our Lord 1945. Let us make one or two statements anent this discovery, leaving you to make your own application and deductions. Little as to the true nature of this happening is as yet known, and still less is understood. Certain ideas and suggested thoughts may be of real value here and enable you to see this stupendous event in better perspective.

1. It was the imminence of this "release" of energy which was one of the major subjective factors in the precipitation of this last phase of the conflict. This world conflict started in 1914, but its last and most important phase began in 1939. Up till then it was a world conflict. After that date, and because the forces of evil took advantage of the state of conflict and belligerency existing on the planet, the real conflict began, involving the entire three worlds of human evolution and a consequent activity of the Hierarchy. Man's attention is normally focussed on the externalities of living. Nevertheless, all great discoveries, such as those made in connection with astronomy or in relation to the laws of nature or involving such a revelation as that of radio-activity or the epoch-making event announced this week concerning the first steps taken in the harnessing of cosmic energy, are ever the result of inner pressure emanating from Forces and Lives found in high Places. Such inner pressures themselves function under the laws of the Spirit and not just under what you call natural laws; they are the result of the impelling work of certain great Lives, working in connection with the third aspect of divinity, that of active intelligence, and are concerned with the substance or matter aspect of manifestation. Such activities are motivated from Shamballa. This activity is set in motion by these Lives, working on Their high plane, and it gradually causes a reaction in the various departments of the Hierarchy, particularly those working under third, fifth and seventh ray Masters. Eventually, noos upon the physical levels of activity become aware of the inner ferment, and this happens either consciously or unconsciously. They become "impressed," and the scientific work is then started and carried through into the stages of experimentation and final success.

One point should here be remembered, and that is that this phase applies to both the great Light Lodge and the Self-Aggrandising / evil / Dark / Ignorance Lodge_ the one dedicated to the beneficent task of purifying and aiding all lives in the three worlds of material evolution and to the release of the soul in form, and the other to the retardation of the evolutionary process and to the continuous crystallising of the material forms which hide and veil the anima mundi. Both groups have been profoundly interested and implicated in this matter of the release of energy from the atom and the liberation of its inner aspect, but their motives and objectives were widely different.

2. The imminence of this release_ inevitable and under direction_ produced an enormous tension in hierarchical circles because (to express the idea colloquially) a race was on between the Dark Forces and the Forces of Light to acquire possession of the techniques necessary to bring about this liberation of needed energy. Had the Dark Forces triumphed, and had the Axis Powers obtained possession of the needed scientific formulas, it would have led to a major planetary disaster. The released energy would have been used first of all to bring about the complete destruction of all opposing the forces of evil, and then it would have been prostituted to the preservation of an increasingly materialistic and non-idealistic civilisation. Germany could not be trusted with this power, for all her motives were compelling wrong.

You might here fall back on the trite religious platitude that the innate good in humanity and mankind's inherent divinity would eventually have triumphed, because naught can finally overcome the universal trend to good. You are prone to forget that if the evil forces possess potencies which can destroy form in the three worlds on such a wide scale that the souls of advanced aspirants and noos, and those of initiates seeking incarnation, cannot come into outer expression during a particular world crisis, then you have direfully affected the time-schedule of the evolutionary process; you will have greatly delayed (perhaps for millennia of years) the manifestation of the kingdom of God. The time had come for that manifestation, and hence the powerful activity of the dark forces.

This attempt to hinder the planned progress constituted a definite menace and indicated a supreme danger and problem. The evil forces were closer to success than any of you have ever dreamed. They were so close to success in 1942 that there were four months when the members of the spiritual Hierarchy had made every possible arrangement to withdraw from human contact for an indefinite and unforeseen period of time; the plans for a closer contact with the evolutionary process in the three worlds and the effort to blend and fuse the two divine centres, the Hierarchy and Humanity, into one working, collaborating whole seemed doomed to destruction. Their fusion would have meant the appearance of the Kingdom of God on earth; the obstacles to this fusion, owing to the active tension of the dark forces, seemed at that time insuperable; we believed that man would go down to defeat, owing to his/her selfishness and his/her misuse of the principle of free will. We made all preparations to withdraw, and yet at the same time we struggled to get humanity to choose rightly and to see the issues clearly.

The necessity to withdraw was averted. We may not say in what manner, beyond telling you that the Lords of Liberation took certain unexpected steps. This They were led to do owing to the invocative powers of humanity, used consciously by all those upon the side of the will-to-good and unconsciously by all men of goodwill . Owing to these steps, the efforts of those fighting in the realm of science for the establishing of true knowledge and right human relations were aided. The trend of the power to know and to discover (a definite form of energy) was deflected away from the demanding evocative minds of those seeking to destroy the world of men, leading to a form of mental paralysis. Those seeking to emphasise the right values and to save humanity were simultaneously stimulated to the point of success.

In these very few words we have disposed of a stupendous world event, and in this brief paragraph we have summed up the working out of a specialised divine activity.

3. When the sun moved northward that year (1942), the great Light Lodge knew that the battle had been won. Their preparations were halted and the Masters then organised for renewed effort (through Their noos) to bring about those conditions wherein that which was new and that which was in line with loving divine purpose could freely move forward. The conflict was not won by the surrender of Germany. That was only the outer result of inner happenings. The conflict was won by the Forces of Light when the mental potency of the forces of evil was overcome and the "energy of the future" was directed or impelled by Those Who were seeking the higher human values and the spiritual good of mankind. Four factors lie behind the momentous happening of the release of this form of atomic energy, through the medium of what is erroneously and unscientifically called the "splitting of the atom." There are other factors, but you may find the following four of real interest:

a. There was a clearly directed inflow of extra-planetary energy released by the Lords of Liberation, to Whom invocation had been successfully made; through the impact of this energy upon the atomic substance being dealt with by the investigating scientists, changes were brought about which enabled them to achieve success. The experiments being carried forward were therefore both subjective and objective.

b. A concerted effort was made by a number of noos who were working in fifth and seventh ray ashrams, and this enabled them to impress lesser noos in the scientific field and helped them to surmount the well-nigh insuperable difficulties with which they were confronted.

c. There was also a weakening of the tension which had hitherto successfully held the forces of evil together, and a growing inability of the evil group at the head of the Axis Powers to surmount the incidental conflict fatigue. This brought about, first of all, a steady deterioration of their minds, and then of their brains and nervous systems. None of the men involved in the direction of the Axis effort in Europe is today normal psychologically; they are all suffering from some form of physical deterioration, and this has been a real factor in their defeat, though one that may be difficult for you to realise. It is not so in the case of the Japanese, whose psychological make-up is totally different, as are their nervous systems, which are of fourth rootrace quality. They will be and are being defeated by physical conflict measures and by the destruction physically of their conflict potential and the death of the form aspect. This destruction ... and the consequent release of their imprisoned souls, is a necessary happening; it is the justification of the use of the atomic bomb upon the Japanese population. The first use of this released energy has been destructive, but we would remind you that it has been the destruction of forms and not the destruction of spiritual values and the death of the human spirit_ as was the goal of the Axis effort.

Forget not that all success (both good and bad) is dependent upon the sustaining of the point of tension. This point of tension involves the dynamic focussing of all mental, emotional and physical energies at a central point of planned activity. This, by the way, is the objective of all true meditation/IDtation work. It is in this act of tension that the German people failed. This cost them the conflict; their tension broke because the group of evil forces who were impressing the negative German people were unable to attain the point of tension which the Hierarchy could reach when it was reinforced through the action of the Lords of Liberation.

d. Another factor was the constant, invocative demand and the prayers (articulate and inarticulate) of humanity itself. Men, impelled largely by fear and the innate mobilising of the human spirit against slavery, reached such a pitch of demanding energy that a channel was created which greatly facilitated the work of the Hierarchy, under the direct influence of the Lords of Liberation.

4. The release of the energy of the atom is as yet in an extremely embryonic stage; humanity little knows the extent or the nature of the energies which have been tapped and released. There are many types of atoms, constituting the "world substance"; each can release its own type of force; this is one of the secrets which the new age will in time reveal, but a good and sound beginning has been made. We would call your attention to the words, "the liberation of energy." It is liberation which is the keynote of the new era, just as it has ever been the keynote of the spiritually oriented aspirant. This liberation has started by the release of an aspect of matter and the freeing of some of the soul forces within the atom. This has been, for matter itself, a great and potent initiation, paralleling those initiations which liberate or release the souls of men.

In this process of planetary initiation humanity has carried its work as the world saviour down into the world of substance, and has affected those primary units of life of which all forms are made.

5. You will now understand the meaning of the words used by so many of you in the second of the Great Invocations: The hour of service of the saving force has now arrived. This "saving force" is the energy which science has released into the world for the destruction, first of all, of those who continue (if they do) to defy the Forces of Light working through the United Nations. Then_ as time goes on_ this liberated energy will usher in the new civilisation, the new and better world and the finer, more spiritual conditions. The highest dreams of those who love their fellowm-w-c can become practical possibilities through the right use of this liberated energy, if the real values are taught, emphasised and applied to daily living. This "saving force" has now been made available by science, and our earlier prophecy substantiated.*

As we said above, the first use of this energy has been material destruction; this was inevitable and desirable; old forms (obstructing the good) have had to be destroyed; the wrecking and disappearance of that which is bad and undesirable must ever precede the building of the good and desirable and the longed-for emergence of that which is new and better.

The constructive use of this energy and its harnessing for the betterment of humanity is its real purpose; this living energy of substance itself, hitherto shut up within the atom and imprisoned in these ultimate forms of life, can be turned wholly into that which is good and can bring about such a revolutionising of the modes of human experience that (from one angle alone) it will necessitate and bring about an entirely new economic world structure.

It lies in the hands of the United Nations to protect this released energy from misuse and to see that its power is not prostituted to selfish ends and purely material purposes. It is a "saving force" and has in it the potency of rebuilding, of rehabilitation and of reconstruction. Its right use can abolish destitution, bring civilised comfort (and not useless luxury) to all upon our planet; its expression in forms of right living, if motivated by right human relations, will produce beauty, warmth, colour, the abolition of the present forms of disease, the withdrawal of mankind from all activities which involve living or working underground, and will bring to an end all human slavery, all need to work or fight for possessions and things, and will render possible a state of life which will leave man-woman-child free to pursue the higher aims of the Spirit. The prostituting of life to the task of providing the bare necessities or to making it possible for a few rich and privileged people to have too much when others have too little, will come to an end; men everywhere can now be released into a state of life which will give them leisure and time to follow spiritual objectives, to realise richer cultural life, and to attain a broader mental perspective.

But, Brothers, men will fight to prevent this; the reactionary groups in every country will neither recognise the need for, nor desire this new world order which the liberation of cosmic energy (even on this initial tiny scale) can make possible; the vested interests, the big cartels, trusts and monopolies that controlled the past few decades, preceding this world conflict, will mobilise their resources and fight to the death to prevent the extinction of their sources of income; they will not permit, if they can help it, the passing of the control of this illimitable power into the hands of the masses, to whom it rightly belongs. The selfish interests among the big stockholders, the banking firms and the wealthy organised churches will oppose all change, except in so far as it will benefit them and bring more financial gain to their coffers.

Signs of this opposition can already be seen in the utterances of certain powerful men who are today encouraging a gloomy outlook in London and in Washington and elsewhere; the Vatican, that wealthy and reactionary ecclesiastical organisation, has already expressed its disfavour, because that Church knows_ as do all the vested and monied interests_ that their days are numbered, provided humanity governs its decisions during the next fifty years by the idea of the greatest good to the greatest number. World decisions must therefore, in the future, be based upon a steady determination to further right human relations and to prevent selfish control, financial or ecclesiastical, by any group of men, anywhere, in any country. We believe the determination of Great Britain, the United States, and Canada, who are in possession of the secrets, is along these lines.

These few suggestions will give you much food for thought and real ground for happy, confident, forward thinking. Organise now for the goodwill work. The future of the world lies in the hands of the men of goodwill and in those who have unselfish purpose everywhere. This release of energy will eventually make money, as we know it, of no moment whatsoever; money has proved itself (owing to man's limitations) a producer of evil and the sower of dissension and discontent in the world. This new released energy can prove itself a "saving force" for all mankind, releasing from poverty, ugliness, degradation, slavery and despair; it will destroy the great monopolies, take the curse out of labour, and open the door into that golden age for which all men wait. It will level all the artificial layers of modern society and liberate men from the constant anxiety and gruelling toil which have been responsible for so much disease and death. When these new and better conditions are established, then men will be free to live and move in beauty and to seek the "Lighted Way."

&&&&&&

January 1946

In these words we refer to an aspect of the amazing enterprise upon which the Hierarchy is embarked within this cycle: Its appearance, expression and activity upon the physical plane for the first time since it withdrew into the subjective side of life and focussed itself on the mental plane (instead of the physical) during the days of ancient Atlantis and after the conflict between the Lords of the Shining Countenance and Lords of the Dark Face, [not racial, is consciousness quotient and inner Centres] as The [--] calls it. For millions of years, as a result of the triumph of evil in those days, the Hierarchy has stood in silence behind world events, occupied with the following work_ a work which will eventually be carried on exoterically instead of esoterically:

1. The Hierarchy stands as a wall between humanity and excessive evil. Forget not that as humanity is thus protected that protection extends to all the subhuman kingdoms, of which the fourth kingdom, the human, is the Macrocosm. The excessive evil, emanating from cosmic sources, requires the trained skill of the Hierarchy and the fiat of Shamballa to prevent it flooding over disastrously.

2. The Hierarchy works constantly at the task of awakening the consciousness aspect in all forms, so that it is awakened, expanded and intelligently employed.

3. The Hierarchy directs world events, as far as mankind will permit (for the free will and free decision of mankind may not be ignored), so that the unfolding consciousness may express itself through developing and adequate social, political, religious and economic world forms. They give direction; They throw a light; They impress those who are in contact with Them, and through the inflow of ideas and through revelation They definitely influence the tide of human affairs.

4. The Hierarchy directs and controls, more than is realised, the unfolding cyclic cultures and their resultant civilisations. These can then provide adequate forms, temporarily useful for the emerging soul of humanity. The format of cultures and civilisations receives special attention.

5. The Hierarchy receives and transmits energies and consequent forces from Shamballa, with resultant effects within the Hierarchy itself, and also with effects upon humanity and upon the soul of all things to be found in all kingdoms.

6. The Hierarchy receives that esoteric "Fire of God" which brings to an end cycles, ideologies, organisations and civilisations when the due and right time comes. This They do in order to make place for that which is better and which will prove adequate and not limiting to the awakening consciousness and the emerging life.

7. The Hierarchy prepares men for initiation by:

a. Receiving them into the Ashrams of the Masters.

b. Offering Their noos opportunity to serve in relation to the emerging Plan.

c. Inaugurating through the means of the noos of the period those new presentations of the training needed for initiation. Each major cycle receives new forms of the same ancient, yet basic, teaching. This present one is such a cycle, and much of our own work is in connection with this.

All of these activities and functions of the Hierarchy are well known to many of you theoretically, and to some at first hand_ which is a good and useful thing to recognise. These activities have all been carried on "behind the veil" and are, of course, only a very small part of the total work of the Hierarchy. Much of it would be entirely incomprehensible to you. However, if the noos of this modern world, and the initiates, can measure up to their present and presented opportunity, it should be possible for all of this not only to be carried forward in the full light of day, but with the cooperation and the understanding acceptance of the intelligent people everywhere, and also with the devoted acquiescence (though blind acceptance) of the man in the street.

Something of this, something of the new activities which will be brought to the attention of noos in physical bodies, something of the scope of the undertaking of externalisation, something of what all of you can do to prepare the way for this major change, and something of the tremendous difficulties involved, we are seeking to convey to you, if we can.

One of the things now occupying the attention of the Masters is the externalisation of their ashrams on the outer plane. This is preparatory to later envisioned developments. If this can be done then other developments may be possible. An extension of the ashram is desired. It was with this in view that we inaugurated a new activity in May 1941 and chose so many of our noos resident in [- -]. We also began to give out the teaching on the stages of nooship [- - - - -] and suggested that the group members meet together for one full afternoon around the time of the full moon each month, and to do this in a quiet and unhurried spirit. We desired that they spend the entire afternoon in conference, mutual understanding, discussion of group problems as these affect group service, and_ above all_ make an attempt (through deep united meditation/IDtation and the pooling of knowledge) to approach closer to the Hierarchy. This would aid them to work together as a group for world aiding and to do it together. We asked them to study the relation which exists between a Master and His noos.

These groups, indicated for externalisation, exist on the inner side as part of one inner Group; they must be externalised for service purposes. The fact that this externalisation is possible indicates certain developments which are the result of the past, of the unfoldment of humanity's developing powers to recognise Reality, of the invocative cry of the masses everywhere, plus the directed invocation of the spiritual people of the world, and the effect of the world conflict (1914-1945). All these factors have wrought a great destruction in the materialistic world and have produced a very real expansion in the human consciousness; also, as one of the Masters, unknown to you, remarked at a meeting of Members of the Hierarchy a few weeks ago, "One of the gates is open; those who are ready can come in, but we now can go through it also, and can go to them in a new sense and more directly. May Shamballa help us."

It is realised by all in the Hierarchy that the major test connected with a higher initiation confronts Them. noos should attempt to realise the tremendous sacrifice involved in this outward move of the Hierarchy into secular existence. The higher the state of initiation, the harder it will be for the initiate concerned. It is, for instance, less of an effort for us to contact you than it would be for some of the Chohans, such as the Masters [-]. and [- - ]. We are nearer to you, because we are still utilising the same physical body in which we took the fifth initiation, nearly ninety years ago. Chohans have taken a still higher initiation and are focal points of powerful Ashrams; Their task of adjustment is very much harder. Their invocative appeal to the Lord of the World in His Council Chamber at Shamballa has been mounting for some time. It has been called "The Appeal for Alignment" because the Members of the Hierarchy feel and know that this great return to Earth which has been arranged for the Hierarchy after so long an absence, will call for a fuller expression of the spiritual will than even They realise; They know that it will require the cooperation of Shamballa as well as the cooperation of humanity.

What we have to say about the externalisation of the Hierarchy and its Ashrams could well be divided for the sake of clarity into the following points which will form the basis of the instruction. We shall attempt to follow this outline.

Hierarchical Adjustment and Alignment:

Within Itself.

In connection with the Council Chamber of Sanat Kumara. Little can be said about this.

In relation with humanity.

You will note that this involves the three planetary centres.

Hierarchical preparation at the Wesak Festival.

The Mode of Approach towards Externalisation.

Steps in the externalisation process.

Approach via certain Ashrams.

In the consciousness of the noo in physical expression.

Through dissemination of information of a preparatory nature.

The Externalisation itself. This involves:

The Return of the Prince of Peace.

The Ashrams concerned at the Coming.

The organisation of the implicated Ashrams into due form on earth.

The externalisation of the Ashrams.

Adjustment of the Ashrams and the Masters to exoteric living.

It will involve also adjustment by noos and aspirants to the increased stimulation, and the enunciation of certain basic statements.

The Work of the Externalised Ashrams.

Creating and vitalising the new world religion.

The gradual reorganising of the social order.

The public inauguration of the system of initiation.

The exoteric training of noos and of humanity in this new cycle. …

Ashram- The first point which we would like to bring out is that accepted noos are in training for initiation. If, when they approach the Path of nooship they fail to grasp this fact and to give the fullest cooperation, they postpone the time of that initiation. Their grasp of the fact will be demonstrated in the intensity of their proffered service. Planned service is one of the modes of the training. noos in the early stages of their work are apt to be primarily interested in themselves and in their own reactions and attitudes to the Master. The fact that they are working in a Master's group seems to them the fact of paramount importance.

The second thing which we would like to point out is that there is a great difference between a Master's group and His | Her Ashram. This is seldom realised. Many people can be found in a Master's group but the personnel of His | Her Ashram is picked out of that of the group. In a group, the Master is in touch with and aware of the aspiring noo and he/she has had a definite contact with Him | Her, but this has involved a personality as well as a soul relation. But in an Ashram only that is to be found within the sphere of influence of an Ashram which is of the soul. Nothing of the personality is allowed to enter in—personality reactions, disabilities, limitations, personality thoughts and all that is material and connected with the lower nature, never reaches the Ashram at all. In the early stages, therefore, of a noo 's work, it is possible that there is little or nothing that the noo will be able to contribute of any kind for a long time. Only those positively sensed intuitions and those definite soul impressions and impulses which the noo may succeed in evoking (through meditation/IDtation and growing purity of intention) can contribute anything to the life of the Ashram. There is consequently a law which protects the Ashram from your limitations. we have been using the word "Ashram" quite definitely in our effort to lead you to discriminate between a group and an Ashram. An Ashram is basically formed of those who through their knowledge, devotion and service have worked their way out of a group into an inner centre where the Master's energy, wisdom and effort is more easily available. In order to work their way from the group into the Ashram, noos will need most carefully to discriminate between their high grade personality inclinations, their responses to truth and ideals and their true soul reactions, spiritual wisdom and intuitive perception.

The third point which we would like to bring out is that noos when they form part of an Ashram are subjecting themselves to a greatly increased pressure and are in a position to participate in much wider distribution of energy than heretofore. Today, as the Coming One nears the earth and draws closer to humanity, and as the inflow of spiritual energy from Shamballa into the hierarchical Centre becomes greater, there is a great keying up of human receptivity and a greatly augmented stimulation is taking place with varying effects. This involves an intensified aspiration and spiritual determination. It also signifies an opportunity of an unprecedented nature.

We can begin on our first point, but only those students who are an integral part of the Hierarchy and in active communication with some Ashram can profit in any measure by information on this subject. For example, those of you who are affiliated with our Ashram (or that of another of the Masters), and going through your preliminary training and functioning on the periphery of the hierarchical centre can get a general idea and develop (if you attempt to do so) an intuitive perception of the proposed hierarchical integrity and future functioning.

Resent not our words "functioning on the periphery," for they indicate great opportunity for service. The Masters need many such as you on the outskirts of Their Ashrams, to aid in hierarchical endeavour, because you can reach the general public more easily than They can do, and you can step down the teaching far more adequately than could more advanced noos. You and noos like you are a definite part of the Hierarchy; as you function in an Ashram you have a most useful place, and we would beg you to have this ever in mind. We will, therefore, give you whatever information we can and which is permissible, but shall of necessity have to leave much unsaid.

Hierarchical Adjustment and Alignment

What do we mean by the use of the word "adjustment" in connection with the Hierarchy? Adjustment to karma, to the personality, to the soul, to circumstances in the three worlds, to the impact of astral forces, or to the thought currents of those not oriented to the Kingdom of God, does not constitute part of the training of Those Who are beyond the third degree of initiation. Initiates on and beyond that level have transcended reaction along these lines, whilst those below the third initiation are in process of rapid adjustment. We use the word `adjustment' here definitely in the sense of reorientation, and in this sense much can be noted.

For aeons and for countless cycles, the Hierarchy has functioned withdrawn into a silence on the higher levels of the mental plane and on the buddhic levels where contact has had to be made with Them by those noos who have, by discipline, development and service, fitted themselves to establish such a relationship. This reorientation and emergence into physical plane publicity is going to demand much from the Members of the Hierarchy. Just as it has not been easy for us to establish and retain contact with you, even when you have established the right to such a contact, so_ for Them_ it is going to be still more difficult to be in touch with those who are not even noos.

For aeons and for cycles, the Members of the Hierarchy have been submitting Themselves to the needed training in order to react correctly when fuller contact has been established by Shamballa with the Hierarchy. We would have you note the phrasing here. That contact has now been established as a result of the inflow of certain extra-planetary forces and by an "act of determined direction," emanating from the Council Chamber of the Lord of the World. Misunderstand us not. The Hierarchy has always been in touch with the "Place of Purpose" (as it has been called) through the medium of its Chohans and its senior Directors, such as the Lord of Love, the Manu and the Lord of Civilisation. These great Beings have steadily revealed this purpose to the Members of the Hierarchy so that They have been able to grasp and work out the emerging Plan. But even to the Masters the Shamballa force has had to be stepped down, just as the force of the Hierarchy requires modifying for the average noo and aspirant, if they are to respond constructively to it.

Today, however, things are somewhat changed. New inflowing energies and the partial "sealing" of evil in its own place (a sealing which will be progressively effective) have made a closer relationship possible. The Masters are somewhat freer from certain of the arduous labours of the past cycles. Some of the available inflowing Shamballa forces are being absorbed directly by humanity and by certain of the subhuman kingdoms, particularly the mineral kingdom. This latter absorption will lead eventually, when complete, to those volcanic episodes and those basic earthquakes which will change the face of the earth by the time the sixth rootrace comes into manifestation. It is this direct inflow to the kingdoms functioning exoterically in the three worlds which has relieved and will to some extent relieve the otherwise overpowering pressure upon the Hierarchy, and will also act as a great aligning antahkarana between the three planetary centres. It is to this alignment we refer in this instruction_ the alignment of the three centres upon this planet and the adjustments that this necessitates and inevitably enforces.

For the sake of humanity in the first place, and secondarily for the development of the subhuman kingdoms, the Hierarchy has made certain difficult adjustments and alignments between the planetary centres, and these have been compulsory in their effects. Therefore, bear in mind that the adjustments which the Hierarchy may impose upon itself bear small resemblance to the adjustments which you have to make in relation to your personality life. They are all hallmarked by the idea of service to the whole. The Hierarchy in its true sense has no personality through which to express itself, and this greatly complicates the problems which have to be faced as it contemplates exoteric manifestation and work.

Adjustments and Alignments within the Hierarchy

What, in the last analysis, is this Hierarchy? It is a great salvaging corps of dedicated, liberated Units of Life, working in group formation with all forms and lives in all kingdoms and with all souls particularly. As the Hierarchy so works, its emphasis is solely on the consciousness aspect of all forms; its present agency of salvage and of service is the mind, as it expresses itself through the minds of all humanitarians, all aspirants, all noos (of all rays and degrees) and of all initiates; the Hierarchy also can express itself through the medium of thought currents and ideas and through them impose its hierarchical concepts upon the embryonic minds of the general and average public; and it also directs the educational work of all nations, so that the undeveloped masses can become_ in due turn_ the intelligent general public.

The Hierarchy works, as you know, in or through three major departments, each possessing its full Personnel, and under three Great Lords. We have dealt with this in some detail in Initiation, Human and Solar, as well as elsewhere in our writings; more information at this point is needless and of no real service to you.

The Hierarchy works also through the seven major Ashrams and their affiliated Ashrams, and these "seven which are the forty-nine" represent in their totality the seven rays with their subrays, and are the custodians, transmitters and distributors of the seven ray energies to the seven planetary centres and_ via these seven centres_ to those in the fourth kingdom in nature (as they gradually unfold over the aeons) and then, via these, to the seven centres in individual man-woman-ch7ild. Such is the synthesis.

The seven major centres or Ashrams within the Hierarchy are each presided over by Masters of Chohan rank; the seven subsidiary centres or Ashrams are presided over by Masters and Adepts (of the fifth and fourth initiations), aided by initiates of the third degree and certain picked and senior noos. Several of the seven affiliated Ashrams are, as yet, incomplete as regards personnel, but vacancies are rapidly being filled as the spiritual effects of the world conflict (1914-1945) make themselves felt. These effects are very real and have been a source of great encouragement to hierarchical workers.

Before the Hierarchy can emerge (as is the intention), the relation between a major Ashram and its subsidiary Ashrams must be firmly established, whilst that between a major Ashram and other major Ashrams has to be brought more definitely and unquestionably closer to Shamballa, and under the influence of that great first ray centre. The energy which will align and adjust the subsidiary forty-nine Ashrams is that of the second Ray of Love. That, however, which will bring about a similar adjusting and aligning impetus in the seven major Ashrams is the energy of the first Ray of Will or Power. We have here given you a most important item of psyientific information, but one which is of no importance to you individually; it serves, however, to present proof of the significant psyientific relation between the three planetary centres. Just as the third planetary centre, Humanity, has now reached a point of intelligent development so that a closer rapport can be set up between it and the Hierarchy, so the Hierarchy also has moved forward as a unit so that a closer corresponding rapport can also be set up between It and Shamballa. Just as the rapport between the Hierarchy and Humanity is established via aspirants, noos and initiates in physical existence who are responding to the love-wisdom of the universe in some measure and who work via the intelligent people in incarnation primarily, so rapport between Shamballa and the Hierarchy is being more closely established via the senior Ashrams, and not via the secondary ones. You have, therefore, a situation which might be depicted somewhat as follows:

I. First Planetary Centre Shamballa

working through

1. The seven Rays or the seven Spirits before the Throne.

2. Certain great Intermediaries.

3. The Council Chamber of the Lord of the World.

II. Second Planetary Centre Hierarchy

working through

1. The seven major Chohans and Their Ashrams.

2. The forty-nine Masters of the secondary Ashrams.

3. The sum total of the secondary Ashrams.

III. Third Planetary Centre Humanity

working through

1. noos in manifestation_ of the seven ray types.

2. The New Group of World Servers.

3. The sum total of humanitarians, educators and men of goodwill .

This is but a rough picture and one which is not totally correct; it will, however, show you certain direct lines of contact and of relationship which are true and which will suffice to give you a vague and general idea of the new alignment being set up between the three major planetary centres, requiring new adjustments.

At this particular time, the emphasis of the needed alignments and adjustments with which the Hierarchy is faced is being placed upon activity within the Hierarchy Itself. The secondary Ashrams are being stimulated; new ones are being gradually formed, for there are not as yet forty-nine minor Ashrams; vacancies in the major Ashrams are being filled as rapidly as possible from the ranks of those working in minor Ashrams and the places of these latter are being taken by accepted noos who are being fitted for this work through experience, difficulties and the tension of world service. All these changes necessitate much adjustment. The interior work of hierarchical alignment is in the charge of the Chohans of the Major Ashrams, whilst the task of superintending the interior adjustments incident to new alignments and the admission of new personnel is being watched over and directed by the forty-nine Masters who are in charge of minor Ashrams_ either Ashrams with what is regarded as a full complement of workers, or Ashrams in process of attaining that full complement, or embryonic Ashrams of which there are already quite a few.

One of the results of this hierarchical alignment and adjustment will be the establishment, for the first time, of a fluid interplay and movement between the three planetary centres. Chohans are today passing out of the Hierarchy into the Council Chamber of the Lord of the World, or on to one or other of the Seven Paths; senior Masters in charge of Ashrams are taking higher grades of initiation and taking the rank of Chohans; initiates above the third degree are rapidly taking the fourth and fifth initiations and becoming Masters (taking both initiations in one life), and their places are being taken by lesser initiates; these, in their turn, have been training noos to take their places, until in this process of substitution and replacement we arrive at the door which symbolically stands between humanity and the Hierarchy, and today stands wide open, so that accepted noos are taking initiation, pledged noos are being accepted, and accepting noos are taking their pledges.

Thus a great and new movement is proceeding and a tremendously increased interplay and interaction is taking place. This will go on until A.D. 2025. During the years intervening between now and then very great changes will be seen taking place, and at the great General Assembly of the Hierarchy_ held as usual every century_ in 2025 the date in all probability will be set for the first stage of the externalisation of the Hierarchy. The present cycle (from now until that date) is called technically "The Stage of the Forerunner". It is preparatory in nature, testing in its methods, and intended to be revelatory in its techniques and results. You can see therefore that Chohans, Masters, initiates, world noos, noos and aspirants affiliated with the Hierarchy are all at this time passing through a cycle of great activity.

In the adjustment necessitated by the rapidly advancing alignment, the Members of the Hierarchy are fitting Themselves for the objective work of public expression. This entails far more difficulty than you might imagine or anticipate, because it entails the development of that form of "resistance to the pull of the lower vibration" of which you can know nothing, for that lower vibration is a necessary aspect of your normal expression_ little as you may like to realise this. You need to realise that there is nothing in the Masters or higher initiates which can respond to any vibration of this nature. Though They cannot absorb it or react to it or redevelop it again, it can cause Them the acutest discomfort and pain; that is the reason why the Son of God was called in The Old Testament a "man of sorrows and acquainted with grief". This did not in reality refer to His sufferings for poor miserable humanity (as orthodox theology so selfishly interprets it) but to the fact that He had to submit Himself to contact with humanity. The Hierarchy is therefore, along all lines (many of which we may not indicate or upon which we may not enlarge), preparing Itself for the experience of physical manifestation; It is also endeavouring to "create" the needed responsive apparatus which will be of such a nature that Members of the Hierarchy may function with the minimum of difficulty on earth and will experience the least possible measure of handicap; They will thus be enabled to give full time and attention to the work to be done by Them in physical manifestation.

They are endeavouring also to establish a closer telepathic rapport and a more intimate (though strictly impersonal) relationship with Their noos on all rays, so that there can be a free interplay of thought and a consequent better hierarchical integrity and one which_ no matter what may happen in the three worlds_ cannot be disrupted or in any way lessened.

Although for Them no astral plane exists and glamour is entirely non-existent, They have to learn to do a most peculiar thing: to work on the astral plane (because it exists for humanity and for the animal kingdom), to traverse this region of glamour and then to "demonstrate light in dissipating fog" in a manner for which there has hitherto been no call. None of this information may make much sense to you, but we are simply seeking to go on record for the sake of those who will come after you. There is little more that we may give you anent adjustment and alignment within the Hierarchy. It is rapidly proceeding, and just in so far as noos demonstrate upon the outer physical plane and in the three worlds their affiliation with an Ashram will they share in this dual process. Are you prepared for this?

In Connection with the Council Chamber of Sanat Kumara, the Lord of the World

As this subject concerns one of the seven goals towards which the Masters aim after They have attained the fifth initiation, it will be obvious to you that there is little that we can say about it. One of the seven Paths for which the Way of the Higher Evolution prepares the senior initiates is the Path of Earth Service. This Path, as you know, keeps the Masters attached to service in the three worlds for a period much longer than the average. It involves tremendous sacrifice. Just as the noo has to live a dual life, with one part of his/her reflective nature and awareness centred in the life of the Hierarchy and the other part of his/her mental responsiveness equally centred on life in the three worlds, and this simultaneously, so the Master, when He chooses this Path, forms a constituent part of the Council Chamber of the Lord of the World and at the same time works consciously in the three worlds, via the Hierarchy (of which He remains also a part), and with the human and subhuman kingdoms in nature. As evolution proceeds, He will work increasingly via humanity because humanity will be shouldering its responsibilities as the Macrocosm of the lesser microcosm. This dual activity entails much specialised training, and as the initiatory process becomes exoteric and men everywhere recognise it and participate in it, the training which Members of the Hierarchy also undergo will not be so secret and mysterious as it is today. But the time has not yet come to publicise it.

Only certain further generalisations are here possible, some of which are already known to you because they are so broad that their inclusions and implications are obvious. This, for instance, concerns the "centre where the Will of God is known". Here at Shamballa work Those Who have unified Their personality will and Their spiritual will with the universal will, and such a unification inevitably brings knowledge. It is, however, not knowledge as you understand it. It is a blend of wisdom based on knowledge, understanding based on intuitive perception, and identification based on alignment, esoterically comprehended. For this peculiar condition or awareness we have no word in any language, and only the utilisation (the trained utilisation) of the abstract mind can possibly convey to you even an embryonic factual conception. But that type of imaginative conception will become more common during the next two centuries, and our words here will therefore serve an ultimate purpose. Those Who form the Council Chamber of the Great Lord are under no misapprehension as to His will because They see it whole. Paul, the initiate, hints at this when writing one of the Epistles; he is in touch then with certain Members of the Hierarchy and is concerned with the theme of Love, which is the fundamental hierarchical theme and motive. He says to Them: "Now we see through a glass darkly, but then face to face; now we know in part, but then shall we know even as we are known." He there points towards the future progress of the Hierarchy_ a progress which remains as yet only a vague promise, lacking form and shape. But he wrote for initiates to whom love was a growing, vital concern, and to whom love and its practice meant light and the basic motif of all living, divine activity. It is not possible to reveal the will of God and the motivating Purpose of His manifesting Self, except to Those Who have demonstrated perfected love and Who register no sense of disunion or the faintest reaction to separateness.

At Shamballa, the Great Lives Who function there not only see manifestation whole and apart from all the limitations of time, but They feel all the major evolutionary impulses which are bringing the developing world into line with the divine Will. They embody those impulses not in terms of progressive movement, but in terms of one great divine and spiritual reaction. This idea can perhaps be best understood by you in terms of the Eternal AUM which is the symbol of the Eternal NOW. You have been told, and it has been demonstrated, that the AUM is composed of one major Sound, three minor sounds, and seven subsidiary vibratory tones. So it is with the Will of God which is embodied and held in synthesis by the Members of the Council Chamber. To Them, as They "hold the Will of God in solution, it is one clear note; as They see that Will in motion, it is three abiding chords, carrying outwards into all the worlds the Purpose of the ONE Who for aeons will abide; as They impel that Will to demonstrate, it is seven vibratory tones, drawing out into the reflected worlds the structure of the Plan. And thus the note, the chords and tone produce the Plan, reveal the Purpose and indicate God's Will." This is a quotation from certain of the ancient Archives which constitute the study of the Masters; they relate to the nature of Shamballa, its work and emanating energies.

Shamballa, as it constitutes the synthesis of understanding where our Earth is concerned, is also the centre where the highest Will of the Solar Logos is imposed upon the Will of our planetary Logos, Who is, as you know, only a centre in His greater body of manifestation. With this item of information you can have no possible concern; the Masters Themselves are only learning the Will of the planetary Logos; the objective of effort in Shamballa is, however, the apprehension of solar Purpose, the Plan of which is working out on the highest levels of our planetary system, just as the Will, Purpose and Plan of Shamballa work out on the three lowest levels of our planetary system. Again, this item of information serves only to indicate hierarchical objectives, and those objectives extend away from time and space into the Mind of God Himself.

There are certain synonyms which here may serve to develop your synthetic thinking and so bring in a definite measure of enlightenment.

SHAMBALLA HIERARCHY HUMANITY

Synthesis Unity Separation

Will Purpose Plan

Life Soul Appearance

Spirit Consciousness Substance

Livingness Organism Organisation

Apprehension Polarisation Focus of Activity

Power Momentum Action

Energy Distribution Forces

Direction Transmission Reception

Head Heart Throat

It will be apparent to you how little you can understand of the Shamballa intention when you realise that it is not easy for you to see any true distinction between unity and synthesis and, at the same time, how impossible it is for us to make the distinction clear. All we can say is that synthesis is, whilst unity is achieved and is the reward of action and effort. As you progress upon the Path of Initiation the meaning of unity clarifies. As you direct yourself towards the Way of the Higher Evolution synthesis emerges. More than that it would be useless for us to say.

This problem of the apparently impenetrable darkness of intention as grasped by Shamballa, of meaning, of inscrutability, of a spiritual imperviousness which holds, in spite of all fluctuations in the three worlds of human evolution and the remaining two of superhuman unfoldment, provides a situation to which the Hierarchy has to make adjustment through alignment. You are, in your small way, making your adjustment to the Hierarchy through a steady construction of the antahkarana, and in so doing are aiding in the construction of the antahkarana which unites Humanity and the Hierarchy_ the first few strands of which were established through the sacrifices of certain of the Sons of God when the Hierarchy was founded on Earth. Today, the Hierarchy is working at the establishing of the linking strands between Itself and Shamballa, and good progress has already been made. It might be said here that for the past seven hundred years the chain of Hierarchy has been complete; by this we mean that the planetary rainbow bridge uniting the three major centres has existed. The task ahead of all these three major centres, working in alignment through adjustment, is to strengthen and beautify (if we may so express it), to electrify this bridge, thus producing full planetary intercommunication between the three centres and the four minor centres, so that "the weight of the Will of God, the momentum of the Purpose of Sanat Kumara and the Plan of His Representatives may progress unimpeded from point to point, from sphere to sphere and from glory to glory."

It is this complete establishment of relationship between Shamballa, the Hierarchy and Humanity which brought about the planetary crisis through which the world has just passed and, from some standpoints, is still passing. Shamballa, as We have told you, can now reach Humanity, the third major centre, directly, and therefore has two points of planetary contact: the first, via the Hierarchy, as has been for long the case, and secondly, in a straight line, carrying energy direct to Humanity, without any transmission and consequent modifying of impact, as has also been the case hitherto. When this direct line of spiritual, dynamic, electrical energy made its first impact on earth (after the Great Council held in 1825), it first of all awakened men's thinking in a new and comprehensive way, producing the great ideologies; it aroused their massed desire, and registered obstruction on the physical plane. It found its course impeded and discovered it was faced with barriers. This energy from Shamballa, being an aspect of the ray of the destroyer, proceeded to "burn up" in the fires of destruction, all such hindrances upon the planes in the three worlds. This was the deeply esoteric and unrecognised cause of the conflict_ the beneficent bringing to an end of the impediments to the free flow of spiritual energy down into the third centre; this was the factor which called "evil from its hidden place" and brought the opposing forces to the surface of existence, prior to their "sealing". To the extent that this was so, mankind in the World Conflict (1914-1945) was the unhappy victim of spiritual circumstance; however, from the angle of man's historical past, humanity was the engineer of its own fate; but it took both the esoteric activity of Shamballa and the exoteric activity of humanity over a millennia of years to precipitate the conditions which made this new alignment possible and brought about the sealing (still being carried slowly forward), and plunged mankind into the vortex of conflict. This impelling downpouring energy from the highest centre penetrated not only to the heart of humanity, but into the very depths of the mineral kingdom, implicating also the animal and the vegetable expressions of divine life.

Because of this direct impact between Shamballa and Humanity, by-passing the Hierarchy, the Hierarchy was left free for the work of rehabilitation and salvaging, for reconstruction and for the application of the regenerative forces of resurrection. The Hierarchy needed and welcomed this interlude and recognised it as an essential aspect of the Plan.

The "cycle of Shamballa impact" is now over; the appeal of humanity to the Prince of Peace and His Hierarchy has again refocussed the energy of Shamballa via the Hierarchy, and the direct work of the Hierarchy with Humanity can again take on fresh meaning, can be re-established on new and somewhat different lines, and thus definitely bring in that "new heaven and new earth" for which men have so long waited. This will take time, but the new energies and their emerging qualities are adequate to the task, and will alleviate much and bring about great changes in due course of time. You will note, therefore, that the Hierarchy has been faced with three adjustments as the result of being deliberately "put out of alignment," though only temporarily, with both Shamballa and Humanity. This was symbolised for us at the Crucifixion when the Saviour hung pendant between heaven and earth.

These adjustments are:

1. Adjustment to those extra-planetary energies which were released into the highest centre. This was made possible by two factors:

a. The direct impact between Shamballa and Humanity or between will and intelligence. This is an important point to recognise.

b. The temporary quiescence of the love principle, as the Hierarchy waited for the results and effects of this direct impact upon the earth.

This was effectively carried out with much destruction in the world of forms.

2. Adjustment to certain basic changes within the Hierarchy Itself in preparation for the process of externalisation which was begun this century.

3. Adjustment to a disciplined and reoriented humanity, working today in the dark, it is needless to say, groping along unknown ways, appealing to the Hierarchy for more light and understanding, but awakened and alert for changes.

These adjustments are proceeding with rapidity; the technique being employed is realignment, through a definite action of the Will, as far as Shamballa is concerned, and by an outpouring of Love, as far as humanity is concerned. This Act of the Will is carried out by the three Heads of Departments in the Hierarchy, under the guidance of the Lord of Love and by the Chohans of the seven major Ashrams. They constitute a group of ten to Whom this task has been committed, for the reason that They are the only Members of the Hierarchy Who possess the needed qualifications and in Whom the Will aspect is adequately developed. The task of pouring out the Love principle in a new and dynamic manner is being carried out by all the Masters and by all initiates who have taken the third initiation. This stream of love will focus itself each coming Full Moon in a special act or demonstration of love.

You will note also how fully occupied the Hierarchy is with work, preparatory to emergence, and with those plans and activities which will lead to renewed interior activity, based not on lack of previous unity and integrity, but on the absorption of new energies, made available via Shamballa, of these extra-planetary forces to which we have earlier referred. This task of reorganisation prior to moving outward, will be completed by May, 1946. Then the task of the new alignment with humanity will be started and the great work undertaken which will proceed for several hundred years.

In Relation with Humanity

We shall not deal here with the work to be done in centuries to come in and through humanity, which is the goal of all these adjustments_ at least as far as your present interest is concerned. We shall touch only upon the activities of the Hierarchy as it establishes_ on a more powerful basis_ a more direct contact with mankind. Since 1925 the Hierarchy has directed Its thoughts to men, but It has not vitalised, as It will eventually do, the religious movements or churches in all lands, or the educational work in all countries, or any of the activities which are concerned with the aiding of humanity through welfare movements. It was felt that it was necessary for mankind to show the Hierarchy, as well as themselves, the nature of the impulses towards love and selflessness which may have been already established, and to do this free of hierarchical prompting and influence, and in this way demonstrating that they possessed that which might be depended upon as innate and as present in a living, creative manner. The demonstration has been good; humanity has shown creative love, of which goodwill and humanitarian efforts are the lowest aspects. The showing has been better than was anticipated, and this new and vital re-alignment between the Hierarchy and Humanity becomes now beautifully possible and can be carried forward without danger. The Hierarchy is now the Custodian of far greater power than heretofore, on account of Its adjustment to Shamballa.

This hierarchical readjustment to humanity is being carried out at this time in the Ashrams by the setting up of magnetic centres which, through their directed activity, will influence humanity in the coming large scale process of reorientation. In studying this, you must remember that these are not centres or concentrations of forces, but groups of noos whose quality is oriented towards mankind and whose potency of thought will act magnetically upon aspirants and humanitarians and, through them and their goodwill activities, will reach and impress men everywhere. The adjustment being at this time undertaken, therefore, is between hierarchical groups and groups of men and women upon earth; it is intended, as you have been told, that Humanity itself will be the world-saviour, working with the aid of the Hierarchy_ as yet invisibly behind the scenes. When this interim work of salvage is accomplished, then the Hierarchy will externalise Itself.

You can imagine the adjustments, therefore, going on in all the Ashrams in preparation for all this and_ though we touch not upon it_ you can imagine the general effect of these inter-hierarchical adjustments and alignments upon noos and aspirants upon the earth; they are the first, needless to say, who will respond to this activity. As all this is taking place in the present difficult period of world rehabilitation, the immensity of the problem involved and the quality of the tension are abnormal. It is not easy for noos today; of this the Hierarchy is well aware. This fact also involves for Them still another aspect of hierarchical adjustment. They have_ for the sake of the work to be done_ to establish a closer alignment between the inner Ashrams and the outer groups, between Themselves and Their senior noos carrying the burden of the outer world service; this alignment has also to be extended between senior noos and initiates and the workers on earth.

The pureness of the motives animating the Hierarchy will constantly emerge with greater clarity in your minds, as you attempt to understand, even in a small measure, Their problems. There are other problems of which you can know nothing_ problems related to the new energies pouring into our planet, impersonally and dynamically; problems of fresh tensions, incident to stronger and new alignments; problems concerned with human enlightenments and reactions in the face of the darkness which evil initiated; problems of increased personnel, disturbing the rhythm but necessitated by the demand for workers; problems connected with the growth and training of the Members of the Hierarchy upon the Way of the Higher Evolution; other problems incident to the planetary crisis, to the Initiation of the Lord of the World Himself, and to the amazing demonstration of the success of the evolutionary process up to the present time. This success has been proven by the alignment for direct interplay of the three major planetary centres_ Shamballa, the Hierarchy and Humanity.

HIERARCHICAL PREPARATION AT THE WESAK FESTIVAL April-May 1946

We have delayed writing our usual Wesak message until this late date because of a certain event in the Hierarchy which was maturing and which necessitated our entire attention. This event was connected with the Wesak Festival and involved among other matters the formation of a new Ashram in which the Wisdom aspect would be of particular importance and not the Love aspect; this Ashram would also be related in a peculiar manner to the Illumined One . It had to be formed at this time in order to be the recipient, and then the custodian, of certain "endowments" which the Illumined One will bring at the time of the May Full Moon. The endowments concern the will-to-good of the Lord of the World, the Ancient of Days, though they do not concern goodwill as you understand that phrase. This Ashram, when duly formed and established, will enable the Members of the Hierarchy to respond to this aspect of the divine Purpose_ the Purpose which as you know lies behind and implements the Plan; this Ashram, related to the Illumined One, will be specifically under the close supervision of the Prince of Peace, and also of the Lord of Civilisation_ at this time the Master R. They are the only two Members of the Hierarchy able to register the divine Purpose (in regard to its immediate objectives) in such a manner that the entire Hierarchy can be informed and can then work unitedly and intelligently at its implementation. More than this we may not tell you about this particular hierarchical move, affecting as it does both Shamballa and the Hierarchy.

This Wesak Festival is of supreme importance because it is the first Festival since the conflict ended, because it takes place at a time when a definite orientation of the Hierarchy will take place, and because a fresh tide of spiritual impulse and directed second ray energy will flood the entire Hierarchy; the work, therefore, to be done by the Hierarchy will be far more effective. This you may anticipate and upon this you can count.

But_ as you may well have surmised_ it is the Full Moon of June which is (this year) the season of prime and outstanding importance; it is in many ways easier for Western believers and esotericists to tune in and participate in the activities of the Hierarchy when closely connected with the Lord of Love than it is in those related to the Illumined One . The main intention in these early stages of keeping the Eastern Festival of Wesak is to familiarise the Western world with the fact of the presence of the Illumined One and with His activities in connection with humanity. Such great progress has, however, taken place in the spiritual development of humanity that the Illumined One need no longer continue with His task unless He so desires_ and then only for a period of years, known to Him and the Lord of the World. He could cease His annual contact with the Hierarchy at this time, if He so chose, owing to the direct contact now established between the Hierarchy and Shamballa. This, however, He does not immediately choose to do. For a few decades longer He will cooperate with the Lord of Love in widening the channel of contact between Shamballa, the Hierarchy and Humanity. After that, He will "proceed to His Own place" in the solar Hierarchy and will no longer visit the Himalayas annually, as has been His custom for so many centuries. The Eastern Festival of Wesak (Vaisaka) and the Christian day of remembrance, Good Friday, will fade out of the consciousness of humanity in due time; they are both Festivals related to aspects of the first Ray of Power or Will. The abolition of the fear of death and the establishment of a close relation of the Hierarchy with Shamballa will render obsolete these ancient ceremonial rites.

In this message we would like to consider with you primarily the Festival of the Prince of Peace, held at the time of the Full Moon of June, and the work of the Lord of Love as He prepares Himself for the fulfilment of His true mission on Earth. The Christian Church has so distorted that mission and ruthlessly perverted the intention for which He originally manifested that a consideration of that mission is deeply needed and should be revolutionary in its effects. Starting with St. Paul, the theologians interpreted His words in such a manner that they served to bridge the gap between the spiritual future of the world and the Jewish dispensation which should have been passing out. So effective has been their work that the teachings of the loving, simple Son of God have been largely ignored; the failure of Lord of Christianity can be traced to its Jewish background (emphasised by St. Paul), which made it full of propaganda instead of loving action, which taught the blood sacrifice instead of loving service, and which emphasised the existence of a wrathful God, needing to be placated by death, and which embodied the threats of the Old Testament Jehovah in the Christian teaching of hell fire.

This situation is one which the Lord of Love / Prince of Peace is seeking to alter; it has been in preparation for His instituting a new and more correct presentation of divine truth that we have sought_ with love and understanding_ to point out the faults of the world religions, with their obsolete theologies and their lack of love, and to indicate the evils of Judaism. The present world faiths must return to their early simplicity, and orthodox Judaism, with its deep-seated hate, must slowly disappear; all must be changed in preparation for the revelation which the Lord of Sacrifice / Brotherhood will bring.

The first things which the Prince of Peace will do, beginning with this full Moon of June, will be to prepare all people everywhere (if possible through their regenerated, religious institutions) for the revelation for which all humanity waits.

It is this revelation which lies behind all the activities which now engross the attention of the Hierarchy. There have been many revelations of divine purpose down the ages, each of which uniquely altered the point of view and the pattern of living for men everywhere. There was the ancient revelation, given through the people of India, as to the existence of the Self and the Not-Self_ a revelation which is now coming to have meaning through the teaching of modern psychology; there was the revelation of the Ten Commandments, given through the Jews and_ because of the negativity shown then and today by the Jews_ given in a negative and not a positive form. The Prince of Peace & Lord of Love and Sacrifice endeavoured to offset and bring to an end the need for the Ten Commandments, by giving us the eleventh commandment; this, if kept, would entail the keeping of all the others. There was the revelation which Lord of Love Himself gave, summing it up for us in His life of service, in the love which He preached and in His constant repudiation of theological Judaism (the Sadducees and the Pharisees). This difficulty with Judaism still persists and is symbolised for us in the failure to recognise the Messiah when He came to them in their own country and let it be known that He came to the whole world and not to the Jews alone.

For this new revelation the Prince of Peace is preparing as are all the members of the Hierarchy, from the highest Chohan down to the humblest accepted noo ; it is for this that all the ashrams are getting ready; it is for this also that (in a weak and feeble manner) Christian people, those of the other world faiths, and spiritually minded people are likewise preparing.

Therefore, we have isolated (if we may use such a word) three activities to which the Lord of Sacrifice / Brotherhood is at this time dedicated:

1. The reorganisation of the world religions_ if in any way possible_ so that their out-of-date theologies, their narrow-minded emphasis and their ridiculous belief that they know what is in the Mind of God may be offset, in order that the churches may eventually be the recipients of spiritual inspiration.

2. The gradual dissolution_ again if in any way possible_ of the orthodox Jewish faith, with its obsolete teaching, its separative emphasis, its hatred of the Gentiles and its failure to recognise the Lord of Sacrifice / Brotherhood. In saying this we do not fail to recognise those Jews throughout the world who acknowledge the evils and who are not orthodox in their thinking; they belong to the aristocracy of spiritual belief to which the Hierarchy itself belongs.

3. Preparation for a revelation which will inaugurate the new era and set the note for the new world religion.

To these three efforts of the Hierarchy, superintended by the Lord of Love, another two must be added, of perhaps even greater importance. The first one is the reaction of the Hierarchy itself to the new relationship established between It and Shamballa and to that new, direct and potent channel which has lately been induced by the efforts of the Hierarchy and human invocativeness. The second activity is one leading towards a much closer relation between the Hierarchy and Humanity; this will lead eventually to the externalisation of certain of the Ashrams, and later to the appearance of the Hierarchy on earth, bringing the new revelation.

These various efforts may appear to the casual reader as relatively unimportant. This is a superficial point of view and one which meets with little sympathy from the Hierarchy. That the Jews should be rid of fear is of major importance; that they should know and recognise the Lord of Sacrifice / Love \ Brotherhood and Prince of Peace as the Messiah, and therefore find for themselves that the religion they follow is destructive of many of the finer values, is likewise of major importance; that orthodox Judaism, along with all the other faiths, should realise that there is no desire to make them Christian (in the ordinary sense of the term), but that they should all move towards some loving synthesis and eliminate their mutual antagonisms and rivalries is equally urgent, and this statement includes the Christian faiths as well. That the Vatican cease its political scheming, its exploitation of the masses and its emphasis upon ignorance is as important; that the manifold divisions of the Protestant churches be bridged is imperative. If none of these things happen, humanity is headed towards a religious conflict which will make the past conflict [1914-1945] appear like child's play; antagonisms and hatreds will embroil entire populations and the politicians of all the nations will take full advantage of the situation to precipitate a conflict which may well prove the end of humanity. There are no hatreds so great or so deep as those fostered by religion.

The Lord of Love, therefore, has to add to all the many objectives which occupy His attention still another_ the effort to avert a final conflict. This incipient conflict is contrary to the will-to-good of the Lord of the World and any world plan; it can be averted by goodwill. This is the most important statement in this message, as far as humanity is concerned.

Great and stirring events are imminent, and they will take place when the effect of the new Invocation is more pronounced and its use more general. This is primarily the responsibility of those who are affiliated with the three movements which demonstrate the part we have sought to take in the world preparation. These are: [- -], and this refers primarily to the books for which we are responsible; the [-], which constitutes a deeply esoteric mode of working, yet one of extreme simplicity; and the Goodwill movement, which has in it a factor of major importance in that this movement (embracing already as it does many, many thousands) seeks to promote right human relations with its acute and immediate appeal to the masses; it is this that the masses want essentially, and is oft what lies behind the things which they do and the plans which they make, so often ignorantly and disastrously.

You will note that our outstanding theme is that of world planning; this is the main preoccupation of the Hierarchy. This planning falls into two categories, and for these the Prince of Peace is responsible. These are:

1. The esoteric preparation for the physical appearance or the material emergence of the Hierarchy on earth; with this activity the Illumined One is definitely associated as it is connected with His final service to mankind.

2. The establishing, by all means available, of right human relations; this, as it is achieved, will swing the Ashrams gradually into external activity as need arises, and it involves the constant cooperation of the Masters.

Since 1931 we have hinted at much of this, and our activities (carried forward with these things in view) have followed the sequence outlined below:

We attempted to reach certain people in order to see how far an ashram could function in external form on earth. It has proved only a partial success and the results of our experiment have been given in the book, [- - - - -]. The effects of the experiment upon the individuals involved have not proved encouraging; the effect upon the esotericists and aspirants of the world has been most successful and has greatly enhanced the sense of reality, so essential to the recognition of the hitherto unseen Hierarchy.
2. We published books which gave the new esoteric teaching, founded on the past, of service today, and indicative of the future. In those books we isolated for the new generation of esoteric students the "truths" which were true, extracting them from the mass of imaginative thinking and consequent formulation of thoughtforms which esotericists (since the time of [- - -]) have so consistently created and presented to the enquiring public as truths. We indicated the new truths which were of significance for the future and for which the truths of the past were a needed foundation, and gave enough in outline and in "seed" concepts to show the lines along which the new world religion, the new political regimes and the new social order could be set up. We gave you the blueprints. We enunciated these as principles, leaving men free_ as must ever be the case_ to work out the details according to their contributing civilisations and their peculiar national cultures, which should unitedly create a beautiful whole and not provide barriers of separativeness as is today the case. We finally brought to the attention of the public the idea that the externalisation of the Hierarchy was a major hierarchical project, for which due preparation would have to be made.

3. The world conflict then reached a final stage; the first stage was from 1914-1918; it then proceeded in a subterranean fashion, only to erupt once more in 1939, continuing with extreme fierceness and cruelty till 1945, when the power to continue the fight ended and the atomic bomb wrote finis to the world chapter of disaster. That atomic bomb (though used only twice destructively) ended the resistance of the powers of evil because its potency is predominantly etheric. Its uses are twofold at this time:

a. As the forerunner of that release of energy which will change the mode of human living and inaugurate the new age wherein we shall not have civilisations and their emerging cultures but a world culture and an emerging civilisation, thus demonstrating the true synthesis which underlies humanity. The atomic bomb emerged from a first ray Ashram, working in conjunction with a fifth ray group; from the long range point of view, its intent was and is purely beneficent.

b. As a means in the hands of the United Nations to enforce the outer forms of peace, and thus give time for teaching on peace and on the growth of goodwill to take effect. The atomic bomb does not belong to the three nations who perfected it and who own the secrets at present_ the United States of America, Great Britain and Canada. It belongs to the United Nations for use (or let us rather hope, simply for threatened use) when aggressive action on the part of any nation rears its ugly head. It does not essentially matter whether that aggression is the gesture of any particular nation or group of nations or whether it is generated by the political groups of any powerful religious organisation, such as the Church of Rome, who are as yet unable to leave politics alone and attend to the business for which all religions are responsible_ leading human beings closer to the God of Love.

4. The world conflict now being ostensibly over and the work of restoration, leading to resurrection, being slowly implemented, the work of the Hierarchy is to foster that enthusiasm in the hearts of people everywhere which will enable them to work wholeheartedly for right human relations and the spread of that simple but tonic quality, goodwill. It is enthusiasm in the spiritual sense which is lacking today, even among those who see the Mind of the Lord of Love and the Plans of the Hierarchy as existing in factual usefulness; those who have for years read our teachings on goodwill with real belief in what we say but who evidence no willingness to sacrifice time or money, block the growth of the movement. It is the task of the Hierarchy to promote goodwill as the first step in Their plans, and it is that quality which is today closest to the heart of the Prince of Peace; "goodwill to men," or rather among m-w-c, was the primary stage in the threefold promise made by the angels at His Birth:

a. Goodwill, leading to right human relations, leading to

b. Peace on Earth, leading to

c. Glory to God.

Analysed, these words simply mean that goodwill will result in right human relations in that centre which we call Humanity; this will produce the possibility of that peace which characterises the Hierarchy appearing on earth, and leading to the glory of God, which animates the activity of Shamballa, the centre where the Will of God is known. Therefore, intelligent relationship, practical love and the full expression of the divine will are bound to occur, if the correct sequence of activities is followed. At present, even the first of them remains a hope. The factors of the failure of the religious and political groups and the apathy of the mass of m-w-c have greatly complicated the task of the Hierarchy.

5. Our personal work has been to bring all this to the attention of the general public through our interpretation of the Problems of Humanity and bring it to the point where simplicity of purpose, an inspiring and flaming ardour and a minimum of organisation may implement the new presentation of goodwill as it affects and changes the sovereign world religions which are forgetful of the words of the Prince of Peace, "My kingdom is not of this world"; as it permeates into the political conferences of world statesmen and rulers, and as it governs the decisions of science and economics. In so doing and in the direful task of pointing out mistakes and errors of ancient standing, wrong and disastrous attitudes and human separativeness, an inevitable opposition has been evoked; had there been none, our efforts would have been futile. We have said naught that is not true and we retract no single word which we have said. There are many who prefer the esoteric truths anent the antahkarana, the world constitution, the doctrine of man, the Law of Rebirth and the many intricate teachings related to world planning. These they have received in full measure from us. There are others who desire information anent the Hierarchy, the work and standing of the Masters, the training to be given to noos and initiates. This again they have received. We have now dealt in the past few years with world abuses and the problems with which humanity is faced in this period of restoration_ of God's plan for man, and not of former conditions.

It is interesting to note that when the Hierarchy seeks to meet the need of the masses for better conditions, and to aid in the changing of ecclesiastical and political abuses, m-w-c are apt then to withdraw their interest because the task is hard, or to repudiate the statements anent that which is evil because (from their point of view) it is not possible for the Hierarchy to find fault or take a stand against wrong, just as many repudiated the fact that the Hierarchy took its stand, during the conflict, upon the side of the Forces fighting for the freedom of humanity and refused in any way to endorse those fighting on the side of darkness.

The Hierarchy is a great fighting body today, fighting for the souls of m-w-c, fighting all that blocks the expansion of the human consciousness, fighting all that limits human freedom (we said not license) and fighting to remove those factors and barriers which militate against the return of the Lord of Love and the emergence of the Hierarchy as a fully functioning body on earth. There is nothing weak, vacillating, sentimental or neutral in the attitude of the Hierarchy; this must be grasped by humanity, and the strength and insight as well as the love of the Hierarchy be counted upon.

We have in the above remarks enumerated for you certain of the objectives facing the Hierarchy at this time and involving the personal attention of the Lord of Love; they all have a potent and beneficent effect upon humanity. Let us enumerate them in concise form, because it is essential that there be clear perception of the emerging values on the part of workers of all grades and kinds in the world, for otherwise perception is not possible. To each point enumerated we will append in a few brief words the reason why it is regarded as important:

1. The Reorganisation of the World Religions.

Reasons

a. To make way for the World Religion, universal religion.

b. To return humanity to the simplicity which is in the Prince of Peace.

c. To rid the world of theology and ecclesiasticism.

2. The Gradual Dissolution of Orthodox Judaism.

Reasons

a. Because of its presentation of a wrathful Jehovah, caring only for His chosen people. This is a basic evil. The Lord of the World, the God in whom we live and move and have our being, is totally otherwise.

b. Because of its separativeness.

c. Because it is so ancient that its teachings are largely obsolete.

d. Because when the Jews become spiritual they will greatly benefit mankind, for they are found in every land.

3. Preparation for a New Revelation.

Reasons

a. Because where there is no vision the people perish.

b. Because human expectancy indicates its emerging presence.

c. Because the new Invocation will inevitably bring it to us.

4. The Reaction of the Hierarchy to Shamballa.

Reasons

a. Produces a direct channel.

b. Conditions the inflow of power energy.

c. Relates the will-to-good to goodwill.

d. Creates new constructive tensions and new ashrams.

5. A Closer Relation of the Hierarchy to Humanity.

Reasons

a. Produces (in the near future) the externalisation of certain ashrams.

b. Leads to the reappearance of the Hierarchy on earth.

c. Recognises that man's point of development warrants this.

d. Presents a nearing opportunity for revelation.

6. An Effort to avert Conflict.

Reasons

a. Because the next conflict would annihilate the greater part of the human race.

b. Because, having a religious basis, the hate involved would be greater far than anything hitherto known.

c. Because Shamballa would be involved, and this has never been the case.

You can see therefore how critical, spiritually, are these times, and how urgent is the task which confronts the Hierarchy and its workers on earth. The conflict may be over in the physical sense, but great issues are still involved and undetermined and can lead either to peace or to a renewal of those conditions in which wars are generated and which, once generated, cannot be avoided.

It is with all these foregoing factors in mind that we approach the next two great Festivals: the Wesak Festival and the Lord of Sacrifice / Love \ Brotherhood's Unique Occasion. One point we must make here, and we make it with great joy: this year 1946 marks the beginning of a cycle in which humanity is more closely involved in the Festivals than ever before and in which they can take a much more important part than ever before. The Wesak Festival has long been kept in many countries and_ as time goes on and the instruction of the masses proceeds_ the meeting held at the time of the May Full Moon will assume great importance, but its keynote will be changed. What the new keynote will be has not yet been announced, and will not be for 35 years. As we earlier pointed out, its significance, and that of Good Friday, belong to the past and their usefulness is nearly finished. It is the intention of the Illumined One and the Lord of Sacrifice / Love \ Brotherhood that in each country there should eventually be someone who will act as Their Representative at the time of the two Festivals, so that the distribution of spiritual energy from the first great Aspect or Ray will be direct from the Illumined One (and later Shamballa) to the Prince of Peace, and then from the Lord of Love to those noos in every country who can be overshadowed, and so act as channels for the direct current of energy.

The same procedure will be followed at the time of the Full Moon of June, except that Shamballa will not be so involved, and with the difference that at the May Festival it will be a first ray noo who will be overshadowed, and at the June Festival a second ray noo will represent the Lord of Love in every land. This can mean either the soul or the personality ray of the noo .

It has not been possible to organise this development this year, but next year a beginning can be made, even if only three or four countries can work under this inspiration. The effects of this development will be far-reaching, though not immediately apparent to the onlooker.

This year, at the great Festival in the Himalayas at which the Illumined One will appear as usual, He has let it be known that His main duty is to bring the initial inflow of the threefold energy which the Invocation invokes and will continue to invoke for many decades. From the Mind of God, Light will flow through Him to the waiting world of m-w-c_ that human centre whose eternal mission is to bring light to all created lives. From the Heart of God, He will bring to the Hierarchy, via the Lord of Love, that deep unending inflow of Love which will make it possible for the Hierarchy to perform its hard task and externalise itself. It is not possible for human beings to realise the sacrifice and the hardship which this emergence will entail, and only a vast inflow of divine love can make it possible.

An effort also will be made to relate Shamballa, "the Centre where the Will of God is known," directly to the New Group of World Servers, via those Ashrams which are working along the lines of outer, practical goodwill. The reception of this energising will-to-good should produce a definite "stepping-up" or increase of goodwill and enable the [- -] to proceed with greater momentum this coming autumn and winter; it will take the entire summer for the needed assimilation by those engineering this movement all over the world.

The absorption of the Love which flows from the Heart of God to the Hierarchy will necessarily have widespread effects; however, one of the most immediate will affect the [-] and increase the potency of the network of light and of goodwill, already in existence. You can see, therefore, from all the above, how much closer the Illumined One is coming this year to humanity. He now finds it possible to permit human beings to know His specific objective; this has never before been the case. It is the result of conflict and the efforts of the Hierarchy to bring out in the human being certain ennobling qualities and spiritual reactions which the stress of conflict could evoke. This year will mark a unique and peculiar opportunity, based on the fact that there has not yet been time for people to slip back into the old ways of thinking or for the setting up of any reactionary structures. This may not be the case next year and therefore it would be wise to take as full advantage as possible of the coming Festivals. Those who have faith and vision are asked to link up (imaginatively, because anything else would scarcely be possible) with the Illumined One, then offer themselves as channels for the spiritual potencies which He will bring.

The Festival of June which is so uniquely the Lord of Love's, and which emphasises His relationship to humanity, in reality covers three whole days, each with a different keynote:

1. The keynote of Love in its hierarchical sense_ free from sentiment, emotion and personal emphasis_ a love that sacrifices and understands, that acts with strength and decision, and that works on behalf of the whole and not in the interests of any group or individual.

2. The keynote of Resurrection, emphasising the new note of livingness, of the living Prince of Peace and of that "life more abundantly" which the conflict has made possible by forcing a return to the real values.

3. The keynote of Contact, of a closer relation between the Prince of Peace and His people, between the Hierarchy and Humanity.

The word "keynote" has been deliberately chosen and signifies the sound which preceded each major inflow at the May Festival; these energies will be released at a solemn ceremony on each of the three days. At each ceremony the Lord of Love will say the new Invocation alone, and then the united Hierarchy will intone the stanza alone, invoking light, love and the will-to-good (one on each of the three days). Those noos or initiates who happen to be interested and watching the [-] or the [- -] will have them in their minds as they say the first and third stanzas, and the [- - - -] will receive some attention when the second stanza is chanted.

We would call your attention, therefore, to the interest shown by the Hierarchy in the embryonic efforts in which you are engaged and which we started; we would point out, however, that the attention paid is not exclusive, but that wherever two or three are gathered together in the name of the Master of the Hierarchy, energy will flow; that wherever goodwill is a goal and evokes effort in no matter what form, the energy of the will-to-good will make itself felt, and that the New Group of World Servers is a far larger group than just the few known to you. Today its numbers are several million.

The result of this solemn three days of invocation will be followed by a climaxing day wherein the Hierarchy will unitedly, and led by the Prince of Peace, pronounce the entire Invocation, prefacing each stanza with its appropriate keynote, again sounded in unison. These notes you cannot know, but if, for instance, a very large number of the New Group of World Servers were brought together, their united OM might approximate the appropriate keynote.

It will be apparent to you, therefore, that in the new cycle now beginning with the climaxing of the conflict and the formation of the United Nations, the Festivals of May and June not only become more closely linked, but the procedure has been changed and the effect on humanity intensified. We would have all who care to meet together at these Festivals to try and do so subjectively (wherever they may find themselves) and to participate intelligently in the ordained ceremonies. We would ask all to think imaginatively and to act as if they were accepted noos or at least on the periphery of some ashram. We are asking you to take part in these two ceremonies with a full play of the imagination; these ceremonies will later be externalised at some centre in every country. A trained nucleus and a devoted band of believers is in process of being gathered together (though only as yet in the consciousness of the Hierarchy), and though at the present time there will be no outer ceremonies or any knowledge as to who will be chosen in the various lands to represent the Hierarchy, in deed and in truth, the first step towards human participation is being made this year.

The knowledge of this will give purpose and fixed intention to all of you who have for years kept these Festivals. In truth, We bring you the invitation of the Hierarchy to share in Their ancient work, and not_ as in the past_ to play the part of interested onlookers. We would warn you that, if you do succeed in any measure of participation, it will be necessary to guard yourselves from overstimulation and to take steps wisely to use, on behalf of humanity, the energy with which you may be charged.

This knowledge will be particularly useful to those who are occupied with any of the groups and organisations which are responsive to hierarchical interests. True participation may lead to the sudden conviction of the reality of that which we have told you; faith and belief and common-sense will then no longer be needed, and you will know.

We have here told you the things which the Prince of Peace has planned for the immediate future. We have told you also some of the things which He and the Masters must do as preparatory steps to the new world which can and will supersede the old unhappy world that lies immediately behind us. We have chosen to speak to you of these activities in which it is now possible for you to share, with the exception of those which affect the relation between Shamballa and the Hierarchy. However, those who are initiates of the third degree (and there are quite a few working on the earth among m-w-c at this time) can share in all of them.

This is an intensely practical message and calls for your renewed pledge to serve humanity and to find your way into an Ashram where that service may be directed. It calls for sacrifice until it hurts, and where it touches you the most; it calls for a joyous sense of unity with that station of power and light which we call the Hierarchy and which stands ready_ as never before_ to share with humanity that power and that light to the limit of human capacity to use it.

We beg you, in closing, to aid in two matters which are of importance to Him Whom all noos, initiates and spiritual m-w-c have loved and followed for nearly three thousand years, the Lord of Love. (we are referring here to His appearance as Shri Krishna and as one other who was little known but who did a great work in still earlier centuries.) It is work in preparation for His coming.

We beg you to shoulder the responsibility of distributing the Invocation on as large a scale as possible and in every country. It is of great potency, and when used by m-w-c of all faiths can aid in the process of averting conflict. We ask you also to make possible the wide distribution of the data The Problems of Humanity which we have written, for they strengthen the hands of those who are already seeking to deal with these problems and they bring the need to the attention of the unawakened. This will require sacrifice, for it calls for the expenditure of money; even the Hierarchy works through normal channels and needs money, and even the Prince of Peace has need of financial resources in order to reach the needy sons/daughters of men. We ask your aid and we await your decision.

That He Whom we serve may be nearer to all of us than ever before, that the work of establishing right human relations may proceed apace, and that light and love may stream forth from Shamballa and the Hierarchy over all of you who love your fellowmen is the earnest wish, accompanied by our blessing, for you at this season of the will-to-good.

&&&&&&&

The Goodwill Work

Prior to September, 1939, the objectives of our world-wide work, over a period of nine years, were the spreading of world goodwill, the discovery of the men of goodwill throughout the world, and the endeavour to teach the meaning of the will-to-good. This is the main task of the New Group of World Servers. We inculcated a non-separative attitude and the need for right human relations. We endeavoured to make clear that differing forms of government and varying ideological systems were right and possible, provided that human beings lived together in goodwill and recognised their blood brother/sisterhood.

Then humanity made its decision to fight, and the conflict broke out: one group, the instigators of the conflict, fighting to acquire material power, the glory of a nation and the subjugation of the defenceless; and the other, fighting to preserve its own liberty of action, the preservation of its integrity, the right of the little nations and the spiritual values. Immediately, the issue was abundantly clear in the minds of those who were in touch with human affairs; immediately certain nations took sides against the forces of aggression; immediately, other nations, biased by similar distorted ideologies and equally selfish purposes, stood with the aggressor nation; immediately, panic swept the remaining nations, who took refuge in short-sighted neutrality and defence programmes_ a neutrality and programmes which have proved quite futile to protect them.

Where, then, should the New Group of World Servers stand? What should the men of goodwill do? Should they side with the totalitarian powers because in so doing they will bring the conflict more rapidly to an end, or should they stand on the side of the neutral powers, frantically pursuing ineffective peace programmes, policies of appeasement, and play into the hands of the totalitarian powers?

Humanity having decided to fight out the battle physically, there was nothing left to do but issue a challenge to the men of goodwill to take their stand on the side of such action as would release humanity through the destruction of the evil forces. These had determined to prove that might was right. Therefore, the forces fighting for progress and civilisation had to meet force with force.

The challenge was taken up by the democracies who stand for human rights and liberty. Because of the decision to fight on the side of spiritual progress, the spiritual forces of the planet had no alternative but to align themselves on the side of the allied democracies, and endeavour to awaken the neutral nations to the issue. They ranged themselves against the leaders of the aggressor nations, though not against their poor deluded or subdued peoples. They too must be liberated by the allied democracies.

On the basis of an active will-to-good, the men of goodwill, acting under the inspiration of the New Group of World Servers, had no alternative but to take their stand with the spiritual forces and join the struggle for the liberation of humanity from totalitarian ambitions and the intentions of a group of evil men. But the spirit of goodwill must be, steadily and unchangingly, the motivating impulse. No hate must be allowed to enter in. The greatest good of the greatest number lies today in the release of the nations from the domination of the totalitarian powers.

The Pacifist Position

The second point upon which we would touch is the arguments brought out by the pacifists of the world. All true and good people are pacifically minded and all hate conflict. This is a fact which the academic idealist and pacifist often forgets. Such people tell us that two wrongs do not make a right; and to meet murder with murder (which is their definition of conflict) is sinful; that conflict is evil (which no one denies) and that one must not take part in it. They contend that thinking thoughts of peace and of love can put the world straight and end the conflict. Such people, fighting the existent fact of conflict, usually do little or nothing concrete to right the wrongs which are responsible for the conflict, and permit their defence_ personal, municipal, national and international_ to be undertaken by others. The sincerity of these people cannot be questioned.

It should be remembered, in countering these ideas and in justifying the fighting spirit of the Christian democracies, that it is motive that counts. Conflict can be and is mass murder, where the motive is wrong. It can be sacrifice and right action, where the motive is right. The slaying of a man-woman-child in the act of killing the defenceless is not regarded as murder. The principle remains the same, whether it is killing an individual who is murdering, or fighting a nation which is warring on the defenceless. The material means, which evil uses for selfish ends, can also be employed for good purposes. The death of the physical body is a lesser evil than the setting back of civilisation, the thwarting of the divine purposes of the human spirit, the negating of all spiritual teaching, and the control of men's minds and liberties. Conflict is always evil, but it can be the lesser of two evils, as is the case today.

The present conflict, if carried forward to a successful completion by the defeat of the totalitarian powers, constitutes a far lesser evil than the subjugation of many nations to the unparalleled cupidity, the appalling educational process and the defiance of all recognised spiritual values by the Axis powers. If the totalitarian powers should conquer, it would mean years of turmoil and revolt; their victory would result in untold misery.

It is no doubt an undeniable spiritual truth that right thought can change and save the world, but it is also true that there are not enough people able to think to do this work. Also, there is not enough time in which to do it. The thoughts of peace are mainly founded upon a stubborn idealism that loves the ideal more than humanity. They are based also upon an unrecognised fear of conflict and upon an individual inertia which prefers the dream world of wishful thinking to the shouldering of responsibility for the security of humanity.

Thus briefly have we sought to make the position of the New Group of World Servers clear as it fights for the rights of man, for the spiritual future of humanity, and for the new world order. What we have now to say will fall into four parts:

I. The world as it exists today. The present situation is the result of past tendencies, of underlying pressures and of human decisions.

II. The new world order. This we will contrast with the old order and with the so-called "new order" of the totalitarian powers.

III. Some problems involved. Four major world problems will call for discussion and these we must consider.

IV. The task ahead. We will then deal with the interlude until peace is achieved plus some suggestions for the coming period of reconstruction.

I. THE WORLD TODAY

What are the causes which have produced present world conditions? What are the underlying pressures which are producing the present chaos or those which can produce eventual order? Before there can be correction, there must be appreciation of error; there must be understanding of the predisposing causes producing the necessity; there must be realisation of the general guilt and a shared responsibility for the evil conditions; there must be determination to make restitution, and to cease from evil doing.

The tendency to fasten the conflict on Hitler and his gang of evil men should not blind us to the causes which have made his evil work possible. He is mainly a precipitating agency, for through him world selfishness and cruelty have been brought to a focus. But, as the Prince of Peace has said: "Woe unto the world because of offences! for it must needs be that offences come; but woe to that man by whom the offence cometh." (Matthew 18:7.) The causes of this rampant evil are inherent in humanity itself.

Ancient and untrammelled selfishness has ever been a characteristic of man-woman-child; the desire for power and for possession has ever motivated men and nations; cruelty, lust, and sacrifice of the higher values to the lower have been deeply rooted human habits for ages. Of these ancient habits of thought and behaviour all peoples and all nations are guilty. Steadily, as the world grew closer, the lines of cleavage and the antagonism of the nations increased, and thus the present

conflict (beginning in 1914) is the inevitable result of wrong thought, selfish goals and ancient hatreds. Individualistic interest, separative aims and aggressive desire march towards their inevitable finale_ conflict and chaos.

The economic situation also provides a symbol of this condition. The nations divide themselves into the "Haves" and the "Have Nots," and thus bring in the present era of gangsterism. Organised gangs in the United States came into being as an expression of these tendencies in national life. In the international world, three nations are now playing the same part. The allied nations and the United States are recognising the menace of national and international gangsterism and are endeavouring to crush it. But_ and this is the point of importance_ these conditions have been made possible by humanity as a whole.

Materialism and Spirituality

There are today three major human trends: First of all, a trend towards a spiritual and free way of life; secondly, a trend towards intellectual unfoldment; and lastly, a potent trend towards material living and aggression. At present, the last of these innate tendencies is in the saddle, with the second, the intellectual attitude, throwing its weight upon the side of the material goals. A relatively small group is throwing the weight of human aspiration upon the side of the spiritual values. The conflict between the pairs of opposites_ materialism and spirituality_ is raging fiercely. Only as men turn away from material aggression and towards spiritual objectives will the world situation change, and_ motivated by goodwill_ force the aggressors back to their own place and release humanity from fear and force. We are today reaping the results of our own sowing. The recognition of the cause of the problem provides humanity with the opportunity to end it. The time has arrived in which it is possible to institute those changes in attitude which will bring an era of peace and goodwill, founded on right human relations.

These two forces_ materialism and spirituality_ face each other. What will be the outcome? Will men arrest the evil and initiate a period of understanding, cooperation and right relationship, or will they continue the process of selfish planning and of economic and militant competition? This question must be answered by the clear thinking of the masses and by the calm and unafraid challenges of the democracies.

On all sides the need for a new world order is being recognised. The totalitarian powers are talking of the "new order in Europe"; the idealists and thinkers are unfolding schemes and plans which vision entirely new conditions that will bring the old bad order to an end. There is a constant demand for the Allies to state their peace aims and indicate clearly what adjustments will be made after the conflict, because a vision of the future world policy will help humanity through the present crisis.

Historical Background

Throughout the Middle Ages, the rule of powerful monarchs, the spread of empires and the march of national conquerors were outstanding characteristics. A relatively small number of people were involved. The Church of the time had immense power in all European countries; it controlled the education of the people, but laid no foundation for right political thought. The history of the past is the history of many forms of government. Races and nations have come and gone. Political regimes and religious forms have played their part, have persisted or disappeared. The sorry history of humanity has been one of kings and potentates, rulers and warriors, presidents and dictators_ rising into power at the expense of their own or other nations. Conquerors come and go_ Akbar, Genghis Khan, the Pharaohs, Alexander the Great, Caesar, Charlemagne, William the Conqueror, Napoleon, Hitler and Mussolini. These have all upset the rhythm of their times and have come to power through aggression and slaughter. As the nations grew more closely interrelated, their influence and their field of expression increased. The growing means of communication brought this about; Great Britain knew nothing of the movements of Alexander; the peoples of America knew naught about Genghis Khan; but the sound of the marching armies of Napoleon was heard over a far wider area, and the triumphs of Hitler_ diplomatic and military_ are known throughout the world.

The totalitarian powers have turned the world into one armed camp_ for offence or defence. Motivating all these conquerors was lust for gold, lust for land, lust for power, lust for personal triumph. The modern dictators are no exception. They bring nothing new.

World Anarchy

The history of the world has been built around the theme of conflict; its points of crisis have been the great battles. The thought of revenge motivates some nations; the demand for the righting of ancient historical wrongs influences others; the restitution of lands, earlier held, directs the acts of others. For instance: the ancient glory of the Roman Empire must be restored_ at the expense of the helpless little peoples; the culture of France must be paramount and French security must outweigh all other considerations; British imperialism has in the past outraged other nations; German hegemony and "living space" must dominate Europe, and the German superman must be the arbiter of human life; American isolationism would leave humanity defenceless in its hour of need and hand men over to the rule of Hitler; Russia, in her silence, cannot be trusted; Japan is upsetting the balance of power in Asia. Such is the picture today. Anarchy rules the world; famine stalks the inhabitants of Europe; the civilian population of cities, the women and children, are in grave danger of injury and death and are forced to live underground; pestilence appears; there is no safety on land or sea or in the air; the nations are on the verge of financial ruin; science has turned to the invention of the instruments of death; the populations of cities and entire districts are shifted from one part of a country to another; families and homes are broken up; there is intense fear, hopeless looking into the future, bewildered questioning, suicide and murder; the smoke of countless fires blackens the skies; the seas are strewn with dead and with wrecked vessels; the thunder of guns and the noise of exploding bombs are heard in approximately twenty countries; conflict rises up from the waters, marches over the lands and descends from the skies.

It is to this situation that the old order has brought humanity. It is to this disaster that man-woman-child's cruelty and selfishness have tended; no nations are exempt from this criticism, and all are more rapidly moved by selfish purpose than by the spirit of sacrifice.

Even idealistic America can only be aroused into action by an appeal to her self-interest and security.

For our encouragement let us recognise that the same humanity which has brought about these terrible conditions can also create the new world, the new order and the new way of life. The selfish, wicked past can give way to a future of understanding, of cooperation, of right human relations and of good. Separativeness must be superseded by unity. The combination of totalitarian aggressors, of allied democracies and of anxious neutral nations must be changed into a world which is characterised by one endeavour_ the establishing of those relations which will produce the happiness and peace of the whole, and not only of the part.

II. THE NEW WORLD ORDER

We assume that our readers recognise some intelligent or spiritual direction of humanity. We care not by what name they call that guiding Purpose. Some may call it the Will of God; others, the inevitable trends of the evolutionary process; still others may believe in the spiritual forces of the planet; others may regard it as the spiritual Hierarchy of the planet, or the great Light Lodge; many millions speak of the guidance of the Lord of Love and His noos. Be that as it may, there is a universal recognition of a guiding Power, exerting pressure throughout the ages, which appears to be leading all towards an ultimate good.

Some definite direction has led man from the stage of primeval man to that evolutionary point where a Plato, a Shakespeare, a da Vinci, a Beethoven can appear. Some power has evoked man's capacity to formulate ideas, to produce systems of theology, of science and of government; some inner motivating power has given man-woman-child the ability to create beauty, to discover the secrets of nature; some realisation of divine responsibility lies behind the philanthropy, the educational systems, and the welfare movements throughout the world. The progress of the human spirit has been one of irresistible unfoldment, of a developing appreciation of reality, beauty and wisdom. Instinct has developed into intellect; intellect is beginning to unfold into intuition. The significance of God, the registering of man's divine potentialities, and the increasing capacity to understand and to share in the thought processes of others_ all these indicate progress and unfoldment.

This picture of the beauty of the human spirit must be placed beside the earlier picture of man-woman-child's selfishness and cruelty, of man’s inhumanity to man. Both pictures are true, but only the one of beauty is eternal; the other is but transient. Man is a composite of higher and lower expressions, and behind all the conflicts and difficulties which accompany man's progress through the ages lies this major factor_ an ancient persistent fight between man's spiritual aspiration and his/her material desires. This condition is today brought to a focus in the conflict raging between the totalitarian powers and the nations which are fighting for the rights of the human spirit and for the freedom of humanity.

Our use of the word spiritual has nothing to do with the use of this word as the orthodox religions use it, except in so far as the religious expression is a part of the general spirituality of mankind. Everything is spiritual which tends towards understanding, towards kindness, towards that which is productive of beauty and which can lead man on to a fuller expression of his/her divine potentialities. All is evil which drives man-woman-child deeper into materialism, which omits the higher values of living, which endorses selfishness, which sets up barriers to the establishing of right human relations, and which feeds the spirit of separateness, of fear, of revenge.

On the basis of these distinctions, it is surely apparent that God is on the side of the allied nations, for it cannot be supposed that the Lord of Love is on the side of Hitler and the rule of cruel aggression. The spiritual Hierarchy of the planet is throwing the weight of its strength against the Axis powers just in so far as the spiritually minded peoples of the world can collaborate, for there can be no coercion of man's free will. No one is afraid of the allied nations; the situation has not been precipitated by the Allies; their methods are not the methods of lying propaganda and the terrorising of the weak and the defenceless. Facts prove these points, and it is this recognition which lies behind the constant aid of the United States. The way of living and the spiritual objects of the democracies are recognised by all, and it is these which are threatened by the totalitarian concepts of life. Through the democracies humanity speaks.

The Axis World Order

The totalitarian order must go because it is contrary to the spiritual vision. The world order, as visioned by Hitler, is based upon the subjection of the weak to the rule of a super-Germany; it is one in which the life of the little nations will be allowed to go on just in so far as they serve the need of Germany. The lesser Axis powers are permitted existence only because they benefit German aims_ Italy, to give Germany scope in the Mediterranean; Japan, to handle the Asiatic problem which is too large for Germany to handle alone. It is an order whose intention is that the best of all industrial and agricultural products shall go to Germany and the unwanted residue to the little nations. It is an order in which the educational processes will be controlled by the dominant super-race. All departments of knowledge will be subordinated to the glorification of Germany. Germany will be portrayed as the seed of all world glory, and as the ruthless saviour of mankind; the beauties of conflict, of struggle and of physical strength will be emphasised, and these so-called admirable objectives of the human spirit will be developed to produce a race of men in whom the "effeminate" beauties of loving kindness and wise consideration for others will find no place.

We would call your attention to the teaching now being given to the German youth. Might is right. The German belongs to the super-race, and all other races are inferior. Only a chosen aristocracy should be permitted the privilege of education and of rule. The masses of the people are no more than cattle and exist only to be slaves of the superior race. Conflict is to men what childbirth is to women. Conflict is a natural process and therefore eternally right. All sources of supply must be controlled by Germany, and consequently even those nations at present neutral must be brought under the German sphere of influence. The totalitarian powers will dominate the economic system of the world and control all imports and exports. The standard of living in both hemispheres will be lowered; everything will be related to the good of Germany, and no other nation will be considered. Christian teaching and Christian ethics must necessarily be eliminated, because Germany regards Lord of Christianity and its divine Founder as effeminate and weak, as emphasising the softer qualities of human nature, and as responsible for the decadence of all nations, except Germany. Lord of Christianity must also be overthrown because it is based on Jewish sources; the rule of the Lord of Love must come to an end, because only the rule of force is right.

In the world order of the Axis powers, the individual has no rights; he/she has no freedom except in so far as he/she serves the state; there will be no liberty of thought or conscience, all issues will be decided by the state, and the private citizen will have no right to an opinion. Men will be drafted like slaves into the service of the state.

Such is the picture of the order which the Axis powers are preparing to impose upon the world, and to this their own words testify. Only insight into the true nature of this crisis, a determination to face the facts, and fearlessness will suffice to defeat Hitler. This conquering fearlessness must be based on a recognition of the spiritual values involved, on a belief in God, and on a commonsense which is determined to establish security, right human relations and liberty.

It is important that people face up to the facts immediately. They must realise what is the nature of the world order which Hitler is preparing to enforce, and what lies ahead of humanity if the Axis powers triumph. It is essential that the little children of the world be rescued from this overshadowing evil and from the false education to which they will be subjected if the totalitarian powers hold Europe in their grasp. The intensive culture given to the youth of Germany during the past twenty years has proved the effects of environing mental attitudes. These boys who roll their tanks and fly their planes over the countries of Europe and who wage conflict on women and children are the product of an educational system, and are therefore the victims of an evil process. The children of Germany must be rescued from the future which Hitler plans, as well as the children of other countries; the women of Germany must be set free from fear, as must the women in other lands; the population of Germany must also be liberated from the evil rule of Hitler. This is recognised by the allied nations. Make no mistake. The German is as dear to the heart of humanity, to God, to the Lord of Love \ Brotherhood and to all right thinking people as are any other people. The German must be rescued from Hitler's world order as much as the Pole, the Jew, the Czech or any captive nation. In effecting this freedom, the allied nations and the neutral powers must preserve the spirit of goodwill, even when using force, which is the only means of conquest the totalitarian powers understand.

Steps Towards the New World Order

In contradistinction to the totalitarian world order, what should the rest of the world plan? Towards what world objectives should the democracies work? Utopian schemes, idealistic forms of government and cultural living processes have ever been the playthings of the human mind, down through the centuries. But these Utopias have been so far ahead of possibility that their presentation seems useless. They are most of them wholly impractical.

Certain immediate possibilities and attainable objectives can, however, be worked out, given a definite will-to-good and patience on the part of humanity.

Certain major and spiritual premises should lie back of all efforts to formulate the new world order. Let us state some of them:

1. The new world order must meet the immediate need and not be an attempt to satisfy some distant, idealistic vision.

2. The new world order must be appropriate to a world which has passed through a destructive crisis and to a humanity which is badly shattered by the experience.

3. The new world order must lay the foundation for a future world order which will be possible only after a time of recovery, of reconstruction, and of rebuilding.

4. The new world order will be founded on the recognition that all men are equal in origin and goal but that all are at differing stages of evolutionary development; that personal integrity, intelligence, vision and experience, plus a marked goodwill, should indicate leadership. The domination of the proletariat over the aristocracy and bourgeoisie, as in Russia, or the domination of an entrenched aristocracy over the proletariat and middle classes, as has been until lately the case in Great Britain, must disappear. The control of labour by capital or the control of capital by labour must also go.

5. In the new world order, the governing body in any nation should be composed of those who work for the greatest good of the greatest number and who at the same time offer opportunity to all, seeing to it that the individual is left free. Today the men of vision are achieving recognition, thus making possible a right choice of leaders. It was not possible until this century.

6. The new world order will be founded on an active sense of responsibility. The rule will be "all for one and one for all." This attitude among nations will have to be developed. It is not yet present.

7. The new world order will not impose a uniform type of government, a synthetic religion and a system of standardisation upon the nations. The sovereign rights of each nation will be recognised and its peculiar genius, individual trends and racial qualities will be permitted full expression. In one particular only should there be an attempt to produce unity, and that will be in the field of education.

8. The new world order will recognise that the produce of the world, the natural resources of the planet and its riches, belong to no one nation but should be shared by all. There will be no nations under the category "haves" and others under the opposite category. A fair and properly organised distribution of the wheat, the oil and the mineral wealth of the world will be developed, based upon the needs of each nation, upon its own internal resources and the requirements of its people. All this will be worked out in relation to the whole.

9. In the preparatory period for the new world order there will be a steady and regulated disarmament. It will not be optional. No nation will be permitted to produce and organise any equipment for destructive purposes or to infringe the security of any other nation. One of the first tasks of any future peace conference will be to regulate this matter and gradually see to the disarming of the nations.

These are the simple and general premises upon which the new world order must begin its work. These preliminary stages must be kept fluid and experimental; the vision of possibility must never be lost, and the foundations must be preserved inviolate, but the intermediate processes and the experimentations must be carried forward by men who, having the best interests of the whole at heart, can change the detail of organisation whilst preserving the life of the organism.

Right Human Relations

The objective of their work can be summed up thus: the new world order will facilitate the establishing of right human relations, based on justice, on the recognition of inherited rights, on opportunity for all_ irrespective of race, colour or creed_ on the suppression of crime and selfishness through right education, and on the recognition of divine potentialities in man-woman-child as well as the recognition of a divine directing Intelligence in Whom man lives, and moves and has his/her being.

The difficulties confronting the nations when the conflict is over may seem insuperable but_ given vision, goodwill and patience_ they can be solved. Assuming that humanity will not rest until the aggressor nations are subdued, it will be necessary for the conquering democracies to be generous, merciful, understanding and attentive to the voice of the people as a whole. It is that voice (usually sound in its pronouncements) which must be evoked, recognised and listened to, and not the voices of the separative exponents of any ideology, of any form of government, religion or party. The objective of those who are entrusted with the straightening out of the world is not the imposition of democracy upon the entire world or to force Lord of Christianity upon a world of diversified religions. It is surely to foster the best elements in any national government to which the people may subscribe, or which they intelligently endorse. Each nation should recognise that its form of government may be suited to it and quite unsuited to another nation; it should be taught that the function of each nation is the perfecting of its national life, rhythm and machinery, so that it can be an efficient co-partner with all other nations.

It is equally essential that the new world order should develop in humanity a sense of divinity and of relationship to God, yet with no emphasis upon racial theologies and separative creeds. The essentials of religious and political beliefs must be taught and a new simplicity of life inculcated. Today, these are lost in the emphasis laid upon material possession, upon things and upon money. The problem of money will have to be faced; the problem of the distribution of wealth_ whether natural or human_ will need careful handling and a compromise reached between those nations which possess unlimited resources and those who have few or none; the problem of the varying forms of national government must be faced with courage and insight; the restoration_ psychological, spiritual and physical_ of mankind must constitute a primary responsibility. The sense of security must be put on a firm basis_ the basis of right relationship, and not the basis of force. men must feel secure because they are seeking to develop international goodwill and can trust each other, and are not therefore dependent upon the strength of their armies and fleets.

The recognition of a spiritual Hierarchy which is working through the New Group of World Servers must steadily grow in some form or another. This will happen when the world statesmen and the rulers of the different nations and governing bodies_ political and religious_ are men of vision, spiritually motivated and selflessly inspired.

The future world order will be the effective expression of a fusion of the inner spiritual way of life and the outer civilised and cultural way of acting; this is a definite possibility because humanity, in its upper brackets, has already developed the power to live in the intellectual and physical worlds simultaneously. Many today are living in the spiritual world also. Tomorrow there will be many more.

III. SOME PROBLEMS INVOLVED

The new world order will be confronted with many problems. These problems will not be solved by the imposition of a solution by means of force, as in the Axis world order. They will be solved by right educational processes and by understanding the objectives of the true world order. They fall roughly into four categories: the racial problem, the economic problem, the problem of government, and the religious problem.

The Racial Problem

There is no way of solving the racial problem by legislation, segregation, or by the effort to produce national blocs, as in the case in Germany today when she proclaims Germany as the super-race. Such efforts will only produce insuperable barriers. With very few exceptions, there are no pure races. Germany in particular, by its place at the crossroads of Europe, is definitely the fusion of many strains. Tides of emigration, marching armies throughout the centuries, and modern travel have inextricably mixed and fused all the races. It may therefore be assumed that any attempt to isolate a race or to enforce so-called "racial purity" is foredoomed to failure. The only solution of this problem is the basic recognition that all men are Brothers; that one blood pours through human veins; that we are all the children of the one Father and that our failure to recognise this fact is simply an indication of m-w-c's stupidity. Historical backgrounds, climatic conditions and widespread inter-marriage have made the different races what they are today. Essentially, however, humanity is one_ the heir of the ages, the product of many fusions, conditioned by circumstances and enriched by the processes of evolutionary development. This basic unity must now be recognised.

The major racial problem has, for many centuries, been the Jewish, which has been brought to a critical point by Germany. This problem is also capable of solution if properly recognised for what it is, and if coupled with an effort by the Jews themselves to solve it, and to be cooperative in the world efforts to adjust their problem. This they have not yet done because the average Jew is lonely and unsettled, able to do little to put him/herself right before the world. Instinctively and intellectually, the Jew is separative; intuitively he/she has vision, but at the same time he/she possesses no sense of fusion with other peoples.

There is no scientific and hitherto unknown mode of solving racial problems. It is finally a question of right thinking, decent behaviour, and simple kindness. The question will not be solved by inter-marriage, or by isolating groups for occupation of special areas, or by any m-w-c-made ideas of superiority or inferiority. Right human relations will come by a mutual recognition of mistakes, by sorrow for wrong action in the past, and by restitution, if possible. It will come when nations can be educated to appreciate the good qualities of other nations and to comprehend the part they play in the whole picture. It will be developed when the sense of racial superiority is killed; when racial differences and racial quarrels are relegated to the unholy past and only a future of cooperation and of understanding is actively developed; it will make its presence felt when the living standards of right relation (sought by the enlightened people of every race) become the habitual attitude of the masses and when it is regarded as contrary to the best interests of any nation to spread those ideas which tend to erect racial or national barriers, arouse hatreds or foster differences and separation. Such a time will surely come. Humanity will master the problem of right human relations and attitudes.

It is inevitable that racial differences, national quarrels and caste distinction exist, but it is equally imperative that they disappear. The world is one world. Humanity is one unit in the evolutionary process. Differences are m-w-c-made and engender hatreds and separation. When the children of the various races are taught from their earliest years that there are no differences, that all men are Brothers, and that the apparent distinctions are essentially superficial, then future generations will approach the problem of world interrelations unhandicapped by prejudice, by pride of race, or by instilled historical resentments. By right education little children can be taught right attitudes and will respond, for a child sees and recognises no differences, and the truth of the Biblical promise that "a little child shall lead them" will be proven scientifically true. In the new world order this educational process will be started.

&&&&&&&

THE REAPPEARANCE OF THE CHRIST \ Brotherhood / PEACE / A LORD of SACRIFICE and The LORD of LOVE

World Expectancy

God Transcendent, greater, vaster and more inclusive than His created world, is universally recognised and has been generally emphasised; all faiths can say with Shri Krishna (speaking as God, the Creator) that "having pervaded the whole universe with a fragment of Myself, I remain." This God Transcendent has dominated the religious thinking of millions of simple and spiritually minded people down the centuries which have elapsed since humanity began to press forward towards divinity.

Slowly, there is dawning upon the awakening consciousness of humanity, the great paralleling truth of God Immanent_ divinely "pervading" all forms, conditioning from within all kingdoms in nature, expressing innate divinity through human beings and_ two thousand years ago_ portraying the nature of that divine Immanence in the Person of the Christ. Today, as an outcome of this unfolding divine Presence, there is entering into the minds of men everywhere a new concept: that of "Christ [Peace, Love \ Brotherhood & Sacrifice] in us, the hope of glory." (Col. 1.27.) There is a growing and developing belief that The Prince of Peace is in us, as He was in the Master Jesus, and this belief will alter world affairs and mankind's entire attitude to life.

The wonder of that life, lived two thousand years ago, is still with us and has lost none of its freshness; it is an eternal inspiration, hope, encouragement and example. The love He demonstrated still holds the thinking world in thrall, even though relatively few have really attempted to demonstrate the same quality of love as He did_ a love that leads unerringly to world service, to complete self-forgetfulness and to radiant, magnetic living. The words He spoke were few and simple and all men can understand them, but their significance has been largely lost in the intricate legalities and discussions of St. Paul, and in the lengthy disputation of theological commentators since the Prince of Peace lived and left us_ or apparently left us.

Yet_ today The Prince of Peace is nearer to humanity than at any other time in human history; He is closer than the most aspiring and hopeful noo knows, and can draw closer still if what is here written is understood and brought to the attention of men everywhere. For The Prince of Peace belongs to humanity, to the world of men, and not alone to the churches and religious faiths throughout the world.

Around Him_ in that High Place on Earth where He has His abiding place_ are gathered today all His great noos, the Masters of the Wisdom, and all Those liberated Sons of God Who, down the ages, have passed from darkness to Light, from the unreal to the Real, and from death to Immortality. They stand ready to carry out His bidding and to obey Him, the Master of all the Masters and the Teacher alike of Angels and of men. The Exponents and the Representatives of all the world faiths are there waiting, under His guidance, to reveal to all those who today struggle in the maelstrom of world affairs, and who seek to solve the world crisis, that they are not alone. God Transcendent is working through the Prince of Peace and the Spiritual Hierarchy to bring relief; God Immanent in all men is standing on the verge of certain stupendous Recognitions.

The great Apostolic Succession of the Knowers of God is poised today for renewed activity_ a succession of Those Who have lived on Earth, accepted the fact of God Transcendent, discovered the reality of God Immanent, portrayed in Their own lives the divine characteristics of the Prince of Peace, Brotherhood life and (because They lived on Earth as He did and does) have "entered for us within the veil, leaving us an example that we too should follow His steps" and Theirs. We too belong eventually in that great succession.

The Illumined One, the Lord of Wisdom Himself is standing behind the Prince of Peace in humble recognition of the divine task which He is on the verge of consummating, and because of the imminence of that spiritual accomplishment. Not only are all those who are functioning consciously in the Kingdom of God aware of His Plans, but those great spiritual Beings Who live and dwell in the "Father’s House," in the "centre where the will of God is known," are also mobilised and organised to assist His work. The spiritual line of succession from the throne of the Ancient of Days down to the humblest noo (gathered with others at the feet of the Prince of Peace) is today focussed on the task of helping humanity.

The great moment for which He has so patiently waited has almost arrived; the "end of the age" to which He referred when speaking to His small group of noos: "Lo! I am with you all the days even unto the end of the age" has come. Today He stands and waits, knowing that the hour has come when He will "see of the travail of His soul and be satisfied." (Is. LIII.11.)

Right through the spiritual succession of the Sons of God, there is naught to be seen and felt but expectancy and preparation. "The Hierarchy waits." It has done all that is possible from the angle of the present opportunity. The Prince of Peace stands in patient silence, attentive to the effort that will make His work materialise on Earth and enable Him to consummate the effort He made 2000 years ago in Palestine. The Lord of Wisdom hovers over the planet, ready to play His part if the opportunity is offered to Him by mankind. Everything now depends upon the right action of the men of goodwill .

From the Father’s House (the "centre where the will of God is known" or Shamballa of the esotericist) the fiat has gone forth: The hour has come. From the Kingdom of God where reigns the Prince of Peace, the answer has been flung back: "Father, Thy will be done." Down in our struggling, bewildered, unhappy world of men, the cry is ceaselessly rising: "May Christ [Peace, Love \ Brotherhood, Sacrifice] return to Earth." For the three great spiritual centres: the Father’s House, the Kingdom of God, and awakening Humanity, there is but one purpose, one idea and one united expectancy.

It is essential that today there should be a measure of fuller knowledge concerning the "centre where the will of God is known." The public should possess some understanding of this highest spiritual centre to which_ if we believe the Gospel story_ The Prince of Peace Himself was always attentive. Frequently we read in The New Testament that "the Father [ ] spoke to Him" or that "He heard a Voice," unheard by others, or that the words were heard, "this is my beloved Son." Several times, we read, the seal of affirmation (as it is spiritually called) was given to Him. Only the Father , the planetary Logos, the "One in Whom we live and move and have our being" (Acts XVII.28), the Lord of the World, the Ancient of Days (Dan. VII.9) can speak this final affirmative word. There are, as well we know, five crises or initiations which concern the Master Jesus_ the Birth at Bethlehem, the Baptism, the Transfiguration, the Crucifixion and the Resurrection_ but lying behind this obvious and practical teaching, lies an undercurrent or thought of something much higher and of greater importance_ the affirmative Voice of the Father , recognising that which The Prince of Peace has done.

When The Prince of Peace completes the work during the next two thousand years which He inaugurated two thousand years ago, that affirmative Voice will surely again be heard and divine recognition of His coming will be accorded. Then the Prince of Peace will take that stupendous initiation of which we know nothing except that two divine aspects will blend and fuse in Him (love-wisdom in full manifestation, motivated by divine will or power). Then the Lord of Wisdom and the Prince of Peace will together pass before the Father , the Lord of the World, will together see the glory of the Lord and eventually pass to higher service of a nature and a calibre unknown to us.

We write here in no fanatical or adventist spirit; we speak not as speculative theologians or exponents of one phase of religious, wishful thinking. We speak because many know that the time is ripe and that the appeal of simple, faithful hearts has penetrated to the highest spiritual sphere and set in motion energies and forces which cannot now be stopped. The invocative cry of distressed humanity is today of such a volume and sound that_ united to the wisdom and the knowledge of the Spiritual Hierarchy_ it has given rise to certain activities in the Father's House. These will result in the glory of God, in the transformation of the divine will-to-good into human goodwill, and resultant peace on Earth.

A new chapter in the great book of spiritual living is about to be written; a new expansion of consciousness is an imminent happening; a fresh recognition of divine attentiveness is now possible to humanity and a revealing expectancy will prove the accuracy of the Biblical statement, "every eye shall see Him." (Rev. 1.7.) The religious livingness or spiritual history of mankind can be summarised for us by a series of recognitions_ recognition of Those Who, down the ages, have constituted the Apostolic Succession, culminating for us in the great religious leaders who have come out among us since 700 B.C. and founded the great modern world faiths, and_ above all else_ in the Prince of Peace Himself Who embodied the perfection of God Immanent, plus awareness of God Transcendent; recognition of those major spiritual concepts of love, life and relationship which have hovered ever in the background of man's thinking and which are now on the verge of right expression; recognition of the true brother/sisterhood of man, based on the one divine life, working through the one soul and expressing itself through the one humanity; recognition, therefore, of relationship both to the divine life throughout the world and to mankind itself. It is this developing spiritual attitude which will lead to right human relations and eventual world peace.

Today, another recognition is becoming possible. It is the recognition everywhere of the imminent return of The Prince of Peace (if such a phrase can be true of someone Who has never left us!) and of the new spiritual opportunities which this event will make possible.

The basis for this recognition lies in the deep-seated conviction, innate in the human consciousness, that some great Teacher, some Saviour, Revealer, Lawgiver or divine Representative must come forth from the world of spiritual realities, because of human need and human demand. Always down the centuries, at the hour of man's greatest need and in response to his/her voiced demand, a divine Son of God has come forth and under many different names. Then the Prince of Peace came and apparently left us, with His work unfinished and His vision for mankind not yet consummated. For two thousand years it has seemed as if all His work had been blocked, frustrated, and of no avail, for the growth of the churches during the centuries is no guarantee of the spiritual success at which He aimed. It needed more than theological interpretations and the numerical growth of the world religions (including Christianity and Buddhism) to prove His world mission successfully carried forward. It all seemed impossible, necessitating three conditions; under these a test of His work could be attempted; today these three conditions are proven facts. First, as we have seen, a general planetary condition which has unfortunately (owing to man's selfishness) proved to be so catastrophic in nature that humanity has been forced to recognise the cause and source of the disaster; secondly, a spiritual awakening which would have its impulse in the deepest depths of man's consciousness and such is the case today as a result of the World Conflict (1914-1945); thirdly, a steadily mounting invocative cry, prayer or demand, directed toward high spiritual sources, no matter by what name such sources may be called.

Today, these three conditions have been fulfilled and humanity faces renewed opportunity. The disaster which has overtaken mankind is universal and widespread; no one has escaped and all men are involved in some way or another_ physically, economically or socially. The spiritual awakening of men everywhere (within or without the world faiths, and largely outside of them) is general and complete and a turning to God is to be seen on every hand. Finally these two causes have aroused_ as never before_ the invocative cry of humanity; it is clearer, purer and more selfless than at any other time in human history because it is based on clearer thinking and a common distress. True religion is again emerging in the hearts of men in every land; this recognition of a divine hope and background may possibly take people back into the church and into the world faiths, but it will most certainly take them back to God.

Religion is the name, surely, which we give to the invocative appeal of humanity which leads to the evocative response of the Spirit of God. This Spirit works in every human heart and in all groups. It works also through the Spiritual Hierarchy of the planet. It impels the Head of the Hierarchy, the Prince of Peace, to take action and the action which He is taking will lead to His return with His noos.

The idea of the return of Peace, Love \ Brotherhood / Sacrifice is a most familiar one, and the concept of the Son of God returning in response to human need has its place in the teaching of the majority of the world faiths. Ever since He apparently departed to the sphere where the faithful have put Him, little groups of these people have reasoned themselves into the belief that on such and such a date He will come back, and ever their prophecies and expectancies have been doomed to failure. He has not come. Such people have been laughed at by the crowd and rebuked by the intelligent. Their eyes have not seen Him and there has been no tangible indication of His Presence. Today, thousands know that He will come; that plans for His coming are already set on foot, but they set no date or hour. The time is known only to the two or three, but "in such an hour as ye think not, He will come." (Matt. XXIV.44.)

A truth hard for the orthodox thinker of any faith to accept is the fact that The Prince of Peace cannot return because He has always been here upon our Earth, watching over the spiritual destiny of humanity; He has never left us but, in physical body and securely concealed (though not hidden), He has guided the affairs of the Spiritual Hierarchy, of His noos and workers Who are unitedly pledged with Him to Earth service. He can only re-appear. It is a spiritual fact that those who have passed from the cave of the tomb into the fullness of the resurrection life can be seen and at the same time evade the vision of the believer. Seeing and recognition are two very different things, and one of the great recognitions of mankind in the near future is the recognition that always He has been with us, sharing with us the familiar usefulness and peculiar characteristics of our civilisation and its many gifts to man.

The early signs of His approach with His noos can already be discerned by those who note and rightly interpret the signs of the times. There is (among these signs) the coming together spiritually of those who love their fellowmen. This is in reality the organising of the outer physical army of the Lord_ an army which has no weapons but those of love, of right speech and right human relations. This unknown organisation has proceeded with phenomenal speed during the aftermath of conflict, because humanity is sick of hate and controversy.

The general staff of the Prince of Peace is already active in the form of the New Group of World Servers; they are as potent a body of forerunners as has ever preceded a great world Figure into the arena of mankind's living. Their work and influence is already seen and felt in every land, and nothing can destroy that which they have accomplished. The spiritual and organising effect of expressed and voiced invocation has been also attempted since 1935, and the energy of the invocative cry of humanity has been directed into those channels which reach from Earth to that High Place where dwells the Prince of Peace. From there, it has been transmitted to those still higher spheres where the attention of the Lord of the World, the Ancient of Days, the Father of all, plus the Creative Energies and Living Beings Who dwell there with Him, can be focussed on humanity and those steps can be taken which will embody more rapidly the Purposes of God.

For the first time in human history, the demand of the people of the Earth is so potent and so in line with divine direction, in time and space, that the end is inevitably sure; the looked-for spiritual Representative must come forth; this time He will not come alone but will be accompanied by Those Whose lives and words will evoke recognition in every department of human thinking. The symbolic prophecies found in all the world Scriptures anent this imminent event will prove their veracity; their symbolism will nevertheless elicit re-interpretation; circumstances and happenings will not necessarily be exactly as the Scriptures would appear to indicate. For instance, He will come indeed in the "clouds of the air" (Matt. XXVI.64), as the Christian Scriptures say, but of what great interest is that when millions come and go in the clouds, each hour of the day and of the night? We mention this as one of the outstanding prophecies and one of the most familiar; it is, however, one which means little in our modern civilisation. The fact of importance is that He will come.

The Wesak Festival has been held down the centuries in the well-known valley

in the [ - ] in order:*

1. To demonstrate the nature of the work of The Prince of Peace as the great and chosen Intermediary, standing as the representative of the Spiritual Hierarchy; Head of the Fourth Hierarchy ( all human Initiates); founder and leader, in His person, of the New Group of World Servers1; the kNew Group of World Servers2 AKA the HUT 1-7_ World servers and saviors. He voices their demand for the recognition of the factual existence of the Kingdom of God, here and now.

2. Beginning acknowledgement and recognition of the great truth and fact of the physical Presence on Earth at this time of the Prince of Peace among us ever since His so-called departure., His Group of noos and executives, of Their representative activities on behalf of mankind, and Their close relationship.

3. To prove (on the physical plane) the factual solidarity of the Eastern and Western approaches to God. Both the Prince of Peace and the Illumined One are present to achieve the intention of the Lord of Wisdom / the Illumined One and the Prince of Peace that in each country there should be groups who will act as Their Representative at the Time of the Festivals; so that the distribution of spiritual energy from the First Great Aspect / Ray will be direct from the Illumined One (and later Shamballa) to the Lord of Sacrifice, and then from the Prince of Peace to those noos in every country who can be overshadowed, and so act as channels for the direct current of Energy.

4. To form a rallying-point and a meeting-place for those who annually_ in synthesis and symbolically_ link up and represent the Father’s House, the Kingdom of God and Humanity.

&&&&&&&

Perhaps one of the major messages for all of us who read these words is this great truth and fact of the physical Presence on Earth at this time of the Prince of Peace, of His group of noos and executives, of Their representative activities on behalf of mankind and of Their close relationship. This relationship comes out at certain of the great spiritual festivals where the relationship demonstrated includes not only the Kingdom of God but also the Father and the Father’s Home. There is the Festival of Easter, the Festival of the Illumined One / Lord of Wisdom Who in physical Presence expresses the spiritual solidarity of our planet, and the Festival in June, peculiarly the Festival of the Prince of Peace, when He _ as leader of the New Group of World Servers_ employs the new Invocation on behalf of all men of goodwill in all lands; at the same time, He gathers up the inchoate and unexpressed demands of those masses who seek a new and better way of life. They want love in daily living, right human relations and an understanding of the underlying Plan.

It is these physical happenings which are of moment and not the vague hopes and promises of the theological faiths. It is the physical Presence upon our planet of such recognised spiritual figures as the Lord of the World, the Ancient of Days; the seven Spirits Who are before the throne of God; the Illumined One, the spiritual leader of the East, and the Prince of Peace, the spiritual leader of the West_ all of Whom are brought at this climaxing time to our attention. The vague belief in Their existence, the dreamy speculations as to Their work and Their interest in human welfare, and the unconvinced, yet hopeful, wishful thinking of believers (and also unbelievers), will soon give place to certain knowledge, to visual recognition, to provable signs of executive work and to the reorganisation (by men of unusual potency) of the political, religious, economic and social life of humanity.

All this will not come as the result of some proclamation or some stupendous planetary event which will force human beings everywhere to say: "Lo: He is there! Lo: Here are the signs of His divinity!" for that would evoke only antagonism and laughter, resistance or fanatical credulity.

It will come as a recognition of potency in leadership, through dynamic but logical changes in world affairs, and through action taken by the masses of the people from the depths of their own consciousness.

Many years ago, we indicated that the Prince of Peace would come in three ways, or rather, that the fact of His Presence could be proved in three distinctive phases.

It was pointed out then that the first move which the Prince of Peace would make would be the stimulation of the spiritual consciousness in man-woman-child, the evocation of humanity's spiritual demands on a large scale and the nurturing_ on a worldwide scale_ of the Brotherhood / Peace / Sacrifice and Love consciousness in the human heart. This has already been done and with most effective results. Of the factual nature of this process, the vociferous demands of men of goodwill, of welfare workers and of those pledged to international cooperation, to the relief of the world distress and to the establishment of right human relations, are the undeniable expression. That phase of the preparatory work which is indicative of His coming has now reached a stage where nothing can arrest its progress or slow down its momentum. In spite of appearances, this uprising of the Brotherhood / Peace and Love \ Sacrifice consciousness has been successful and what may appear as reverse activity is of no importance in the long run, but is only of a temporary nature.

The second indicated move of the Hierarchy would be the impressing of the minds of enlightened men everywhere by spiritual ideas embodying the new truths, by the "descent" (if we may so call it) of the new concepts which will govern human living and by the overshadowing of all world noos and the New Group of World Servers by the Prince of Peace Himself. This planned move of the Hierarchy is progressing well; men and women everywhere and in every department of life are enunciating those new truths which should in the future guide human living; they are building those new organisations, movements and groups_ large or small_ which will familiarise the mass of men with the reality of the need and the mode of meeting it. This they are doing because they are driven thereto by the warmth of their hearts and by their loving response to human distress; without formulating it thus to themselves, they are, nevertheless, working to bring into visibility the Kingdom of God on Earth. No denial of these facts is possible, in view of the multiplicity of organisations, books and speeches.

Thirdly we are told that The Prince of Peace might come in Person and walk among men as He did before. This has not yet taken place but plans are being laid which will enable Him to do so. Those plans do not involve the birth of some nice child in some nice home on Earth; they will not produce the wild claims and the credulous recognition of the well-meaning and the unintelligent as is so frequently the case today, nor will someone appear and say: "This is the Christ [Sacrifice ] Love as Service / Peace / Love \ Brotherhood]. He is here or He is there." We would point out to you, however, that the widespread appearance of such tales and claims, though undesirable, misleading and wrong, nevertheless demonstrates human expectancy of the imminence of His coming. Belief in His coming is basic in the human consciousness. How He will come and in what manner is not yet stated. The exact moment has not yet arrived nor has the method of His appearance been determined. The factual nature of the two earlier and preparatory moves, already made by the Hierarchy under His direction, are the guarantee that He will come and that when He does, mankind will be ready.

Let us summarise certain aspects of the work He set in motion two thousand years ago, because they hold the clue to His future work. Some of it is well known to you, for it has been emphasised by the world faiths and particularly by teachers of the Christian faith. But all of them have made His work appear difficult for man to grasp, and the undue emphasis laid upon His divinity (an emphasis which He Himself never made) has made it appear that He and He only and no one else could possibly do the same works. Theologians have forgotten that He Himself stated that "greater things shall ye do, because I go unto my Father." (John XIV.12.) He here indicates that this passing to the Father’s House would result in such an inflow of spiritual strength, insight and creative accomplishment for man, that their deeds would surpass His; because of the distortion of His teaching and its remote relation to man, we have not yet done those "greater things." Some day, we assuredly will and_ along certain lines_ we already have. Let us relate some of the things He did which we can do, and which He will aid.

1. For the first time in human history, the love of God was embodied in a man and The Prince of Peace inaugurated the era of love. That expression of divine love is still in the making; the world is not yet full of love and few there are who understand the true meaning of the word. But_ speaking symbolically_ when the United Nations has emerged into factual and actual power, the welfare of the world will then be assured. What is that welfare but love in action? What is international cooperation but love on a world scale? Those are the things which the love of God in The Prince of Peace expressed and those are the things which we are working here today to bring into being. We are attempting to do it on a vast scale and this in spite of opposition_ an opposition which can only temporarily succeed, such is the potency of the awakened spirit of man. These are the things which the Hierarchy, in its already successful procedures, is aiding and will continue to aid.

2. The Prince of Peace taught also that the Kingdom of God was on Earth and told us to seek that Kingdom first and let all things be of secondary importance for its sake. That Kingdom has ever been with us, composed of all those who down the ages, have sought spiritual goals, liberated themselves from the limitations of the physical body, emotional controls and the obstructive mind. Its citizens are those who today (unknown to the majority) live in physical bodies, work for the welfare of humanity, use love instead of emotion as their general technique, and compose that great body of "illumined Minds" which guides the destiny of the world. The Kingdom of God is not something which will descend on Earth when man is good enough! It is something which is functioning efficiently today and demanding recognition. It is an organised body which is already evoking recognition from those people who do seek first the Kingdom of God, and discover thereby that the Kingdom they seek is already here. The Prince of Peace and His noos are known by many to be physically present on Earth and the Kingdom which They rule, with its laws and modes of activity, is familiar to many and has been throughout the centuries.

The Prince of Peace is the world Healer and Saviour. He works because He is the embodied soul of all Reality. He works today, as He worked in Palestine two thousand years ago, through groups. There He worked through the three beloved noos, through the twelve apostles, through the chosen seventy, and the interested five hundred.... Now He works through His Masters and Their groups, and thereby greatly intensifies His efforts. He can and will work through all groups just insofar as they fit themselves for planned service, for the distribution of love, and come into conscious alignment with the great potency of the inner groups.

Those groups who have always proclaimed the physical Presence of the Lord of Peace, Love, Brotherhood have so distorted the teaching by dogmatic assertions on unimportant details and by ridiculous claims that they have evoked little recognition of the underlying truth, nor have they portrayed a kingdom which is attractive. That Kingdom exists but is not a place of disciplines or golden harps, peopled by unintelligent fanatics, but a field of service and a place where every man has full scope for the exercise of his/her divinity in human service.

3. At the Transfiguration, The Prince of Peace revealed the glory which is innate in all men. The triple lower nature_ physical, emotional and mental_ is there shown as prostrate before the glory which was revealed. In that moment, wherein Christ [Peace, Love \ Sacrifice / Brotherhood...] Immanent was in incarnation, wherein humanity was represented by the three apostles, a voice came from the Father’s Home in recognition of the revealed divinity and the Sonship of the Transfigured Prince of Peace. On this innate divinity, upon this recognised Sonship, is the brother/sisterhood of all men based_ one life, one glory which shall be revealed, and one divine relationship. Today, on a large scale (even when by-passing the implications of divinity), the glory of man and his/her fundamental relationships are already a fact in the human consciousness. Accompanying those characteristics which as yet remain deplorable and which would appear to negate all claims to divinity, is the wonder of man's achievement, of his/her triumph over nature. The glory of scientific attainment and the magnificent evidence of creative art_ both modern and ancient_ leave no room to question man's divinity. Here then are the "greater things" of which The Prince of Peace spoke and here again is the triumph of the Lord of Love within the human heart.

Why this triumph of the Sacrifice \ Service / Brotherhood / Peace and Love consciousness must always be spoken of in terms of religion, of church-going and of orthodox belief is one of the incredible triumphs of the forces of evil. To be a citizen of the Kingdom of God does not mean that one must necessarily be a member of some one of the orthodox churches. The divine Prince of Peace in the human heart can be expressed in many different departments of human living_ in politics, in the arts, in economic expression and in true social living, in science and in religion. It might be wise here to remember that the only time it is recorded that The Prince of Peace (as an adult) visited the Temple of the Jews, He created a disturbance! Humanity is passing from glory to glory and, in the long panorama of history, this is strikingly observable. That glory is today revealed in every department of human activity, and the Transfiguration of those who are on the crest of the human wave of civilisation is very close at hand.

4. Finally, in the triumph of the Crucifixion or (as it is more accurately called in the East) the Great Renunciation, The Prince of Peace, for the first time, anchored on Earth a tenuous thread of the divine Will as it issued from the Father’s House (Shamballa), passed into the understanding custody of the kingdom of God and, through the medium of the Lord of Love, was brought to the attention of mankind. Through the instrumentality of certain great Sons of God, the three divine aspects or characteristics of the divine Trinity_ will, love and intelligence_ have become a part of human thinking and aspiration. Christians are apt to forget that the crisis in the final hours of the Prince of Peace was not that spent upon the Cross, but those spent in the Garden of Gethsemane. Then His will_ in agony and almost despair_ was submerged in that of the Father. "Father," He said, "not My will but Thine be done." (Luke XXII.42.)

Something new, yet planned for from the very depth of time, happened then in that quiet garden; The Prince of Peace, representing mankind, anchored or established the Father’s Will on Earth and made it possible for intelligent humanity to carry it out. Hitherto, that Will had been known in the Father’s House; it had been recognised and adapted to world need by the Spiritual Hierarchy, working under the Prince of Peace, and thus took shape as the divine Plan. Today, because of what The Lord of Love did in His moment of crisis hundreds of years ago, humanity can add its efforts to the working out of that Plan. The will-to-good of the Father’s House can become the goodwill of the Kingdom of God and be transformed into right human relations by intelligent humanity. Thus the direct line or thread of God's will reaches now from the highest place to the lowest point, and can in due time become a cable of ascension for the sons[/daughters] of men and of descent for the loving, living spirit of God.

Let us forget distance, remoteness and vagueness and realise that we are talking of exact and literal happenings on our planet. We are dealing with recognitions and occurrences and with factual events which are the conscious possession of many. The Prince of Peace of history and the Prince of Peace in the human heart are planetary facts.

There is one aspect of this return of the Prince of Peace which is never touched upon and to which no reference is ever made. It is the factor of what this coming out again among men, this return to outer everyday activity will mean to the Prince of Peace as He faces it. How will He feel when the hour of His appearance arrives?

There is a great initiation spoken of in The New Testament to which we have given the name of the Ascension. Of it we know nothing. Only a few items of information are brought to us in the Gospel story; the fact of the mountain top, of attendant watchers, and of the words of The Lord of Love, assuring them that He was not leaving them. Then a cloud received Him out of their sight. (Acts I.9.) There were none present who could go further with Him. Their consciousness could not penetrate to the place where He had chosen to go; they even misinterpreted His words and only in a vague and mystical sense has humanity ever understood His disappearance, or the significance of His persistent but unobserved Presence. The watchers were assured by two of the Knowers of God Who were also present that He would come again in like manner. He ascended. The cloud received Him; today the clouds which cover our planet are waiting to reveal Him.

He is now waiting to descend. This descent into our unhappy world of men can present Him with no alluring picture. From the quiet mountain retreat where He has waited, guided and watched over humanity and where He has trained His noos, initiates and the New Group of World Servers, He must come forth and take His place prominently on the world stage; take His part in the great drama which is there being played. This time, He will play His part, not in obscurity as He previously did but before the eyes of the entire world. Because of the smallness of our little planet, and because of the prevalence of the radio, of television and the rapidity of communication, His part will be watched by all and the prospect must surely, for Him, hold certain horror, must present its tests and major adjustments, plus painful and unavoidable experience. He does not come as the omnipotent God of man's ignorant creation, but as the Prince of Peace, the Founder of the Kingdom of God on Earth, to complete the work He started, and again to demonstrate divinity in far more difficult circumstances.

The Prince of Peace suffers, however, far more from those in His Own household than from those in the outer world; His work is more impeded by the advanced aspirant than by the intelligent thinker. It was not the cruelty of the outer world of men which caused the depths of sorrow to the Prince of Peace; it was His Own noos, plus the massed sorrow_ spread over the entire cycle of living_ past, present and future_ of humanity.

He comes to correct the mistakes and the misrepresentations of those who have dared to interpret His simple words in terms of their own ignorance, and to recognise those whose faithful service has made His return possible. He too is facing a major test, preparatory to a great initiation and when He has passed the test and fulfilled His task, He will pass to a still more exalted position in the Father’s House or to some distant place of service where only the most exalted can follow Him; His present position will then be taken by the One Whom He has prepared and trained.

But before all this can happen, He must again enter the public arena, play His part in world affairs, and prove the scope of His mission. He will gather round Him, in the flesh, His chosen associates and advisors; these will not be the ones who gathered around in those earlier simpler days but those members of our human family who today recognise Him and are preparing to work with Him as far as in them lies. It is a different world to which He is now planning to return and this is largely due to the intellectual development of the mass of men. This presents Him with stupendous difficulties, for the intellects of men must now be reached and not just their hearts (as in the earlier days) if the Will of God is to be intelligently carried out on Earth. His major task is surely the establishing of right human relations in every department of human living. We would ask you to use your imagination and endeavour to think out what must be the implications of the task which confronts Him; we would ask you to ponder on the difficulties which He must inevitably face_ the difficulty, above all, of mass intellectual wrong emphasis.

He , the Representative of the love of God, is asked to work again in the world arena wherein His earlier message has been negated, forgotten or misinterpreted for two thousand years, and wherein hate and separativeness have distinguished all men everywhere. This will plunge Him into a foreign atmosphere and into a situation wherein all His divine resources will be needed, and will have to be tried out to the uttermost. The generally accepted idea that He will return as a triumphant warrior, omnipotent and irresistible, has surely no basis in fact. That He will ultimately lead His people, humanity, into Jerusalem is a fact, founded on a secure foundation, but it will not be into a Jewish city called Jerusalem but into "the place of peace" (as the word "Jerusalem" means). A careful consideration of the world situation today and a dedicated use of the imagination will reveal to the sincere thinker how appalling is the task which He has undertaken. But He has again "set His face to go to Jerusalem." (Luke IX.51.) He will re-appear and guide mankind into a civilisation and a state of consciousness in which right human relations and worldwide cooperation for the good of all will be the universal keynote. He will_ through the New Group of World Servers and the men of goodwill _ complete His association with the Will of God (His Father’s business) in such a manner that the eternal will-to-good will be translated by humanity into goodwill and right relations. Then His task will be done; He will be free again to leave us, but this time not to return but to leave the world of men in the hands of that great spiritual Server Who will be the new Head of the Hierarchy, the Church Invisible.

The question now arises: In what way can I be of service? How can I aid during this preparatory stage?

What the members of the Spiritual Hierarchy are doing is much indeed; those noos who are in conscious touch with the Masters of the Wisdom_ or, if you prefer the term, with the senior noos of the Prince of Peace_ are working day and night in order to establish such confidence, correct attitudes and an understanding of the divine spiritual "push" or enterprise that His way will be made easier. They and their groups of lesser noos, aspirants and students of the realities stand unitedly behind the Prince of Peace and can thus enable Him to accomplish His purpose. Their major realisation is that of a cyclic crisis in the spiritual life of our planet; it is one which has been anticipated in the Father’s House (Shamballa) for thousands of years. They have registered the fact that, for the first time in human history, all the three spiritual centres or groups through which God works are unitedly focussed on the same objective. Shamballa, the Spiritual Hierarchy and Humanity (the Father’s House, the Kingdom of God and the World of Men) are all striving in one vast movement for an intensification of the Light of the World. This Light will irradiate (in a fashion unknown before) not only the Father’s House, which is the source of all our planetary light but also the spiritual centre from which have come all those Teachers and World Saviours Who have stood before men and said, as did Hermes, the the Lord of Wisdom and the Prince of Peace: "I am the Light of the World." This light will now flood the world of men, bringing illumination to men's minds and light into the dark places of human living.

It is light and_ above all else_ "life more abundantly" which The Prince of Peace, Lord of Love and Sacrifice will bring, and until He brings it we know not what it signifies; we cannot realise the revelation which this will entail and the new possibilities which will open up before us. But through Him, light and life are on their way, to be interpreted and applied in terms of goodwill and of right human relations. For this the Spiritual Hierarchy is preparing. This time the Prince of Peace, Lord of Love and Sacrifice will not come alone for His co-workers will come with Him. His experience and Theirs will be the reverse of the previous one, for this time every eye will see Him, every ear will hear Him and every mind will pass judgment upon Him.

We can freely aid in the reconstruction work which the Lord of Love proposes, if we will familiarise ourselves and all men whom we can contact with the following facts:

1. That the reappearance of The Prince of Peace, Lord of Love / Brotherhood & Lord of Sacrifice is imminent.

2. That the Prince of Peace, Lord of Love / Brotherhood & Lord of Sacrifice , immanent in every human heart, can be evoked in recognition of His appearance.

3. That the circumstances of His return are only symbolically related in the world Scriptures; this may produce a vital change in the preconceived ideas of humanity.

4. That the major required preparation is a world at peace; however, that peace must be based on an educated goodwill, which will lead inevitably to right human relations, and, therefore, to the establishment (figuratively speaking) of lines of light between nation and nation, religion and religion, group and group and man-woman-child and man.

If we can succeed in presenting these four ideas to the world at large, and thus in overcoming the intelligent criticism that all that is said is too vague, prophetic, and visionary, we shall have done much. It is possible surely that the ancient truism that "the mind is the slayer of the real" may be fundamentally true where the mass of humanity is concerned and that the purely intellectual approach (which rejects the vision and refuses to accept the unprovable) may be far more at fault than the anticipation of the Knowers of God and the expectant multitude.

The intelligence of divinity is vested in the Spiritual Hierarchy, and that Hierarchy is today composed of Those Who have united in Themselves both the intellect and the intuition, the practical and the apparently impractical, the factual way of life and way of the man who sees a vision. There are also people who must be found in the market place of daily life; these are the people who must be trained in the divine recognitions which are essentially physical plane responses to the newer expansions of consciousness. The Prince of Peace, Lord of Love / Brotherhood & Lord of Sacrifice Who will return will not be like the Lord of Love Who (apparently) departed. He will not be a "man of sorrows"; He will not be a silent pensive figure; He will be the enunciator of spiritual statements which will not necessitate interpretation and receive the wrong interpretation, because He will be present to indicate the true meaning.

He has been for two thousand years the supreme Head of the Church Invisible, the Spiritual Hierarchy, composed of noos of all faiths. He recognises and loves those who are not Christian but who retain their allegiance to Their Founders_ the Illumined One, Mohammed and others. He cares not what the faith is if the objective is love of God and of humanity. If men look for the Prince of Peace Who left His noos centuries ago, they will fail to recognise the Prince of Peace, Lord of Love / Brotherhood & Lord of Sacrifice Who is in process of returning. The Prince of Peace has no religious barriers in His consciousness. It matters not to Him of what faith a man may call Himself.

The Son of God is on His way and He cometh not alone. His advance guard is already here and the Plan which they must follow is already made and clear. Let recognition be the aim.

THE WORK OF THE PRINCE OF PEACE TODAY AND IN THE FUTURE

We have seen that the doctrine of great Appearances and of the coming of Avatars or World Teachers or Saviours underlies all the world religions. Through Them, the continuity of revelation is implemented and humanity is enabled, each successive age, to take its next step forward along the Path of Evolution closer to God and that divine Centre in which the will of the One "in Whom we live and move and have our being" (as St. Paul expressed it in Acts XVII.28) is focussed, understood and directed. We have touched upon the mission of two of these Avatars_ the Lord of Wisdom, the Messenger of Light for the East, and the Prince of Peace, the Messenger of Love for the West_ and Their work for the entire world; we have also considered the unique opportunity with which the Lord of Love is today faced and the response He made in 1945 when He signified His intention to reappear and gave the Great Invocation to us as an aid in the preparatory work with which we are immediately confronted. It would seem appropriate at this point to consider the nature of the work which He will do and also the teaching which He will probably give. The fact of the continuity of the revelation and teaching given down the ages entitles us to a wise consideration and spiritual speculation upon the probable lines which His work will take.

Over the years, much has been given out from many sources, schools of thought and churches about the Prince of Peace, the situation which He faces and the probabilities as to His reappearance. noos, aspirants, and men of goodwill have done much already to prepare the world for His so-called return. Today, the East and the West stand equally expectant. As we approach the theme of His work, it is essential that we remember that the Eastern Teacher embodied in Himself the Wisdom of God, of which human intelligence (the third aspect of divinity) is an expression; that through the Lord of Love, the second divine aspect was revealed in its perfection; and in Him two aspects, therefore, light and love, received full expression. It remains now for the highest of the divine aspects, the Will of God, to receive embodiment and for this the Lord of Love is preparing. The continuity of revelation may not stop; and upon what other expressions of the divine nature may still later be revealed it is needless for us to speculate.

The uniqueness of the impending mission of the Prince of Peace and the uniqueness of His opportunity consist in the fact that He is able_ in Himself_ to give expression to two divine energies: the energy of love and the energy of will, the magnetic potency of love and the dynamic effectiveness of the divine will. Never before, in the long long history of humanity, has such a revelation been possible.

The work and the teaching of the Prince of Peace will be hard for the Christian world to accept, though easier of assimilation in the East. Nevertheless, some hard blow or some difficult presentation of the truth is badly needed if the Christian world is to be awakened, and if Christian people are to recognise their place within a worldwide divine revelation and see the Prince of Peace as representing all the faiths and taking His rightful place as World Teacher. He is the World Teacher and not a Christian teacher. He Himself told us that He had other folds and to them He has meant as much as He has meant to the orthodox Christian. They may not call Him the Lord of Love, but they have their own name for Him and follow Him as truly and faithfully as their Western brethren.

Let us look for a moment at the erroneous interpretations given to the Gospel story. The symbolism of that Gospel story_ an ancient story-presentation often presented down the ages, prior to the coming of the Prince of Peace in Palestine_ has been twisted and distorted by theologians until the crystalline purity of the early teaching and the unique simplicity of the Lord of Love \ Brotherhood have disappeared in a travesty of errors and in a mummery of ritual, money and human ambitions. The Prince of Peace is pictured today as having been born in an unnatural manner, as having taught and preached for three years and then as having been crucified and eventually resurrected, leaving humanity in order to "sit on the right hand of God," in austere and distant pomp. Likewise, all the other approaches to God by any other people, at any time and in any country, are regarded by the orthodox Christian as wrong approaches, as being practised by so-called "heathen," and as requiring Christian interference. Every possible effort has been made to force orthodox Christianity on those who accept the inspiration and the teachings of the Lord of Wisdom or of others who have been responsible for preserving the divine continuity of revelation. The emphasis has been, as we all well know, upon the "blood sacrifice of the Prince of Peace" upon the Cross and upon a salvation dependent upon the recognition and acceptance of that sacrifice. The vicarious at-one-ment has been substituted for the reliance which the Lord of Love Himself enjoined us to place upon our own divinity; the Church of the Christ has made itself famous and futile (as the world conflict proved) for its narrow creed, its wrong emphases, its clerical pomp, its spurious authority, its material riches and its presentation of a dead Christ. His resurrection is accepted, but the major appeal of the churches has been upon His death.

The Prince of Peace has been for two thousand years a silent, passive Figure, hidden behind a multitude of words written by a multitude of men (commentators and preachers). The church has pointed us to the dying Prince of Peace upon the Cross and not to the living, working, active, present Prince of Peace Who has been with us in bodily Presence (according to His promise) for twenty centuries.

Let us, therefore, endeavour to get a truer picture of The Lord of Love and Prince of Peace's activities and life and_ consequently_ of our future hope. Let us try and realise the ever-present yet divine Person, laying His plans for the future helping of humanity, assessing His resources, influencing His noos and organising the details which will attend His reappearance. We need to awaken faith in the factual nature of divine revelation, and galvanise the church of The Lord of Love and Lord of Sacrifice / Brotherhood into a truer appreciation of Him and of His work. It is the living, acting, thinking Prince of Peace with whom we must deal, remembering always that the Gospel story is eternally true and only needs re-interpreting in the light of its place in the long succession of divine revelations. His Mission on earth two thousand years ago is a part of that continuity and is not an extraordinary story, having no relation to the past, emphasising a period of only 33 years and presenting no clear hope for the future.

What is the hope held out today by the orthodox and unimaginative theologians? That at some distant date, known only to the inscrutable will of God the Father, the Lord of Love and Prince of Peace will issue forth from His seat at the right hand of God, and (followed by His angels and by the Church invisible) descending upon the clouds of Heaven, to the sound of a trumpet, He will make an appearance in Jerusalem. The battle raging at that time will then end, and He will enter the city of Jerusalem to rule for one thousand years. During this millennium, Satan or the principle of evil will be bound or imprisoned, and there will be a new heaven and new earth. Further than that, we are told nothing; humanity hopes for so much more that the picture presented does not intrigue them.

Behind this portrayal, if rightly interpreted, stands the human, the loving and the divine Presence of the Prince of Peace, embodying divine love and wielding divine power, directing His Church and establishing the Kingdom of God on Earth. What is this church of the Lord of Love and of Sacrifice and Prince of Peace? It is constituted of the sum total of all those in whom the life of the Lord of Peace and Love or the Prince of Peace-consciousness is to be found or is in process of finding expression; it is the aggregation of all who love their fellowmen, because to love one's fellowmen is the divine faculty which makes us full members of the Lord of Sacrifice, Peace and Love's community. It is not the accepting of any historical fact or theological creed which places us en rapport with the Prince of Peace. The citizens of the Kingdom of God are all those who are deliberately seeking the light and attempting (through self-imposed discipline) to stand before the One Initiator; this worldwide group (whether in the body or out of it) accepts the teaching that "the sons [/daughters] of men are one"; they know that divine revelation is continuous and ever new, and that the divine Plan is working itself out on Earth.

There are those today on Earth who know that through the instrumentality, the inspiration and the instruction of those sons/daughters of men who have wrought out their divinity in the crucible of daily human living the Kingdom of God will come into being; these Knowers now work actively, under the direct impression of the Prince of Peace, in leading humanity from darkness to light and from death to immortality.

These are the great underlying truths which are distinctive of the Prince of Peace, of the Lord of Wisdom, and of the Church of God, as it expresses itself in the East and in the West; these are the only truths which matter. In the future, the eyes of humanity will be fixed upon the Lord of Love \ Brotherhood and not upon any such manmade institutions as the Church and its dignitaries; the Prince of Peace will be seen as He is in reality, working through His noos, through the Masters of the Wisdom and through His followers who toil unseen (and usually unrecognised) behind world affairs. The sphere of His activity will be known to be the human heart and also the crowded market places of the world, but not some stone edifice and not the pomp and ceremony of any ecclesiastical headquarters.

Our study of the future work of the the Lord of Sacrifice is necessarily based upon three assumptions:

1. That the reappearance o£ the the Lord of Sacrifice is inevitable and assured.

2. That He is today and has been actively working_ through the medium of the spiritual Hierarchy of our planet, of which He is the Head_ for the welfare of humanity.

3. That certain teachings will be given and certain energies will be released by Him in the routine of His work and coming. People are apt to forget that the coming of the Prince of Peace necessitates a period of intensive preparation by Him; He , too, works under law and is subject to control from various sources_ just as are all human beings, but in a much lesser degree.

His reappearance is conditioned and determined by the reaction of humanity itself; by that reaction He must abide. His work is subject also to certain phases of spiritual and cyclic timing and to impressions from sources to be found on higher levels than those upon which He normally works. Just as human affairs have effects upon His action, so great "determinations" and "profound settlements within the will of God" also have their effects. The human side or nature of the Lord of Love, perfected and sensitive, responds to the invocation and to the appeal of men; His divine side or nature is equally responsive to the impact of energies, issuing from "the centre where the will of God is known." Between these two, He has to make adjustment and bring about right timing. The bringing of good out of human so-called evil is no easy task; the vision of the Prince of Peace is so vast and His grasp of the Law of Cause and Effect, of Action and Reaction is such that the arriving at right decision as to activity and time is no simple one. Human beings are apt to look at all that happens, or that could happen, from the purely human and immediate angle; they have little understanding of the problems, decisions and implications with which the Lord of Sacrifice is today faced. In these, His pledged noos share. Their task is to develop "the mind that is in the Christ [/ Lord of Love / Brother - Sisterhood / harmless, non-self-aggrandizing World service / Peace / Sacrifice. wsw]" and as they do so, they will help make clear the way for "the coming of His feet," as the Bible puts it (Heb. XII.13). Seeing life and events in the light of the spiritual values, as He does, will facilitate the giving out of the new teaching and will provide the skeleton structure of the new world religion, thus giving us a fresh view of divine intention and a living insight into the minds of Those Who implement the divine will and are the engineers of humanity's future. Let us, therefore, try and appreciate not only the opportunity which the Lord of Sacrifice has to help us (which is the usual presentation), but let us look also at the crises and problems with which He is confronted as He faces the work which He must do.

&&&&&&&

The Good News:

We have used the word "subjective" a great deal in our writings; we have done this in an effort to shift the focus of attention to that which lies below the surface. This refers, in the case of aspirants, to the subjective synthesis in the three worlds and not to the astral and mental planes per se, or specifically to egoic levels. If the inner kingdom of divine realities is to demonstrate upon earth, it will come through the emergence of the inner synthesis on to the physical plane, and this is brought about by vital recognition and an expression of the realities and laws governing that kingdom. The organisation which follows the Vision is entirely subjective in nature and pervasive in quality. It is a process of germination, but if that which germinates does not eventually appear in objective manifestation the activity is then abortive.

The influence of these new groups is due to the close inner relation demonstrated through uniform thinking and a recognised unity of purpose. It is this reason (a truly for scientific one in its nature) that we have emphasised so strongly the ordinary characteristics of the trained noo, which are non-criticism, sensitivity and love. Where these are lacking, this simultaneous oneness and directed thought and this "group aroma" (as it is esoterically called, though the word we are attempting to translate is more adequate than the above) become impossible. We have not been interested in the elimination of hindering faults for the individual's sake, but for the carrying forward of the desired group purposes. The need is for group thinking of a powerful nature along the indicated lines; for visualisation of the Vision of such a clear nature that it becomes a fact for the individual; for the development and functioning of the imagination, applied to the lines of outcome and results, and functioning so creatively that the results are seen with clarity and must inevitably materialise. It involves also the holding of the inner subjective link with each other with such firmness that potent centres of force and of creative energy_ working under inspiration from the Hierarchy, via the focussed minds of group members who are definitely en rapport with their souls and with each other_ may function so successfully that the new civilisation and the new culture can be rapidly established. As this has to be founded on a basis of loving goodwill and upon nondestruction, and as its methods lead to right relations between men and nations, it is essential that the establishing groups should themselves express the subtler aspects of these desired virtues.

The emphasis upon the work which serving groups must seek to develop is that of an organised, scientific activity. Esoterically, this involves an understanding of the basic science of psyientism, which is that of energy. The qualities, characteristics and activity upon which you should be engaged are definitely the expression and understanding of energy along some line; hitherto, for the majority, force has been used and its impact on other forces has been noted and recorded as force impacting force, leading thus to forceful results. But we seek to have you, as esotericists, deal with energy and the result of its impact upon forces. This is the scientific aspect of the psyientific life.

The world is today full of forces in conflict and in wrong relation with each other, and this produces the present chaos. The new order will be brought into expression by the play of the spiritual energy upon the forces in the three worlds, and this will be the task of the New Groups when organised and functioning correctly. In these words, We have summed up one of the first and most important objectives of the group work with which we and others of the workers upon the spiritual side of life are at this time occupied. Some small understanding of the significance of these words can be gained if you will watch the effect that you produce in your environment during those times when you do succeed in living as souls and are therefore expressing soul energy, and are thus counteracting the personality forces in yourselves and in those around you.

The desire of the Hierarchy at this time is to fill the world of striving forces with points of spiritual energy, and to distribute everywhere those who are affiliated with spiritual groups and are therefore linked subjectively to their group Brothers in all lands, so that a pervasive, intelligent influence can ceaselessly make its impact felt upon the minds of men and produce finally the needed good feeling, good will and good lives.

&&&&&&&

on WW 1 & 11

This world crisis, with all its horror and suffering, is_ in the last analysis_ the result of successful evolutionary processes. We are ready to recognise that when a man's life cycle has been run and he/she has learnt the lessons which the experience of any particular life has been intended to teach, his physical body and the inner form aspects (making the sum total of his personality expression) will begin to deteriorate; destructive agencies within the form itself will become active and eventually death will take place, resulting in the liberation of the indwelling life in order that a new and better form may be built. This, we perforce accept either blindly or intelligently, regarding it as a natural and unavoidable process, but normal and inevitable. We are apt, however, to forget that what is true of the individual is true of humanity. Cycles of civilisation such as that we call our modern civilisation are analogous to a particular, individual, human incarnation with its inception, its progress and growth, its useful maturity and its ensuing deterioration and subsequent death or the passing away of the form.

Forms are ever open to attack. A strong subjective life and spiritual detachment are the two safeguards. Where the form is more potent than the life, danger is imminent; where attachment to the material aspect or organisation is present, spiritual values are lost.

Today we are watching the death of a civilisation or cycle of incarnation of humanity. In all fields of human expression, crystallisation and deterioration had set in. Worn-out religious dogmas and the grip of theology and the orthodox churches have no longer sufficed to hold the allegiance of the potent, inner, spiritual life; humanity is deeply spiritual and innately religious but needs today a new form with which to clothe the ancient verities. Old political schools have been deemed inadequate and new ideologies bear witness to the strength of the life which is seeking more adequate expression; the educational systems, having served their purpose, are fast being recognised as inadequate to meet the need of the demanding life of the race; there is everywhere a cry for change and for those new forms in the religious, political, educational and economic life of the race which will allow of freer and better spiritual expression. Such a change is rapidly coming and is regarded by some as death_ terrible and to be avoided if possible. It is indeed death but it is beneficent and needed. It is this realisation of the passing of a civilisation which gives rise to the recurrent and foreboding cry, "This is the death of civilisation; it must not be"; "This is the end of the order, and the old order must be saved"; "This is the destruction of the old and loved values, and it must not be permitted."

That humanity is bringing about this needed change in unnecessary, cruel and painful ways is indeed true, just as it is true today that human beings by their wrong thinking, foolish habits of physical living and undesirable emotional attitudes do precipitate a final, physical breakdown and eventually death. Nevertheless, for the progress of the soul of the individual and the soul of humanity, death is inevitable, good and necessary; it is also a practice with which we are all most familiar in our own experience and in watching it in others. But we need to remember that the worst death of all (as far as humanity is concerned) would be if a form of civilisation or a body form became static and eternal; if the old order never altered and the old values were never transmuted into higher and better ones, that would indeed be a disaster.

We need to bear in mind also that the forces of destruction or death are two-fold: first, the rapidly emerging and developing life with its demand for more room for expression and fuller experience, and its spiritual aspiration for change and progress; and secondly, the reactionary forces and the conservative attitudes which adhere to the well known and the familiar, and which hate the new, the untried and the unknown. Both of these produce the great and divine transition from the past into the future, and from the old into the new, from experience into fruition and then into experience again. The realities are eternal and undying; the forms are ephemeral and temporary; the soul is persistent and deathless; the form is changing and doomed to die. The processes of evolution have in the past and will in the future prove successful in bringing forms to birth, to maturity and to death.

But (and this is the interesting and significant point) humanity is for the first time aware of process. It has for the first time chosen intelligently to observe what is going on and to relate it to experience and to environment. This in itself indicates a stage of true and much to be desired development. Reasoning, analysis and the presentation of differing viewpoints are going on in every country on a large scale with varying results, based on differences of temperament, of tradition, of development and of training.

This stage of death and of birth (for the two are proceeding simultaneously) can be easily grasped by the esotericist as he/she studies the world conflict in its two distinctive periods: 1914 to 1918, and 1939 until 1942. The first stage (if you could see the situation as it truly is) was most definitely the death stage; the second stage, in which we now find ourselves, is literally the stage of birth_ the birth pangs of the new order and of the new civilisation through which humanity's sense of life can express itself. The mother dies in order that the child may live; the form is sacrificed to the life. But today, the form aspect, the Mother or matter aspect, is dying consciously, and just as consciously the child, the infant civilisation, is coming into being. This is the new thing and it is in this that we are all participating. It is the death of the personality of humanity and the coming in of the soul.

Such a dying is ever a painful process. Pain has always been the purifying agent, employed by the Lords of Destiny, to bring about liberation. The accumulated pain of the present conflict and the inherited pain of the earlier stage (begun in 1914) is bringing about a salutary and changing world consciousness. The Lord of Pain has descended from His throne and is treading the ways of earth today, bringing distress, agony and terror to those who cannot interpret His ends, but bringing also a re-stimulation of the instinct to self-preservation which_ in its higher aspect_ is the instinct to immortality; it tends to focus humanity's attention upon the life aspect and not upon the form. The names of the Lords of Karma signify, symbolically and from the angle of their inner meaning, Relationship, Enlightenment, Pain and Return. Ponder on this. They are all peculiarly active at this time, and in their activity lies the hope of humanity.